CheckPointVPN 1EdgeUserGuide PDF

Check Point VPN-1 Edge
Internet Security Appliance
User Guide
Version 7.0
Part No: 700800, December 2006

COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
Copyright © 2006 SofaWare, All Rights Reserved. No part of this distribute and/or modify the software.
document may be reproduced in any form or by any means without
written permission from SofaWare. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on,
does not represent a commitment on part of SofaWare Technologies we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original,
Ltd. so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
SofaWare, Safe@Home and Safe@Office are trademarks, service original authors' reputations.
marks, or registered trademarks of SofaWare Technologies Ltd. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents.
Check Point, the Check Point logo, FireWall-1, FireWall-1 We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will
SecureServer, FireWall-1 SmallOffice, FloodGate-1, INSPECT, IQ individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program
Engine, Meta IP, MultiGate, Open Security Extension, OPSEC, proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent
Provider-1, SecureKnowledge, SecureUpdate, SiteManager-1, SVN, must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
UAM, User-to-Address Mapping, UserAuthority, Visual Policy The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
Editor, VPN-1, VPN-1 Accelerator Card, VPN-1 Gateway, VPN-1 modification follow.
SecureClient, VPN-1 SecuRemote, VPN-1 SecureServer, and VPN-1
Edge are trademarks, service marks, or registered trademarks of Check GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Point Software Technologies Ltd. or its affiliates. FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered 0. This License applies to any program or other work which
trademarks of their respective owners. contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be
distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
The products described in this document are protected by U.S. Patent "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work
No. 5,606,668 and 5,835,726 and may be protected by other U.S. based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative
Patents, foreign patents, or pending applications. work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee
Version 2, June 1991 is addressed as "you".
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is
license document, but changing it is not allowed. covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether
PREAMBLE that is true depends on what the Program does.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices
General Public License applies to most of the Free Software that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give
Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is the Program.
covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You
can apply it to your programs, too. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not fee.
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any
this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
free programs; and that you know you can do these things. above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent
to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These notices stating that you changed the files and the date of
restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute any change.
copies of the software, or if you modify it. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a
have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of
code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. this License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access
way, to print or display an announcement including an to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the
warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the
and that users may redistribute the program under these source along with the object code.
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
interactive but does not normally print such an otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
announcement, your work based on the Program is not void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
required to print an announcement.) However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, parties remain in full compliance.
and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
it. Program or works based on it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on
rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
based on the Program. these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You
Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other License.
work under the scope of this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
machine-readable source code, which must be License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least
the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
than your cost of physically performing source
distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
corresponding source code, to be distributed under the any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
customarily used for software interchange; or, circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This
claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial
the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public
distribution and only if you received the program in
license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to
object code or executable form with such an offer, in
the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
accord with Subsection b above.)
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control be a consequence of the rest of this License.
compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major
original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies
those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
the executable.
countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the When installing the appliance, ensure that the vents are not
limitation as if written in the body of this License. blocked.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new Do not place this product on an unstable surface or support.
versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult,
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ as well as serious damage to the product.
in detail to address new problems or concerns. Do not use the appliance outdoors.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program Do not expose the appliance to liquid or moisture.
specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
later version", you have the option of following the terms and Do not expose the appliance to extreme high or low
conditions either of that version or of any later version published by temperatures.
the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a Do not disassemble or open the appliance. Failure to comply
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever will void the warranty.
published by the Free Software Foundation.
Do not use any accessories other than those approved by
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free Check Point. Failure to do so may result in loss of
programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the performance, damage to the product, fire, electric shock or
author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the injury, and will void the warranty.
Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we
Route power supply cords where they are not likely to be
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by
walked on or pinched by items placed on or against them. Pay
the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free
particular attention to cords where they are attached to plugs
software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
and convenience receptacles, and examine the point where
NO WARRANTY they exit the unit.
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF Do not connect or disconnect power supply cables and data
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO transmission lines during thunderstorms.
THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
Do not overload wall outlets or extension cords, as this can
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Overloaded AC outlets,
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
extension cords, frayed power cords, damaged or cracked wire
PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
insulation, and broken plugs are dangerous. They may result in
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
a shock or fire hazard. Periodically examine the cord, and if its
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
appearance indicates damage or deteriorated insulation, have it
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
replaced by your service technician.
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD If the unit or any part of it is damaged, disconnect the power
THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST plug and inform the responsible service personnel. Non-
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. observance may result in damage to the router.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY POWER ADAPTER
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED Operate this product only from the type of power source
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING indicated on the product’s marking label. If you are not sure of
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR the type of power supplied to your home, consult your dealer
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR or local power company.
INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT
Use only the power supply provided with your product. Check
LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
whether the device’s set supply voltage is the same as the local
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
supply voltage.
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE
WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR To reduce risk of damage to the unit, remove it from the outlet
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF by holding the power adapter rather than the cord.
SUCH DAMAGES.
To receive the SofaWare GPL licensed code, contact
[email protected]. SECURITY DISCLAIMER
The appliance provides your network with the highest level of
security. However, no single security product can provide you with
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS absolute protection against a determined effort to break into your
system. We recommend using additional security measures to secure
Carefully read the Safety Instructions the Installation and Operating
highly valuable or sensitive information.
Procedures provided in this User's Guide before attempting to install
or operate the appliance. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in damage to equipment and/or personal injuries.
Before cleaning the appliance, unplug the power cord. Use
only a soft cloth dampened with water for cleaning.
Contents
Contents
About This Guide ................................................................................................................................vii
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................1
About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance ..............................................................................1
VPN-1 Edge Products .........................................................................................................................2
Product Features..................................................................................................................................4
Software Requirements .....................................................................................................................15
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Series Appliance .................................................................16
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Series Appliance ......................................................20
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Series Appliance .................................................25
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance.................................................................29
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance................................................................34
Contacting Technical Support...........................................................................................................39
Installing and Setting Up VPN-1 Edge..............................................................................................41
Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance ................................................................................41
Wall Mounting the Appliance ...........................................................................................................49
Mounting the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance on a DIN Rail...................................................51
Securing the Appliance against Theft ...............................................................................................55
Appliance Installation .......................................................................................................................57
Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance.............................................................................................65
Getting Started ....................................................................................................................................69
Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal.............................................................................................69
Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal ..............................................................................................72
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS ............................................................74
Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal ...........................................................................................................76
Logging off .......................................................................................................................................81
Contents i
Contents
Configuring the Internet Connection ................................................................................................83

Overview...........................................................................................................................................83
Using the Internet Wizard .................................................................................................................84
Using Internet Setup..........................................................................................................................99
Setting Up Dialup Modems.............................................................................................................129
Viewing Internet Connection Information ......................................................................................137
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection ...................................................................................139
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection............................................................................139
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection.....................................................................................140
Managing Your Network..................................................................................................................141
Configuring Network Settings ........................................................................................................141
Using Network Objects ...................................................................................................................170
Using Static Routes.........................................................................................................................179
Managing Ports ...............................................................................................................................185
Using Bridges.....................................................................................................................................197
Overview.........................................................................................................................................197
Workflow ........................................................................................................................................203
Adding and Editing Bridges............................................................................................................204
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges .............................................................................................208
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges .........................................................................................213
Configuring High Availability .........................................................................................................217
Overview.........................................................................................................................................217
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway .................................................................................220
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways.....................................................................................224
Using Traffic Shaper.........................................................................................................................229
Overview.........................................................................................................................................229
Setting Up Traffic Shaper ...............................................................................................................230
ii Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

Contents
Predefined QoS Classes ..................................................................................................................231

Adding and Editing Classes ............................................................................................................232
Deleting Classes..............................................................................................................................236
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults...................................................................................................237
Working with Wireless Networks....................................................................................................239
Overview.........................................................................................................................................239
Configuring Wireless Networks......................................................................................................247
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity..........................................................................................273
Viewing Reports ................................................................................................................................277
Viewing the Event Log ...................................................................................................................277
Using the Traffic Monitor ...............................................................................................................280
Viewing Computers ........................................................................................................................285
Viewing Connections ......................................................................................................................287
Viewing Wireless Statistics.............................................................................................................289
Viewing ADSL Statistics ................................................................................................................293
Setting Your Security Policy ............................................................................................................297
Default Security Policy ...................................................................................................................298
Setting the Firewall Security Level.................................................................................................298
Configuring Servers ........................................................................................................................301
Using Rules .....................................................................................................................................303
Using SmartDefense .......................................................................................................................314
Using Port-Based Security ..............................................................................................................359
Using Secure HotSpot .....................................................................................................................364
Defining an Exposed Host ..............................................................................................................370
Using VStream Antivirus .................................................................................................................373
Overview.........................................................................................................................................373
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus...........................................................................................375
Contents iii
Contents
Viewing VStream Signature Database Information ........................................................................376

Configuring VStream Antivirus ......................................................................................................377
Updating VStream Antivirus...........................................................................................................390
SMART Management and Subscription Services..........................................................................391
Connecting to a Service Center.......................................................................................................392
Viewing Services Information ........................................................................................................397
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection ..................................................................................398
Configuring Your Account .............................................................................................................399
Disconnecting from Your Service Center .......................................................................................399
Web Filtering ..................................................................................................................................400
Email Filtering ................................................................................................................................405
Automatic and Manual Updates......................................................................................................410
Working with VPNs ..........................................................................................................................413
Overview.........................................................................................................................................414
Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server ............................................................420
Adding and Editing VPN Sites .......................................................................................................433
Deleting a VPN Site ........................................................................................................................464
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site.......................................................................................................465
Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site......................................................................................466
Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site .........................................................................................470
Installing a Certificate .....................................................................................................................470
Uninstalling a Certificate ................................................................................................................477
Viewing VPN Tunnels ....................................................................................................................478
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections ....................................................................................481
Managing Users.................................................................................................................................483
Changing Your Login Credentials ..................................................................................................483
Adding and Editing Users ...............................................................................................................486
iv Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

Contents
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users ...............................................................................................489

Viewing and Deleting Users ...........................................................................................................491
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users .....................................................................................492
Using RADIUS Authentication.......................................................................................................492
Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute.....................................................................497
Using Remote Desktop......................................................................................................................501
Overview.........................................................................................................................................501
Workflow ........................................................................................................................................502
Configuring Remote Desktop .........................................................................................................502
Configuring the Host Computer......................................................................................................506
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop.......................................................................................509
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................513
Viewing Firmware Status................................................................................................................514
Updating the Firmware ...................................................................................................................516
Upgrading Your Software Product..................................................................................................518
Configuring Syslog Logging...........................................................................................................520
Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line..........................................................................522
Configuring HTTPS........................................................................................................................527
Configuring SSH.............................................................................................................................530
Configuring SNMP .........................................................................................................................532
Setting the Time on the Appliance..................................................................................................535
Using Diagnostic Tools...................................................................................................................538
Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration..................................................................552
Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults ..........................................................................555
Running Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................558
Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance ...........................................................................................559
Contents v
Contents
Using Network Printers ....................................................................................................................561

Overview.........................................................................................................................................561
Setting Up Network Printers ...........................................................................................................562
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers ...........................................................................565
Viewing Network Printers...............................................................................................................575
Changing Network Printer Ports .....................................................................................................576
Resetting Network Printers .............................................................................................................577
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................579
Connectivity ....................................................................................................................................579
Service Center and Upgrades ..........................................................................................................583
Other Problems ...............................................................................................................................584
Specifications .....................................................................................................................................585
Technical Specifications .................................................................................................................585
CE Declaration of Conformity ........................................................................................................592
Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement ..........................595
ADSL Settings ...................................................................................................................................597
Glossary of Terms .............................................................................................................................605
Index...................................................................................................................................................611
vi Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance
About This Guide

To make finding information in this manual easier, some types of information are marked
with special symbols or formatting.
Boldface type is used for command and button names.
Note: Notes are denoted by indented text and preceded by the Note icon.
Warning: Warnings are denoted by indented text and preceded by the Warning icon.
Each task is marked with an icon indicating the VPN-1 Edge product required to perform
the task, as follows:
If this icon appears... You can perform the task using these products...
VPN-1 Edge X , with or without ADSL, and VPN-1 Edge X Industrial
VPN-1 Edge W, with or without ADSL
All products with USB ports – specifically, VPN-1 Edge W, VPN-1

Edge W ADSL, VPN-1 Edge X Industrial, and VPN-1 Edge X ADSL
VPN-1 Edge X or VPN-1 Edge W, with ADSL only
VPN-1 Edge X or VPN-1 Edge W, without ADSL only
Chapter 1: About This Guide vii

Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter introduces the Check Point VPN-1 Edge appliance and this guide.
This chapter includes the following topics:
About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance........................................1
VPN-1 Edge Products...................................................................................2
Product Features ...........................................................................................4
Software Requirements ..............................................................................15
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Series Appliance...........................16
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Series Appliance ...............20
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Series Appliance...........25
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance..........................29
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance .........................34
Contacting Technical Support ....................................................................39

The Check Point VPN-1 Edge appliance is a unified threat management (UTM) appliance
that enables secure high-speed Internet access from the office. Developed by SofaWare
Technologies, an affiliate of Check Point Software Technologies, the worldwide leader in
securing the Internet, the VPN-1 Edge appliance incorporates the X and W product
families. Both product families include models with and without an integrated ADSL
modem, and the X family includes an industrial model especially designed for use and
durability in extreme environments. The VPN-1 Edge firewall, based on the world-leading
Check Point Embedded NGX Stateful Inspection technology, inspects and filters all
incoming and outgoing traffic, blocking all unauthorized traffic.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance also allows sharing your Internet connection among several
PCs or other network devices, enabling advanced office networking and saving the cost of
purchasing static IP addresses.
All VPN-1 Edge appliances can be integrated into an overall enterprise security policy for
maximum security. Check Point's Security Management Architecture (SMART) delivers a
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
VPN-1 Edge Products
single enterprise-wide security policy that you can centrally manage and automatically
deploy to an unlimited number of VPN-1 Edge gateways.
You can also connect VPN-1 Edge appliances to security services available from select
service providers, including firewall security and software updates, Web Filtering,
reporting, VPN management, and Dynamic DNS. Business users can use the VPN-1 Edge
appliance to securely connect to the corporate network.
VPN-1 Edge Products

The VPN-1 Edge appliance incorporates the following product families.
• VPN-1 Edge X Internet Security Appliance
• VPN-1 Edge W Wireless Security Appliance
Each product family includes various hardware series and models, as described in the
following tables. You can upgrade your VPN-1 Edge appliance to a more advanced model
within its hardware series, without replacing the hardware. Contact your reseller for more
details.
Table 1: VPN-1 Edge X Products
Hardware Series Models
VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge X8
VPN-1 Edge X16
VPN-1 Edge X32
VPN-1 Edge XU
VPN-1 Edge X Industrial VPN-1 Edge X8 Industrial
VPN-1 Edge X16 Industrial
VPN-1 Edge X32 Industrial
VPN-1 Edge XU Industrial
2 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

VPN-1 Edge Products
VPN-1 Edge X ADSL VPN-1 Edge X8 ADSL
VPN-1 Edge X16 ADSL
VPN-1 Edge X32 ADSL
VPN-1 Edge XU ADSL
Table 2: VPN-1 Edge W Products
Hardware Series Models
VPN-1 Edge W VPN-1 Edge W8
VPN-1 Edge W16
VPN-1 Edge W32
VPN-1 Edge WU
VPN-1 Edge W ADSL VPN-1 Edge W8 ADSL
VPN-1 Edge W16 ADSL
VPN-1 Edge W32 ADSL
VPN-1 Edge WU ADSL
Product Features
Product Features
VPN-1 Edge X Product Family Features
Table 3: VPN-1 Edge X Product Family Features
Feature VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge X

Industrial ADSL
SKU Prefix CPUTM-EDGE- CPUTM-XG-n-IND CPUTM-EDGE-XG-

XG n-ADSL
Concurrent Users 8 / 16 / 32 / Unrestricted
Capacity
Firewall Throughput 150 (XU) / 80 (Other Models)

(Mbps)
VPN Throughput (Mbps) 30 (XU) / 20 (Other Models)
Concurrent Firewall 8,000

Connections
Hardware Features
4-Port LAN Switch 10/100 Mbps
WAN Port Ethernet, 10/100 Ethernet, 10/100 ADSL2+

Mbps Mbps

Product Features
ADSL Standards — — ADSL2, ADSL2+,

T.1413 G.DMT
(G.992.1)
G.Lite (G.992.2)
Either:
ANNEX A (ADSL
over POTS)
Or:
ANNEX B (ADSL
over ISDN)
DMZ/WAN2 Port 10/100 Mbps
Dialup Backup With external serial / USB modem
Console Port (Serial)
Print Server
USB 2.0 Ports — 2 2
Firewall & Security Features
Check Point Stateful

Inspection Firewall
Application Intelligence
SmartDefense™ (IPS)
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Product Features
Four Preset Security

Policies
Anti-spoofing
Voice over IP (H.323)

Support
Unlimited INSPECT
Policy Rules
Instant Messenger
Blocking / Monitoring
P2P File Sharing Blocking

/ Monitoring
Port-based and Tag-

based VLAN
Port-based Security
(802.1x)
Secure HotSpot (Guest

Access)
VPN
Remote Access Users 1/10/15/25
VPN Server with SecuRemote, L2TP

OfficeMode and RADIUS
Support
Site-to-Site VPN Gateway

Product Features
Route-based VPN
Backup VPN Gateways
Remote Access VPN SecuRemote (Included)

Client
Site-to-Site VPN Tunnels 100

(Managed)
IPSEC Features Hardware-accelerated DES, 3DES, AES, MD5, SHA-1, Hardware

Random Number Generator (RNG), Internet Key Exchange (IKE),
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), IPSEC Compression, IPSEC
NAT Traversal (NAT-T), IPSEC VPN Pass-through
Networking
Supported Internet Static IP, DHCP, Static IP, DHCP, Static IP, DHCP,
Connection Methods PPPoE, PPTP, PPPoE, PPTP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, Telstra, Cable, Telstra, Cable,
Dialup Dialup Dialup, EoA, PPPoA
Transparent Bridge Mode
Spanning Tree Protocol

(STP)
Traffic Shaper (QoS)
Traffic Monitoring
Dead Internet Connection

Detection (DCD)
Backup Internet
Connection
Product Features
DHCP Server, Client, and

Relay
MAC Cloning
Static NAT
Static Routes and Source

Routes
Ethernet Cable Type

Recognition
DiffServ Tagging
Automatic Gateway
Failover (HA)
Dynamic Routing
Management
Central Management Check Point SmartCenter, Check Point SmartLSM, Check Point
SmartUpdate, CheckPoint Provider-1, SofaWare SMP
Local Management HTTP / HTTPS / SSH / SNMP / Serial CLI
Remote Desktop Integrated Microsoft Terminal Services Client
Local Diagnostics Tools Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, VPN Tunnel Monitor, Connection
Table Monitor, Active Computers Display, Local Logs
NTP Automatic Time

Setting
TFTP Rapid Deployment

Product Features
Hardware Specifications
Power 100/110/120/210/22 5V DC / 24V DC 100/110/120/210/220/

0/230VAC (Linear 230VAC (Linear
Power Adapter) or Power Adapter) or
100~240VAC 100~240VAC
(Switched Power (Switched Power
Adapter) Adapter)
Mounting Options Desktop, Wall, or DIN Rail or Rack Desktop, Wall, or

Rack Mounting* Mounting* Rack Mounting*
Warranty 1 Year Hardware
* Rack mounting requires the optional rack mounting kit (sold separately).
VPN-1 Edge W Product Family Features

Table 4: VPN-1 Edge W Product Family Features
Feature VPN-1 Edge W VPN-1 Edge W ADSL
SKU Prefix CPUTM-EDGE-WG CPUTM-EDGE-WG-n-

ADSL
Concurrent Users 8 / 16 / 32 / Unrestricted
Capacity
Firewall Throughput (Mbps) 150 (WU) / 80 (Other Models)
VPN Throughput (Mbps) 30 (WU) / 20 (Other Models)
Concurrent Firewall 8,000

Connections
Product Features
Hardware Features
4-Port LAN Switch 10/100 Mbps
WAN Port 10/100 Mbps ADSL2+
ADSL Standards — ADSL2, ADSL2+, T.1413

G.DMT (G.992.1)
G.Lite (G.992.2)
ANNEX A (ADSL over

POTS), ANNEX B (ADSL
over ISDN)
DMZ/WAN2 Port 10/100 Mbps
Dialup Backup (Req. Ext.

Modem)
Console Port (Serial)
Print Server USB 2.0 Ports 2
Firewall & Security Features
Check Point Stateful Inspection

Firewall
Application Intelligence (IPS)
Intrusion Detection and

Prevention using Check Point
SmartDefense
Network Address Translation

(NAT)

Product Features
Four Preset Security Policies
Anti-spoofing
Voice over IP (H.323) Support
Unlimited INSPECT Policy

Rules
Instant Messenger Blocking /

Monitoring
P2P File Sharing Blocking /

Monitoring
Port-based and Tag-based

VLAN
Port-based Security (802.1x)
Secure HotSpot (Guest Access)
VPN
Remote Access Users 1/10/15/25
VPN Server with OfficeMode SecuRemote, L2TP

and RADIUS Support
Site-to-Site VPN Gateway
Route-based VPN
Backup VPN Gateways
Remote Access VPN Client SecuRemote (Included)
Product Features
Site-to-Site VPN Tunnels 100

(Managed)
IPSEC Features Hardware-accelerated DES, 3DES, AES, MD5, SHA-1,

Hardware Random Number Generator (RNG), Internet
Key Exchange (IKE), Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS),
IPSEC Compression, IPSEC NAT Traversal (NAT-T), ,
IPSEC VPN Pass-through
Networking
Supported Internet Connection Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE,
Methods PPTP, Telstra, Cable, PPTP, Telstra, Cable,
Dialup Dialup, EoA, PPPoA
Transparent Bridge Mode
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
Traffic Shaper (QoS)
Traffic Monitoring
Dead Internet Connection

Detection (DCD)
Backup Internet Connection
DHCP Server, Client, and Relay
MAC Cloning
Static NAT
Static Routes and Source

Routes

Product Features
Ethernet Cable Type

Recognition
DiffServ Tagging
Automatic Gateway Failover

(HA)
Dynamic Routing
Wireless
Wireless Protocols 802.11b (11 Mbps), 802.11g (54 Mbps), Super G* (108
Mbps)
Wireless Security VPN over Wireless, WEP, WPA2 (802.11i), WPA-

Personal, WPA-Enterprise, 802.1x
Wireless QoS (WMM)
Dual Diversity Antennas
Virtual Access Points (VAP)
Wireless Distribution System

(WDS) Links
Wireless Range (Standard

Up to 100 m Indoors and 300 m Outdoors
Mode)
Wireless Range (XR Mode)* Up to 300 m Indoors and 1 km Outdoors
Product Features
Management
Central Management Check Point SmartCenter, Check Point SmartLSM,

Check Point SmartUpdate, CheckPoint Provider-1,
SofaWare SMP
Local Management HTTP / HTTPS / SSH / SNMP / Serial CLI
Remote Desktop Integrated Microsoft Terminal Services Client
Local Diagnostics Tools Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, VPN Tunnel Monitor,
Connection Table Monitor, Wireless Monitor, Active
Computers Display, Local Logs
NTP Automatic Time Setting
TFTP Rapid Deployment
Hardware Specifications
Power 100/110/120/210/220/230VAC (Linear Power Adapter) or

100~240VAC (Switched Power Adapter)
Mounting Options Desktop or Wall Mounting
Warranty 1 Year Hardware
* Super G and XR mode are only available with select wireless network adapters. Actual
ranges are subject to change in different environments.

Software Requirements
Optional Security Services

The following subscription security services are available to VPN-1 Edge owners by
connecting to a Service Center:
• Firewall Security and Software Updates
• Web Filtering
• Email Antivirus and Antispam Protection
• VStream Embedded Antivirus Updates
• Dynamic DNS Service
• VPN Management
• Security Reporting
• Vulnerability Scanning Service
These services require an additional purchase of subscription. For more information,
contact your Check Point reseller.
Software Requirements
One of the following browsers:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
• Netscape Navigator 6.0 and higher
• Mozilla Firefox
Note: For proper operation of the VPN-1 Edge Portal, disable any pop-up blockers
for http://my.firewall.
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Series Appliance
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Series

Appliance
Package Contents
The VPN-1 Edge X package includes the following:
• VPN-1 Edge X Internet Security Appliance
• Power supply
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9); model SBX-166LHGE-5 only
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable
for each attached device
• A broadband Internet connection via cable or DSL modem with Ethernet
interface (RJ-45)

Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your VPN-1
Edge appliance.
Figure 1: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Rear Panel

The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge X appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 5: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power
supply to this jack.
RESET A button used for rebooting the VPN-1 Edge appliance or resetting the VPN-1
Edge appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press
this button.
• Short press. Reboots the VPN-1 Edge appliance

• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its factory
defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
VPN-1 Edge appliance. This results in the loss of all security services
and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will
have to re-configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
Label Description
Serial A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the VPN-
1 Edge CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup
modem.
Depending on the appliance model, this port may have either a DB9 RS232
connector, or an RJ-45 connector. In models with an RJ-45 connector, an RJ-45
to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
WAN Wide Area Network: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your cable or
DSL modem, or for connecting a hub when setting up more than one Internet
connection
DMZ/ A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone)
WAN2 computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting
computers or other network devices
Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge X appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the
appliance’s operation.
Figure 2: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Front Panel

For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge X appliance’s status LEDs, see the table below.

Table 6: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
PWR/SEC Off Power off
Flashing quickly (Green) System boot-up
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
On (Green) Normal operation
Flashing (Red) Hacker attack blocked
On (Red) Error
LAN 1- LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off Link is down

4/WAN/
DMZ/WAN2
LINK/ACT On, 100 Off 10 Mbps link established for the

corresponding port
LINK/ACT On, 100 On 100 Mbps link established for the

corresponding port
LNK/ACT Flashing Data is being transmitted/received
VPN Flashing (Green) VPN port in use
Serial Flashing (Green) Serial port in use
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Series Appliance
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Series

Appliance
Package Contents
The VPN-1 Edge X ADSL package includes the following:
• VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Power supply
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• USB extension cable
• RJ11 telephone cable

• An ADSL line suitable for your appliance model:
• For Annex A ADSL models, an ADSL over POTS line (regular telephone
line)
• For Annex B ADSL models, an ADSL over ISDN line (digital line)
• A splitter with a micro-filter, installed on all the jacks connected to the same
phone line
• If desired, you can connect your appliance to an external broadband Internet
connection via a cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet interface (RJ-45).
Rear Panel
Edge appliance.
Figure 3: VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Appliance Rear Panel

The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge X ADSL appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 7: VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
Label Description
this button.

USB Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers or modems
Serial An RJ-45 serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access
the VPN-1 Edge CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external
dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
DSL An RJ-11 ADSL port used for connecting the integrated ADSL modem to an
ADSL line.
A splitter with a micro-filter is usually required when connecting this port to the
phone jack. If unsure, check with your ADSL service provider.
Before connecting this port to the line, make sure that you are using the correct
VPN-1 Edge model for your phone line: Annex A for POTS (regular) phone lines,
and Annex B for ISDN (digital) phone lines. Your VPN-1 Edge model's ADSL
annex type appears on the bottom of the appliance.

Label Description
VLAN trunk.
Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge X ADSL appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to
monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 4: VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Appliance Front Panel

For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge X ADSL appliance’s status LEDs, see the following
table.
Table 8: VPN-1 Edge X ADSL Appliance Status LEDs
On (Red) Error
LAN 1-4/ LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off Link is down

DMZ/WAN2

corresponding port

corresponding port
DSL Link Off Link is down
Link Flashing Establishing ADSL connection
Link On ADSL connection established
DAT Off ADSL line is idle
DAT Flashing Data is being transmitted/received
USB Flashing (Green) USB port in use

Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Series Appliance
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge X Industrial

Series Appliance
A growing number of manufacturing companies are controlling machines on the
production floor over Ethernet. When equipment is exposed to mixed networks of
Industrial Ethernet and TCP/IP, it is also exposed to the threat of network attacks,
malware, and security configuration errors, which can lead to downtime, equipment
damage, or even personal injury.
Especially designed for industrial use, the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance brings the
proven security benefits of the VPN-1 Edge X appliance to the production floor, protecting
machines against all threats. The VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance features the
following design elements:
• Designed solid state with no moving parts, for durability in extreme industrial
environments
• Industrial enclosure with flexible DIN-rail and rack mounting options
• Flexible power input options (5V or 24V DC)
• Ports located on the appliance's front for easy access
Package Contents
The VPN-1 Edge X Industrial package includes the following:
• VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Internet Security Appliance
• 5V DC power supply
• 24V DC connector plug
• DIN rail mounting bracket
• One of the following:

interface (RJ-45)
• A dialup modem with a USB or serial interface
Rear Panel
Figure 5: VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance Rear Panel

The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 9: VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Element Description
5V, 3A A power jack used for supplying 5V power to the unit. Connect the supplied
5V DC power supply to this jack. Do not connect the 5V power supply at the
same time as the 24V DC power supply.
Rectangular Slots for the DIN rail bracket's knobs.

slots
Note: Additional slots appear on each of the appliance's side panels.
For information on mounting the appliance on a DIN rail, see Mounting the
VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance on a DIN Rail on page 51.

Element Description
Circular holes Holes for the DIN rail bracket's screws.
Note: Additional holes appear on each of the appliance's side panels.
For information on mounting the appliance on a DIN rail, see Mounting the
VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance on a DIN Rail on page 51.
Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance's front panel includes ports for network and power
connections, as well as status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 6: VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance Front Panel

The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance's front panel elements.
Table 10: VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance Front Panel Elements
Label Description
VLAN trunk.
connection
Label Description
Serial An DB-9 serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
VPN-1 Edge CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup
modem.
Status For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance’s status LEDs, see
LEDs the following table.
this button.

24V 0.6A A power jack used for supplying 24V DC power to the unit. Connect the supplied
24V DC connector plug to this jack. Do not connect power to this jack at the same
time as using the 5V connector.
Table 11: VPN-1 Edge X Appliance Status LEDs
PWR SEC Off Power off

Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series Appliance
On (Red) Error
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W Series

Appliance
Package Contents
The VPN-1 Edge W package includes the following:
• VPN-1 Edge W Internet Security Appliance
• Power supply
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9); model SBXW-166LHGE-5 only
• Two antennas
• An 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11 Super G wireless card installed on each wireless
station
interface (RJ-45)
Rear Panel
Edge appliance.
Figure 7: VPN-1 Edge W SBXW-166LHGE-5 Appliance Rear Panel
Figure 8: VPN-1 Edge W SBXW-166LHGE-6 Appliance Rear Panel

The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge W appliance's rear panel elements.

Table 12: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
this button.

Serial A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the VPN-
1 Edge CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup
modem.
Depending on the appliance model, this port may have either a DB9 RS232
connector, or an RJ-45 connector. In models with an RJ-45 connector, an RJ-45
to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
connection
Label Description
VLAN trunk.
ANT 1/ Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas

ANT 2
Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge W appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the
appliance’s operation.
Figure 9: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Front Panel

For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge W appliance’s status LEDs, see the table below.
Table 13: VPN-1 Edge W Appliance Status LEDs

On (Red) Error
Flashing (Orange) Software update in progress

WAN/
DMZ/WAN2

corresponding port

corresponding port
WLAN Flashing (Green) WLAN in use
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance
Getting to Know Your VPN-1 Edge W ADSL

Appliance
Package Contents
The VPN-1 Edge W ADSL package includes the following:
• VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Power supply
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• Two antennas
• RJ11 telephone cable
• An ADSL line suitable for your appliance model:
• For Annex A ADSL models, an ADSL over POTS line (regular telephone
line)
• For Annex B ADSL models, an ADSL over ISDN line (digital line)

• A splitter with a micro-filter, installed on all the jacks connected to the same
phone line
• If desired, you can connect your appliance to an external broadband Internet
connection via a cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet interface (RJ-45).
• An 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11 Super G wireless card installed on each wireless
station
Rear Panel
Edge appliance.
Figure 10: VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance Rear Panel

The following table lists the VPN-1 Edge W ADSL appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 14: VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
Label Description
this button.

Serial An RJ-45 serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access
the VPN-1 Edge CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external
dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
DSL An RJ-11 ADSL port used for connecting the integrated ADSL modem to an
ADSL line.
A splitter with a micro-filter is usually required when connecting this port to the
phone jack. If unsure, check with your ADSL service provider.
Before connecting this port to the line, make sure that you are using the correct
VPN-1 Edge model for your phone line: Annex A for POTS (regular) phone lines,
and Annex B for ISDN (digital) phone lines. Your VPN-1 Edge model's ADSL
annex type appears on the bottom of the appliance.

Label Description
VLAN trunk.
ANT1 / Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas

ANT2
Front Panel
The VPN-1 Edge W ADSL appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to
monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 11: VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance Front Panel

For an explanation of the VPN-1 Edge W ADSL appliance’s status LEDs, see the
following table.
Table 15: VPN-1 Edge W ADSL Appliance Status LEDs
On (Red) Error

DMZ/WAN2

corresponding port

corresponding port
DSL Link Off Link is down
Link Flashing Establishing ADSL connection
Link On ADSL connection established
DAT Off ADSL line is idle
DAT Flashing Data is being transmitted/received
WLAN Flashing (Green) WLAN in use

Contacting Technical Support
Contacting Technical Support

If there is a problem with your VPN-1 Edge appliance, see
http://www.checkpoint.com/techsupport/.
You can also download the latest version of this guide from the Check Point software
subscription website.
Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance
Chapter 2
Installing and Setting Up VPN-1 Edge

This chapter describes how to properly set up and install your VPN-1 Edge appliance in
your networking environment.
Before You Install the VPN-1 Edge Appliance..........................................41
Wall Mounting the Appliance ....................................................................49
Mounting the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance on a DIN Rail ............51
Securing the Appliance against Theft.........................................................55
Appliance Installation.................................................................................57
Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance ......................................................65

Prior to connecting and setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance for operation, you must do
the following:
• Check if TCP/IP Protocol is installed on your computer.
• Check your computer’s TCP/IP settings to make sure it obtains its IP address
automatically.
Refer to the relevant section in this guide in accordance with the operating system that runs
on your computer. The sections below will guide you through the TCP/IP setup and
installation process.
Chapter 2: Installing and Setting Up VPN-1 Edge 41

Windows 2000/XP
Checking the TCP/IP Installation
1. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.

The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.
3. Right-click the icon and select Properties from the pop-up menu that
opens.
The Local Area Connection Properties window appears.

4. In the above window, check if TCP/IP appears in the components list and if it is
properly configured with the Ethernet card, installed on your computer. If
TCP/IP does not appear in the Components list, you must install it as described
in the next section.
Installing TCP/IP Protocol

1. In the Local Area Connection Properties window click Install….
The Select Network Component Type window appears.
2. Choose Protocol and click Add.

The Select Network Protocol window appears.

3. Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click OK.

TCP/IP protocol is installed on your computer.
TCP/IP Settings
1. In the Local Area Connection Properties window double-click the Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) component, or select it and click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
2. Click the Obtain an IP address automatically radio button.
Note: Normally, it is not recommended to assign a static IP address to your PC but

rather to obtain an IP address automatically. If for some reason you need to assign
a static IP address, select Specify an IP address, type in an IP address in the range of
192.168.10.129-254, enter 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet Mask field, and click OK to
save the new settings.
(Note that 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the
My Network page.)
3. Click the Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.

4. Click OK to save the new settings.

Your computer is now ready to access your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Mac OS
Use the following procedure for setting up the TCP/IP Protocol.
1. Choose Apple Menus -> Control Panels -> TCP/IP.
The TCP/IP window appears.
2. Click the Connect via drop-down list, and select Ethernet.

3. Click the Configure drop-down list, and select Using DHCP Server.
4. Close the window and save the setup.

Mac OS-X
Use the following procedure for setting up the TCP/IP Protocol.
1. Choose Apple -> System Preferences.
The System Preferences window appears.
2. Click Network.
The Network window appears.

3. Click Configure.

Wall Mounting the Appliance
TCP/IP configuration fields appear.
4. Click the Configure IPv4 drop-down list, and select Using DHCP.
5. Click Apply Now.

For your convenience, the VPN-1 Edge appliance includes a wall mounting kit, which
consists of two plastic conical anchors and two cross-head screws.
To mount the VPN-1 Edge appliance on the wall

1. Decide where you want to mount your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
2. Decide on the mounting orientation.
You can mount the appliance on the wall facing up, down, left, or right.
Note: Mounting the appliance with the ports facing upwards is not recommended, as
dust might accumulate in unused ports.

3. Mark two drill holes on the wall, in accordance with the following sketch:
4. Drill two 3.5 mm diameter holes, approximately 25 mm deep.

5. Insert two plastic conical anchors into the holes.
Note: The conical anchors you received with your VPN-1 Edge appliance are
suitable for concrete walls. If you want to mount the appliance on a plaster wall, you
must use anchors that are suitable for plaster walls.
6. Insert the two screws you received with your VPN-1 Edge appliance into the
plastic conical anchors, and turn them until they protrude approximately 5 mm
from the wall.
7. Align the holes on the VPN-1 Edge appliance's underside with the screws on
the wall, then push the appliance in and down.

Mounting the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance on a DIN Rail
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance is wall mounted. You can now connect it to your
computer. See Network Installation on page 57.
Mounting the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial Appliance on

a DIN Rail
For your convenience, the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance includes a DIN rail
mounting bracket, which enables you to mount your appliance in any DIN Rail cabinet or
enclosure:

You can mount the appliance facing up, down, or outwards. The appliance includes slots
and holes on both side panels and on its rear panel, for this purpose:
To mount the VPN-1 Edge appliance on a DIN rail

1. Decide on the mounting orientation.
2. Do one of the following:
• To mount the appliance facing outwards, thread the DIN rail bracket's knobs
in the slots on the appliance's rear panel.
• To mount the appliance facing up, thread the DIN rail bracket's knobs in the
slots on the appliance's right side panel.
• To mount the appliance facing down, thread the DIN rail bracket's knobs in
the slots on the appliance's left side panel.

Note: To locate the appliance's right and left side panels, hold the appliance with its
front panel facing away from you. The side panel on your left is the appliance left side
panel, and the side panel on your right is the appliance's right side panel.
3. Tighten the DIN rail bracket's screws.

4. Fit the DIN rail bracket's lower groove onto the DIN rail at a slight angle.
5. Firmly push the appliance onto the DIN rail, until the DIN rail bracket's upper
groove snaps onto the DIN rail.

When mounted, the appliance should appear as follows:

Securing the Appliance against Theft

The VPN-1 Edge appliance features a security slot to the rear of the right panel, which
enables you to secure your appliance against theft, using an anti-theft security device.
Note: Anti-theft security devices are available at most computer hardware stores.
This procedure explains how to install a looped security cable on your appliance. A looped
security cable typically includes the parts shown in the diagram below.
Figure 12: Looped Security Cable

While these parts may differ between devices, all looped security cables include a bolt with
knobs, as shown in the diagram below:
Figure 13: Looped Security Cable Bolt

The bolt has two states, Open and Closed, and is used to connect the looped security cable
to the appliance's security slot.
To install an anti-theft device on the VPN-1 Edge appliance

1. If your anti-theft device has a combination lock, set the desired code, as
described in the documentation that came with your device.
2. Connect the anti-theft device's loop to any sturdy mounting point, as described
in the documentation that came with your device.
3. Slide the anti-theft device's bolt to the Open position.
4. Insert the bolt into the VPN-1 Edge appliance's security slot, then slide the bolt
to the Closed position until the bolts holes are aligned.

Appliance Installation
5. Thread the anti-theft device's pin through the bolt’s holes, and insert the pin
into the main body of the anti-theft device, as described in the documentation
that came with your device.
Installing VPN-1 Edge X and W
To install the VPN-1 Edge appliance

1. Verify that you have the correct cable type.
For information, see Network Requirements on page 30.
2. Connect the LAN cable:
• Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's LAN ports.
• Connect the other end to PCs, hubs, or other network devices.
3. Connect the WAN cable:
• Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the appliance's WAN port.
• Connect the other end of the cable to a cable modem, DSL modem, or office
network.
4. Connect the power supply to the appliance's power socket, labeled PWR.
5. Plug the power supply into the wall electrical outlet.
Warning: The VPN-1 Edge appliance power supply is compatible with either 100,
120 or 230 VAC input power. Verify that the wall outlet voltage is compatible with
the voltage specified on your power supply. Failure to observe this warning may
result in injuries or damage to equipment.

Figure 14: Typical Connection Diagram
Installing VPN-1 Edge X Industrial

a. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's LAN
ports.
b. Connect the other end to PCs, hubs, or other network devices.
3. Connect the WAN cable:
a. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the appliance's WAN port.
b. Connect the other end of the cable to a cable modem, DSL modem, or
office network.
• To use 24V DC input power, see Connecting a 24V Power Supply on page
60.

You will need a 24V DC industrial power supply.

• To use 5V DC input power:
1) Connect the 5V power supply provided with the VPN-1 Edge
appliance to the 5V power socket at the back of the unit.
2) Plug the power supply into the wall electrical outlet.
Warning: Verify that the wall outlet voltage is compatible with the voltage specified
on your power supply. Failure to observe this warning may result in injuries or
damage to equipment.
Figure 15: Front Panel Typical Connection Diagram
Figure 16: Rear Panel Typical Connection Diagram

Connecting a 24V Power Supply

Warning: Always turn off the 24V DC industrial power supply before
wiring, installing, or removing the VPN-1 Edge X Industrial appliance.
Failure to do so may cause faulty operation.
To connect 24V power supply

1. Turn off the 24V DC industrial power supply.
2. Prepare a wire harness composed of three wires.
Each wire must meet the following requirements:
• 22 gauge (AWG) or more

• 105ºC insulation rating or more
The wires should be color coded as follows:
• Black wire for (-)

• Brown wire for (+)
• Green and yellow wire for GND
3. Measure the distance between the VPN-1 Edge appliance and the 24V DC
industrial power supply, and cut the wires to the required length.
Note: If the distance to the power supply is greater than five meters, use wires with a
higher gauge. Refer to your wires' derating and electrical parameters for guidelines.
4. Prepare one end of the harness for connection with the VPN-1 Edge appliance,
by doing the following:
a. Strip the wires about 6-7 mm.
b. If desired, apply a splice cap to each of the three stripped wires.
This step is optional.
c. Using a small flathead screwdriver, loosen the screw in the 24V DC
connector plug that came with the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
d. Hold the plug groove-side up, with the terminals facing you.
e. Insert the Green and Yellow (GND) wire in the center terminal.

f. Insert the Black (-) wire in the right terminal.

g. Insert the Brown (+) wire in the left terminal.
h. Firmly tighten the plug's screw.
Warning: Failure to tighten the DC connector plug's screw sufficiently may result in a
fire.
5. Prepare the other end of the harness for connection with the 24V DC industrial
power supply, by doing the following:
a. Strip the wires about 6-7 mm.
b. If desired, apply a splice cap to each of the three stripped wires.
This step is optional.
Refer to your 24V DC industrial power supply's instructions for further information on
preparing the wires.
6. Use a digital voltmeter to verify that your 24V DC industrial power supply's
output voltage is indeed 24V DC.
7. Connect the 24V DC industrial power supply's end of the harness to the 24V
DC industrial power supply's terminal block, by doing the following:
a. If unsure, use a digital voltmeter to determine which of the 24V DC
industrial power supply's posts is the (+).
b. Connect the Green and Yellow (GND) wire to the (GND) post in the
terminal block.
This wire must be connected first.
c. Connect the Black (-) wire to the (-) post in the terminal block.
d. Connect the Brown (+) wire to the (+) post in the terminal block.
Note: Ensure that all wires are connected securely.
8. Connect the VPN-1 Edge appliance's end of the harness to the VPN-1 Edge
appliance, by doing the following:
a. Connect the 24V DC connector plug to the 24V power jack at the front of
the appliance.

b. Turn on the 24V DC industrial power supply.

9. Check that the appliance is operating correctly.
Installing VPN-1 Edge X ADSL and W ADSL

• Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's LAN ports.
• Connect the other end to PCs, hubs, or other network devices.
3. Connect the ADSL cable:
• Connect one end of the telephone cable to the appliance's DSL port.
• Connect the other end of the cable to the ADSL line or micro-filter.
In most cases, a micro-filter is required for each phone jack on your line. The
micro-filter prevents the standard phone lines from interfering with your ADSL
service. Check with your service provider whether a micro-filter is required at
your location.
4. To use the appliance with a non-ADSL connection, or with an existing ADSL
modem, connect an Ethernet cable:
• Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the appliance's DMZ/WAN2 port.
• Connect the other end of the cable to an external cable modem, DSL modem,
or office network.
5. Connect the power supply to the appliance's power socket, labeled PWR.
6. Plug the power supply into the wall electrical outlet.

Warning: The VPN-1 Edge appliance power supply is compatible with either 100,
120 or 230 VAC input power. Verify that the wall outlet voltage is compatible with
the voltage specified on your power supply. Failure to observe this warning may
result in injuries or damage to equipment.
Figure 17: Typical Connection Diagram

Cascading Your Appliance

The VPN-1 Edge appliance protects all computers and network devices that are connected
to its LAN ports. If desired, you can increase the appliance's port capacity by cascading
hubs or switches.
To cascade the VPN-1 Edge appliance to a hub or switch

1. Connect a standard Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's LAN ports or to its
DMZ/WAN2 port.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically detects cable types, so you can use either a
straight-through or crossed Ethernet cable.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to an Ethernet hub or switch.
3. Connect additional computers and network devices to the hub or switch as
desired.
Preparing the Appliance for a Wireless Connection
To prepare the VPN-1 Edge appliance for a wireless connection

1. Connect the antennas that came with your VPN-1 Edge appliance to the ANT1
and ANT2 antenna connectors in the appliance's rear panel.
2. Bend the antennas at the hinges, so that they point upwards.

Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance
Connecting the Appliance to Network Printers
In models with a print server, you can connect network printers.
To connect network printers

1. Connect one end of a USB cable to one of the appliance's USB ports.
If needed, you can use the provided USB extension cord.
2. Connect the other end to a printer or a USB 2.0 hub.
Warning: Verify that the USB devices' power requirement does not exceed the
appliance's USB power supply capabilities. Failure to observe this warning may
cause damage to the appliance and void the warranty.
For information on setting up network printers, see Setting up Network Printers on page
562.
After you have installed the VPN-1 Edge appliance, you must set it up using the steps
shown below.
When setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance for the first time after installation, these steps
follow each other automatically. After you have logged on and set up your password, the
VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard automatically opens and displays the dialog boxes for
performing the initial configuration of the router. If desired, you can exit the Setup Wizard
and perform each of these steps separately.

Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal and setting up your password

Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal on page 69
Configuring an Internet connection

Using the Internet Wizard on page 84
Setting the Time on your VPN-1 Edge appliance

Setting the Time on the Appliance on page 535
Setting up a wireless network (wireless appliances only)

Configuring a Wireless Network on page 239
Installing the Product Key

Upgrading Your Software Product on page 518
Setting up subscription services

Connecting to a Service Center on page 392
You can access the Setup Wizard at any time after initial setup, using the procedure below.
To access the Setup Wizard

1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.

The Firmware page appears.
2. Click VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard.

The VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard opens with the Welcome page displayed.

Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal
Chapter 3
Getting Started
This chapter contains all the information you need in order to get started using your VPN-1
Edge appliance.
Initial Login to the VPN-1 Edge Portal ......................................................69
Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal........................................................72
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS......................74
Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal.....................................................................76
Logging off.................................................................................................81
The first time you log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, you must set up your password.
To log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal for the first time

1. Browse to http://my.firewall.
Chapter 3: Getting Started 69

The initial login page appears.
2. Type a password both in the Password and the Confirm Password fields.
Note: The password must be five to 25 characters (letters or numbers).
Note: You can change your username and password at any time. For further
information, see Changing Your Password on page 483.
3. Click OK.

The VPN-1 Edge Setup Wizard opens, with the Welcome page displayed.
4. Configure your Internet connection using one of the following ways:
• Internet Wizard
The Internet Wizard is the first part of the Setup Wizard, and it takes you through
basic Internet connection setup, step by step. For information on using the
Internet Wizard, see Using the Internet Wizard on page 84.
After you have completed the Internet Wizard, the Setup Wizard continues to
guide you through appliance setup. For more information, see Setting Up the
VPN-1 Edge Appliance on page 65.
• Internet Setup
Internet Setup offers advanced setup options, such as configuring two Internet
connections. To use Internet Setup, click Cancel and refer to Using Internet Setup
on page 99.

Logging on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal
Note: By default, HTTP and HTTPS access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal is not allowed
from the WLAN, unless you do one of the following:
• Configure a specific firewall rule to allow access from the WLAN. See
Using Rules on page 303.
Or
• Enable HTTPS access from the Internet. See Configuring HTTPS on
page 527.
To log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal

• Browse to http://my.firewall.
Or
• To log on through HTTPS (locally or remotely), follow the procedure
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely on page 74.

The login page appears.
2. Type your username and password.

3. Click OK.
The Welcome page appears.

Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS
Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using

HTTPS
You can access the VPN-1 Edge Portal remotely (from the Internet) through HTTPS.
HTTPS is a protocol for accessing a secure Web server. It is used to transfer confidential
user information. If desired, you can also use HTTPS to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal
from your internal network.
Note: In order to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal remotely using HTTPS, you must
first do both of the following:
• Configure your password, using HTTP. See Initial Login to the VPN-1
Edge Portal on page 69.
• Configure HTTPS Remote Access. See Configuring HTTPS on page
527.
Note: Your browser must support 128-bit cipher strength. To check your browser's
cipher strength, open Internet Explorer and click Help > About Internet Explorer.
To access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from your internal network

• Browse to https://my.firewall.
(Note that the URL starts with “https”, not “http”.)
The VPN-1 Edge Portal appears.
To access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from the Internet

• Browse to https://<firewall_IP_address>:981.
(Note that the URL starts with “https”, not “http”.)
The following things happen in the order below:
If this is your first attempt to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal through HTTPS, the
certificate in the VPN-1 Edge appliance is not yet known to the browser, so the
Security Alert dialog box appears.

Accessing the VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely Using HTTPS
To avoid seeing this dialog box again, install the certificate of the destination VPN-1
Edge appliance. If you are using Internet Explorer 6, do the following:
a. Click View Certificate.
The Certificate dialog box appears, with the General tab displayed.
b. Click Install Certificate.
The Certificate Import Wizard opens.
c. Click Next.
d. Click Next.
e. Click Finish.
f. Click Yes.
g. Click OK.
The Security Alert dialog box reappears.
h. Click Yes.
The VPN-1 Edge Portal appears.

Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal

The VPN-1 Edge Portal is a Web-based management interface, which enables you to
manage and configure the VPN-1 Edge appliance operation and options.
The VPN-1 Edge Portal consists of three major elements.
Table 16: VPN-1 Edge Portal Elements
Element Description
Main menu Used for navigating between the various topics (such as Reports, Security,
and Setup).
Main frame Displays information and controls related to the selected topic. The main
frame may also contain tabs that allow you to view different pages related to
the selected topic.
Status bar Shows your Internet connection and managed services status.

Figure 18: VPN-1 Edge Portal

Main Menu
The main menu includes the following submenus.
Table 17: Main Menu Submenus
This Does this…

submenu…
Welcome Displays general welcome information.
Reports Provides reporting capabilities in terms of event logging, traffic

monitoring, active computers, and established connections.
Security Provides controls and options for setting the security of any computer in
the network.
Antivirus Allows you to configure VStream Antivirus settings.
Services Allows you to control your subscription to subscription services.
Network Allows you to manage and configure your network settings and Internet
connections.
Setup Provides a set of tools for managing your VPN-1 Edge appliance. Allows
you to upgrade your license and firmware and to configure HTTPS
access to your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Users Allows you to manage VPN-1 Edge appliance users.
VPN Allows you to manage, configure, and log on to VPN sites.
Help Provides context-sensitive help.
Logout Allows you to log off of the VPN-1 Edge Portal.

Main Frame
The main frame displays the relevant data and controls pertaining to the menu and tab you
select. These elements sometimes differ depending on what model you are using. The
differences are described throughout this guide.
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of each page. It displays the fields below, as well as
the date and time.
Table 18: Status Bar Fields
This field… Displays this…
Internet Your Internet connection status.
The connection status may be one of the following:
• Connected. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is connected to the Internet.

• Connected – Probing OK. Connection probing is enabled and has
detected that the Internet connectivity is OK.
• Connected – Probing Failed. Connection probing is enabled and has
detected problems with the Internet connectivity.
• Not Connected. The Internet connection is down.
• Establishing Connection. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is connecting to
the Internet.
• Contacting Gateway. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is trying to contact
the Internet default gateway.
• Disabled. The Internet connection has been manually disabled.
Note: You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection.
When both connections are configured, the Status bar displays both statuses.
For example “Internet [Primary]: Connected”. For information on configuring a
secondary Internet connection, see Configuring the Internet Connection on
page 83.

This field… Displays this…
Service Displays your subscription services status.

Center
Your Service Center may offer various subscription services. These include
the firewall service and optional services such as Web Filtering and Email
Antivirus.
Your subscription services status may be one of the following:
• Not Subscribed. You are not subscribed to security services.

• Connection Failed. The VPN-1 Edge appliance failed to connect to
the Service Center.
• Connecting. The VPN-1 Edge appliance is connecting to the
Service Center.
• Connected. You are connected to the Service Center, and security
services are active.

Logging off
Logging off
Logging off terminates your administration session. Any subsequent attempt to connect to
the VPN-1 Edge Portal will require re-entering of the administration password.
To log off of the VPN-1 Edge Portal

• Do one of the following:
• If you are connected through HTTP, click Logout in the main menu.
The Logout page appears.
• If you are connected through HTTPS, the Logout option does not appear in
the main menu. Close the browser window.

Overview
Chapter 4
Configuring the Internet Connection

This chapter describes how to configure and work with a VPN-1 Edge Internet connection.
Overview ....................................................................................................83
Using the Internet Wizard ..........................................................................84
Using Internet Setup ...................................................................................99
Setting Up Dialup Modems ......................................................................129
Viewing Internet Connection Information................................................137
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection.............................................139
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection .....................................139
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection ..............................................140
Overview
In order to access the Internet through your VPN-1 Edge appliance, you must configure
one of the following connection types:
• Ethernet-based connection
You can configure an Ethernet-based connection in all models. An Ethernet-based
connection can be connected to another network by means of a switch, a router, a
bridge, or an Ethernet-enabled broadband modem.
In ADSL models, the Ethernet-based connection is configured on the DMZ/WAN2
port. In non-ADSL models, you can use the WAN port, the DMZ/WAN2 port, or both
ports for an Ethernet-based Internet connection.
• Direct ADSL connection
You can configure a direct ADSL connection in VPN-1 Edge ADSL models only.
These models include an integrated ADSL modem, which enables you to connect the
appliance directly to your ADSL line without using an additional modem or router.
Chapter 4: Configuring the Internet Connection 83

Using the Internet Wizard
You can configure your Internet connection using any of the following setup tools:
• Setup Wizard. Guides you through the VPN-1 Edge appliance setup step by step.
The first part of the Setup Wizard is the Internet Wizard. For further information
on the Setup Wizard, see Setting Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance on page 65.
• Internet Wizard. Guides you through the Internet connection configuration
process step by step. For further information, see Using the Internet Wizard on
page 84.
• Internet Setup. Offers the following advanced setup options:
• Configure two Internet connections.

For information, see Configuring a Backup Internet Connection on page 140.
• Enable Traffic Shaper for traffic flowing through the connection.
For information on Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper.
• Configure a dialup Internet connection.
Before configuring the connection, you must first set up the modem. For
information, see Setting Up Modems on page 129.
The Internet Wizard allows you to configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance for Internet
connection quickly and easily through its user-friendly interface.
Note: The first time you log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, the Internet Wizard starts
automatically as part of the Setup Wizard. In this case, you should skip to step 3 in
the following procedure.

Configuring an Ethernet-Based Connection on Non-

ADSL Models
To configure an Ethernet-Based connection

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The Internet page appears.
2. Click Internet Wizard.
The Internet Wizard opens with the Welcome page displayed.
3. Click Next.

The Internet Connection Method dialog box appears.
4. Select the Internet connection method you want to use for connecting to the
Internet.
If you are uncertain regarding which connection method to use contact your xDSL
provider.
Note: If you selected PPTP or PPPoE, do not use your dial-up software to connect to
the Internet.
5. Click Next.
If you chose PPPoE, continue at Using a PPPoE Connection on page 87.
If you chose PPTP, continue at Using a PPTP Connection on page 89.
If you chose Cable Modem, continue at Using a Cable Modem Connection on page
90.
If you chose Static IP, continue at Using a Static IP Connection on page 91.
If you chose DHCP, continue at Using a DHCP Connection on page 92.

Using a PPPoE Connection

If you selected the PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) connection method, the PPP Configuration
dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.

2. Click Next.
The Confirmation screen appears.
3. Click Next.

The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the Connected screen appears.
4. Click Finish.
Table 19: PPPoE Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
Username Type your user name.
Password Type your password.
Confirm password Type your password again.
Service Type your service name.
This field can be left blank.

Using a PPTP Connection

If you selected the PPTP connection method, the PPP Configuration dialog box appears.

2. Click Next.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Finish.

Table 20: PPTP Connection Fields
Server IP Type the IP address of the PPTP modem.
Internal IP Type the local IP address required for accessing the PPTP modem.
Subnet Mask Select the subnet mask of the PPTP modem.
Using a Cable Modem Connection

No further settings are required for a cable modem connection. The Confirmation screen
appears.
1. Click Next.
2. Click Finish.

Using a Static IP Connection

If you selected the Static IP connection method, the Static IP Configuration dialog box
appears.

2. Click Next.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Finish.

IP Address Type the static IP address of your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Subnet Mask Select the subnet mask that applies to the static IP address of your
VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Default Gateway Type the IP address of your ISP’s default gateway.
Primary DNS Server Type the Primary DNS server IP address.
Secondary DNS Server Type the Secondary DNS server IP address.
This field is optional.
WINS Server Type the WINS server IP address.
Using a DHCP Connection

No further settings are required for a DHCP (Dynamic IP) connection. The Confirmation
screen appears.
1. Click Next.
2. Click Finish.

Configuring an Ethernet-Based Connection on ADSL

Models
Note: In ADSL models, an Ethernet-based connection is made on the DMZ/WAN2

port.
To configure an Ethernet-based connection

3. Click Next.
The Internet Connection Port dialog box appears.
4. Click Use the WAN2 port to connect to another network or router.

5. Click Next.

Internet.
7. Click Next.
90.

Configuring a Direct ADSL Connection
To configure a direct ADSL connection

3. Click Next.
The Internet Connection Port dialog box appears.
4. Click Use the ADSL port.
The ADSL Connection Settings dialog box appears.

Refer to ADSL Settings on page 597 for information on the supported settings for
your ISP.
6. Click Next.

Internet.
8. Click Next.
If you chose PPPoE or PPPoA, continue at Using a PPPoE or PPPoA Connection on
page 98.

Table 22: ADSL Connection Fields
DSL Standard Select the standard to support for the DSL line, as specified by your
ISP. This can be one of the following:
• ADSL2
• ADSL2+
• Multimode
• T.1413
• G.lite
• G.DMT
For a list of settings for various ISPs, see ADSL Settings on page
597.
VPI Number Type the VPI number to use for the ATM virtual path, as specified by
your ISP.
597.
VCI Number Type the VCI number to use for the ATM virtual circuit, as specified
by your ISP.
597.
Encapsulation Type Select the encapsulation type to use for the DSL line, as specified by
your ISP. This can be one of the following:
• LLC
• VCMUX
597.

Using a PPPoE or PPPoA Connection

If you selected the PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA (PPP over ATM) connection
method, the PPP Configuration dialog box appears.

2. Click Next.
3. Click Next.
4. Click Finish.

Using Internet Setup
Internet Setup allows you to manually configure your Internet connection.

For information on configuring bridged Internet connections, see Adding Internet
Connections to Bridges on page 213.
To configure the Internet connection using Internet Setup


2. Next to the desired Internet connection, click Edit.

The Internet Setup page appears.
• To configure an ADSL connection using the internal ADSL modem, continue

at Configuring a Direct ADSL Connection on page 102.
This option is available in ADSL models only.
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection, continue at Configuring an
Ethernet-Based Connection on page 109.
• To configure a Dialup connection, continue at Configuring a Dialup
Connection on page 120.
• To configure no connection, continue at Using No Connection on page 122.

Configuring a Direct ADSL Connection
1. In the Port drop-down list, select ADSL.

2. In the Connection Type drop-down list, select the Internet connection type you
intend to use.
Refer to ADSL Settings on page 597 for information on the supported settings for
your ISP.
The display changes according to the connection type you selected.
If you chose PPPoA, continue at Using a PPPoA Connection on page 103.
If you chose EoA, continue at Using an EoA Connection on page 105.
For information on configuring bridged connections, see Adding Internet

Using a PPPoA (PPP over ATM) Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
page 122.

New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
2. Click Apply.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar
displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.

Using an EoA (Ethernet over ATM) Connection
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Using a PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) Connection
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Configuring an Ethernet-Based Connection
1. In the Port drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection through the WAN port, select

WAN.
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection through the DMZ/WAN2 port,
select WAN2.
This option is available in non-ADSL models only.
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection through a LAN port, select the
desired LAN port.
The selected port is automatically assigned to Internet use. For information on viewing
a port's assignment, see Viewing Port Statuses. on page 186
2. In the Connection Type drop-down list, select the Internet connection type you
intend to use.
The display changes according to the connection type you selected.
If you chose LAN, continue at Using a LAN Connection on page 110.
112.
If you chose Telstra, continue at Using a Telstra (BPA) Connection on page 118.
For information on configuring bridged connections, see Adding Internet

Using a LAN Connection
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Using a Cable Modem Connection
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Using a PPPoE Connection
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Using a PPTP Connection
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Using a Telstra (BPA) Connection

Use this Internet connection type only if you are subscribed to Telstra® BigPond™
Internet. Telstra BigPond is a trademark of Telstra Corporation Limited.
page 122.

2. Click Apply.

Configuring a Dialup Connection
Note: To use this connection type, you must first set up the dialup modem. For
information, see Setting Up Modems on page 129.
1. In the Port drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To configure a Dialup connection on the Serial port (using a connected RS232

modem), select Serial.
• To configure a Dialup connection on a USB port (using a connected USB
modem), select USBModem1.
The Connection Type field displays Dialup.
page 122.

3. Click Apply.

Configuring No Connection
1. In the Port drop-down list, select None.

The fields disappear.
2. Click Apply.
Table 24: Internet Setup Fields
ADSL Link Settings Refer to ADSL Settings on page 597 for information on the supported
settings for your ISP.
DSL Standard Select the standard to support for the DSL line, as specified by your ISP.
VPI Number Type the VPI number to use for the ATM virtual path, as specified by
your ISP.
VCI Number Type the VCI number to use for the ATM virtual circuit, as specified by
your ISP.
Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type to use for the DSL line, as specified by
Type your ISP.
PPP Settings
Confirm password Type your password.

If your ISP has not provided you with a service name, leave this field
empty.
Server IP If you selected PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP server as given
by your ISP.
If you selected Telstra (BPA), type the IP address of the Telstra

authentication server as given by Telstra.
Phone Number If you selected Dialup, type the phone number that the modem should
dial, as given by your ISP.
Connect on Select this option if you do not want the dialup modem to be constantly
demand connected to the Internet. The modem will dial a connection only under
certain conditions.
This option is useful when configuring a dialup backup connection. For

information, see Configuring a Backup Internet Connection on page
140.
When no higher Select this option to specify that the dialup modem should only dial a
priority connection connection if no other connection exists, and the VPN-1 Edge appliance
is available is not acting as a Backup appliance.
If another connection opens, the dialup modem will disconnect.
For information on configuring the appliance as a Backup or Master, see

Configuring High Availability on page 217.

On outgoing Select this option to specify that the dialup modem should only dial a
activity connection if no other connection exists, and there is outgoing activity
(that is, packets need to be transmitted to the Internet).
If another connection opens, or if the connection times out, the dialup

modem will disconnect.
Idle timeout Type the amount of time (in minutes) that the connection can remain idle.
Once this period of time has elapsed, the dialup modem will disconnect.
Obtain IP address Clear this option if you do not want the VPN-1 Edge appliance to obtain
automatically an IP address automatically using DHCP.
(using DHCP)
IP Address Type the static IP address of your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Subnet Mask Select the subnet mask that applies to the static IP address of your VPN-
1 Edge appliance.
Default Gateway Type the IP address of your ISP’s default gateway.
Name Servers
Obtain Domain Clear this option if you want the VPN-1 Edge appliance to obtain an IP
Name Servers address automatically using DHCP, but not to automatically configure
automatically DNS servers.
Obtain WINS Clear this option if you want the VPN-1 Edge appliance to obtain an IP
Server address automatically using DHCP, but not to automatically configure the
automatically WINS server.
Primary DNS Type the Primary DNS server IP address.

Server

Secondary DNS Type the Secondary DNS server IP address.

Server
WINS Server Type the WINS server IP address.
Traffic Shaper
Shape Upstream: Select this option to enable Traffic Shaper for outgoing traffic. Then type
Link Rate a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's
maximum measured upstream speed in the field provided.
It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which one

provides the best results.
For information on using Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper.
Shape Select this option to enable Traffic Shaper for incoming traffic. Then type
Downstream: Link a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's
Rate maximum measured downstream speed in the field provided.
It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which one

provides the best results.
Note: Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of packets it

receives from the Internet; it can only affect the rate of incoming traffic by
dropping received packets. This makes the shaping of inbound traffic
less accurate than the shaping of outbound traffic. It is therefore
recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if
necessary.
For information on using Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper.

Advanced
External IP If you selected PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP client as given by
your ISP.
If you selected PPPoE, this field is optional, and you do not have to fill it
in unless your ISP has instructed you to do so.
MTU This field allows you to control the maximum transmission unit size.
As a general recommendation you should leave this field empty. If

however you wish to modify the default MTU, it is recommended that you
consult with your ISP first and use MTU values between 1300 and 1500.
MAC Cloning A MAC address is a 12-digit identifier assigned to every network device. If
your ISP restricts connections to specific, recognized MAC addresses, you
must select this option to clone a MAC address.
Note: When configuring MAC cloning for the secondary Internet

connection, the DMZ/WAN2 port must be configured as WAN2; otherwise
this field is disabled. For information on configuring ports, see Managing
Ports on page 185.
Hardware MAC This field displays the VPN-1 Edge appliance's MAC address.
Address
This field is read-only.
Cloned MAC Do one of the following:

Address
• Click This Computer to automatically "clone" the MAC address of
your computer to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
• If the ISP requires authentication using the MAC address of a
different computer, type the MAC address in this field.
Note: In the secondary Internet connection, this field is enabled only if the
DMZ/WAN2 port is set to WAN2.

High Availability
Do not connect if If you are using High Availability (HA), select this option to specify that the
this gateway is in gateway should connect to the Internet only if it is the Active Gateway in
passive state the HA cluster. This is called WAN HA.
This field is only enabled if HA is configured.
For information on HA, see Configuring High Availability on page 217.
Dead Connection
Detection
Probe Next Hop Select this option to automatically detect loss of connectivity to the default
gateway. If you selected LAN, this is done by sending ARP requests to the
default gateway. If you selected PPTP, PPPoE, or Dialup, this is done by
sending PPP echo reply (LCP) messages to the PPP peer.
By default, if the default gateway does not respond, the Internet

connection is considered to be down.
If it is determined that the Internet connection is down, and two Internet

connections are defined, a failover will be performed to the second
Internet connection, ensuring continuous Internet connectivity.
This option is selected by default.

Connection Probing While the Probe Next Hop option checks the availability of the next hop
Method router, which is usually at your ISP, connectivity to the next hop router
does not always indicate that the Internet is accessible. For example, if
there is a problem with a different router at the ISP, the next hop will be
reachable, but the Internet might be inaccessible. Connection probing is a
way to detect Internet failures that are more than one hop away.
Specify what method to use for probing the connection, by selecting one
of the following:
• None. Do not perform Internet connection probing. Next hop

probing will still be used, if the Probe Next Hop check box is
selected. This is the default value.
• Ping Addresses. Ping anywhere from one to three servers
specified by IP address or DNS name in the 1, 2, and 3 fields. If
for 45 seconds none of the defined servers respond to pinging,
the Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this method if you have reliable servers that can be
pinged, that are a good indicator of Internet connectivity, and
that are not likely to fail simultaneously (that is, they are not at
the same location).
• Probe DNS Servers. Probe the primary and secondary DNS
servers. If for 45 seconds neither gateway responds, the
Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this method if the availability of your DNS servers is a
good indicator for the availability of Internet connectivity.
• Probe VPN Gateway (RDP). Send RDP echo requests to up to
three Check Point VPN gateways specified by IP address or
DNS name in the 1, 2, and 3 fields. If for 45 seconds none of
the defined gateways respond, the Internet connection is
considered to be down.
Use this option if you have Check Point VPN gateways, and
you want loss of connectivity to these gateways to trigger ISP
failover to an Internet connection from which these gateways
are reachable.

Setting Up Dialup Modems
1, 2, 3 If you chose the Ping Addresses connection probing method, type the IP
addresses or DNS names of the desired servers.
If you chose the Probe VPN Gateway (RDP) connection probing method, type
the IP addresses or DNS names of the desired VPN gateways.
You can clear a field by clicking Clear.
You can use a connected modem as a primary or secondary Internet connection method.
This is useful in locations where broadband Internet access is unavailable.
When used as a backup Internet connection, the modem can be automatically disconnected
when not in use. For information on setting up a backup connection, see Configuring a
Backup Internet Connection on page 140.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the connecting following modems:
• RS232 dialup modem (regular or ISDN)
You can connect one RS232 to the appliance's Serial port.
See Setting Up an RS232 Modem on page 130.
• USB-based modems, including dialup (PSTN/ISDN) and cellular
(GPRS/EVDO) modems
You can connect up to two USB-based modems to the appliance's USB port.
See Setting Up a USB Modem on page 133.

Setting Up an RS232 Modem
To set up an RS232 dialup modem

1. Connect an RS232 dialup modem to your VPN-1 Edge appliance's serial port.
For information on locating the serial port, see Introduction on page 1.
2. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The Ports page appears.
3. Next to Serial, click Edit.

The Port Setup page appears.
4. In the Assign to Network drop-down list, select Dialup.

New fields appear.
5. Complete the fields using the information in Dialup Fields on page 132.
6. Click Apply.

7. To check that that the values you entered are correct, click Test.
The page displays a message indicating whether the test succeeded.
8. Configure a Dialup Internet connection on the Serial port.
See Using Internet Setup on page 99.
Table 25: Dialup Fields
Modem Type Select the modem type.
You can select one of the predefined modem types or Custom.
If you selected Custom, the Installation String field is enabled. Otherwise,

it is filled in with the correct installation string for the modem type.
Initialization String Type the installation string for the custom modem type.
If you selected a standard modem type, this field is read-only.
Dial Mode Select the dial mode the modem uses.
Port Speed Select the modem's port speed (in bits per second).

Setting Up a USB Modem
Warning: Before attaching a USB modem, ensure that the total power drawn by all
connected USB devices does not exceed 5W (1A at 5V). If the total current
consumed by USB devices exceeds 5W, a powered USB hub must be used, to avoid
damage to the gateway
To set up a USB modem

1. Connect a USB-based modem to one of your VPN-1 Edge appliance's USB
ports.
For information on locating the USB ports, see Introduction on page 1.

3. Next to USB, click Edit.

The USB Devices page appears. If the VPN-1 Edge appliance detected the modem, the
modem is listed on the page.
If the modem is not listed, check that you connected the modem correctly, then click
Refresh to refresh the page.
4. Next to the modem, click Edit.

The USB Modem Setup page appears.
5. Complete the fields using the information in Dialup Fields on page 132.
6. Click Apply.
7. To check that that the values you entered are correct, click Test.
The page displays a message indicating whether the test succeeded.
8. Configure a Dialup Internet connection on the USB port.

Viewing Internet Connection Information
You can view information on your Internet connection(s) in terms of status, duration, and
activity.
To view Internet connection information

For an explanation of the fields on this page, see the following table.
2. To refresh the information on this page, click Refresh.

Table 26: Internet Page Fields
Field Description
Status Indicates the connection’s status.
Duration Indicates the connection duration, if active. The duration is given in the
format hh:mm:ss, where:
hh=hours
mm=minutes
ss=seconds
IP Address Your IP address.
Enabled Indicates whether or not the connection is enabled.
For further information, see Enabling/Disabling the Internet

Connection on page 139
Received Packets The number of data packets received in the active connection.
Sent Packets The number of data packets sent in the active connection.

Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection
You can temporarily disable an Internet connection. This is useful if, for example, you are
going on vacation and do not want to leave your computer connected to the Internet. If you
have two Internet connections, you can force the VPN-1 Edge appliance to use a particular
connection, by disabling the other connection.
The Internet connection’s Enabled/Disabled status is persistent through VPN-1 Edge
appliance reboots.
To enable/disable an Internet connection

2. Next to the Internet connection, do one of the following:
• To enable the connection, click .

The button changes to and the connection is enabled.
• To disable the connection, click .
The button changes to and the connection is disabled.
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection
By clicking the Connect or Disconnect button (depending on the connection status) on the
Internet page, you can establish a quick Internet connection using the currently-selected
connection type. In the same manner, you can terminate the active connection.
The Internet connection retains its Connected/Not Connected status until the VPN-1 Edge
appliance is rebooted. The VPN-1 Edge appliance then connects to the Internet if the
connection is enabled. For information on enabling an Internet connection, see
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection on page 139.

Configuring a Backup Internet Connection
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection
You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection. The secondary
connection acts as a backup, so that if the primary connection fails, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance remains connected to the Internet.
You have full flexibility in deciding which port to use for each Internet connection. You
can assign the primary connection to use any of the following ports:
• WAN port (on Non-ADSL models)
• DSL port (on ADSL models)
• Serial port (for use with an RS232 modem)
• DMZ/WAN2 port
• USB ports (for use with a USB modem)
You can assign the secondary connection to use any of the above ports that is not being
used by the primary connection.
Note: You can configure different DNS servers for the primary and secondary
connections. The VPN-1 Edge appliance acts as a DNS relay and routes requests
from computers within the network to the appropriate DNS server for the active
Internet connection.

Configuring Network Settings
Chapter 5
Managing Your Network

This chapter describes how to manage and configure your network connection and settings.
Configuring Network Settings..................................................................141
Using Network Objects ............................................................................170
Using Static Routes ..................................................................................179
Managing Ports.........................................................................................185

Note: If you accidentally change the network settings to incorrect values and are
unable to connect to the my.firewall Web portal, you can connect to the appliance
through the serial console and correct the error (see Using a Console on page
524). Alternatively, you can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its default settings
(see Resetting the VPN-1 Edge appliance to Defaults on page 555).
Chapter 5: Managing Your Network 141

Configuring the LAN Network
To configure the LAN

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The My Network page appears.
2. Click Edit in the LAN network’s row.

The Edit Network Settings page for the LAN network appears.
3. In the Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.

The fields are enabled.
4. If desired, change your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 154.
5. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 155.
6. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 144.
7. Click Apply.
A warning message appears.
8. Click OK.
A success message appears.

Configuring a DHCP Server
By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance operates as a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) server. This allows the VPN-1 Edge appliance to automatically configure all the
devices on your network with their network configuration details.
Note: The DHCP server only serves computers that are configured to obtain an IP
address automatically. If a computer is not configured to obtain an IP address
automatically, it is recommended to assign it an IP address outside of the DHCP
address range. However, if you do assign the computer an IP address within the
DHCP address range, the DHCP server will detect this and will not assign this IP
address to another computer.
If you already have a DHCP server in your internal network, and you want to use it instead
of the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server, you must disable the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server, since
you cannot have two DHCP servers or relays on the same network segment.
If you want to use a DHCP server on the Internet or via a VPN, instead of the VPN-1 Edge
DHCP server, you can configure DHCP relay. When in DHCP relay mode, the VPN-1
Edge appliance relays information from the desired DHCP server to the devices on your
network.
Note: You can perform DHCP reservation using network objects. For information,
see Using Network Objects on page 170.
Note: The following DHCP server configurations are not available for the OfficeMode
network:
• Enabling and disabling the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server

• Setting the DHCP range manually
• Configuring DHCP relay
Note: Configuring DHCP options is not available for the DMZ.

Enabling/Disabling the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server
You can enable and disable the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server for internal networks.
To enable/disable the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server

2. In the desired network's row, click Edit.
The Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. From the DHCP Server list, select Enabled or Disabled.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click OK.
A success message appears
6. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server or another DHCP server is
enabled, restart your computer.
If you enabled the DHCP server, your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP
address range.

Configuring the DHCP Address Range
By default, the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server automatically sets the DHCP address range. The
DHCP address range is the range of IP addresses that the DHCP server can assign to
network devices. IP addresses outside of the DHCP address range are reserved for
statically addressed computers.
If desired, you can set the VPN-1 Edge DHCP range manually.
To configure the DHCP address range

3. To set the DHCP range manually:
a. Clear the Automatic DHCP range check box.

The DHCP IP range fields appear.
b. In the DHCP IP range fields, type the desired DHCP range.

4. To allow the DHCP server to set the IP address range, select the Automatic
DHCP range check box.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the new DHCP address range.

Configuring DHCP Relay
You can configure DHCP relay for internal networks.
Note: DHCP relay will not work if the appliance is located behind a NAT device.
To configure DHCP relay

3. In the DHCP Server list, select Relay.
The Automatic DHCP range check box is disabled, and new fields appear.

4. In the Primary DHCP Server IP field, type the IP address of the primary DHCP
server.
5. In the Secondary DHCP Server IP field, type the IP address of the DHCP server
to use if the primary DHCP server fails.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.
Configuring DHCP Server Options
If desired, you can configure the following custom DHCP options for an internal network:
• Domain suffix
• DNS servers
• WINS servers
• Default gateway
• NTP servers
• VoIP call managers
• TFTP server and boot filename
• Avaya IP phone configuration string

To configure DHCP options

3. In the DHCP area, click Options.
The DHCP Server Options page appears.
4. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.

5. Click Apply.
DHCP), restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.

Table 27: DHCP Server Options Fields
Domain Name Type a default domain suffix that should be passed to DHCP clients.
The DHCP client will automatically append the domain suffix for the
resolving of non-fully qualified names. For example, if the domain suffix
is set to "mydomain.com", and the client tries to resolve the name
“mail”, the suffix will be automatically appended to the name, resulting
in “mail.mydomain.com”.
Name Servers
Automatically assign Clear this option if you do not want the gateway to act as a DNS relay
DNS server server and pass its own IP address to DHCP clients.
(recommended)
Normally, it is recommended to leave this option selected.
The DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 fields appear.
DNS Server 1, 2 Type the IP addresses of the Primary and Secondary DNS servers to
pass to DHCP clients instead of the gateway.
Automatically assign Clear this option if you do not want DHCP clients to be assigned the
WINS server same WINS servers as specified by the Internet connection
configuration (in the Internet Setup page).
The WINS Server 1 and WINS Server 2 fields appear.
WINS Server 1, 2 Type the IP addresses of the Primary and Secondary WINS servers to
use instead of the gateway.

Automatically assign Clear this option if you do not want the DHCP server to pass the
default gateway current gateway IP address to DHCP clients as the default gateway's
IP address.
Normally, it is recommended to leave this option selected.
The Default Gateway field is enabled.
Default Gateway Type the IP address to pass to DHCP clients as the default gateway,
instead of the current gateway IP address.
Other Services These fields are not available for the OfficeMode network.
Time Server 1, 2 To use Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to synchronize the time
on the DHCP clients, type the IP address of the Primary and
Secondary NTP servers.
Call Manager 1, 2 To assign Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call managers to the IP
phones, type the IP address of the Primary and Secondary VoIP
servers.
TFTP Server Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) enables booting diskless
computers over the network.
To assign a TFTP server to the DHCP clients, type the IP address of

the TFTP server.
TFTP Boot File Type the boot file to use for booting DHCP clients via TFTP.
X-Windows Display To assign X-Windows terminals the appropriate X-Windows Display

Manager Manager when booting via DHCP, type the XDM server's IP address.
Avaya IP Phone To enable Avaya IP phones to receive their configuration, type the
phone's configuration string.

Changing IP Addresses
If desired, you can change your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address, or the entire
range of IP addresses in your internal network. You may want to perform these tasks if, for
example, you are adding the VPN-1 Edge appliance to a large existing network and don't
want to change that network’s IP address range, or if you are using a DHCP server other
than the VPN-1 Edge appliance, that assigns addresses within a different range.
To change IP addresses
2. In the LAN network's row, click Edit.
3. To change the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address, enter the new IP
address in the IP Address field.
4. To change the internal network range, enter a new value in the Subnet Mask
field.
Note: The internal network range is defined both by the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s
internal IP address and by the subnet mask.
For example, if the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s internal IP address is 192.168.100.7,

and you set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, the network’s IP address range will
be 192.168.100.1 – 192.168.100.254.
The default internal network range is 192.168.10.*.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance's internal IP address and/or the internal network
range are changed.

• A success message appears.

• If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically

(using DHCP), and the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server is enabled, restart your
computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the new range.
• Otherwise, manually reconfigure your computer to use the new
address range using the TCP/IP settings. For information on configuring
TCP/IP, see TCP/IP Settings on page 45.
Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT
Hide Network Address Translation (Hide NAT) enables you to share a single public
Internet IP address among several computers, by “hiding” the private IP addresses of the
internal computers behind the VPN-1 Edge appliance’s single Internet IP address.
Note: If Hide NAT is disabled, you must obtain a range of Internet IP addresses
from your ISP. Hide NAT is enabled by default.
Note: Static NAT and Hide NAT can be used together.
To enable/disable Hide NAT

3. From the Hide NAT list, select Enabled or Disabled.
4. Click Apply.

5. Click OK.
• If you chose to disable Hide NAT, it is disabled.

• If you chose to enable Hide NAT, it is enabled.
Configuring a DMZ Network
In addition to the LAN network, you can define a second internal network called a DMZ
(demilitarized zone) network.
For information on default security policy rules controlling traffic to and from the DMZ,
see Default Security Policy on page 298.
To configure a DMZ network

1. Connect the DMZ computer to the DMZ port.
If you have more than one computer in the DMZ network, connect a hub or switch to
the DMZ port, and connect the DMZ computers to the hub.

3. Next to the DMZ/WAN2 port, click Edit.

4. In the Assign to Network drop-down list, select DMZ.

5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.
8. In the DMZ network's row, click Edit.

12. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the DMZ network's default
gateway.
Note: The DMZ network must not overlap other networks.
13. In the Subnet Mask text box, type the DMZ’s internal network range.
14. Click Apply.
15. Click OK.
Configuring the OfficeMode Network
By default, VPN Clients connect to the VPN Server using an Internet IP address locally
assigned by an ISP. This may lead to the following problems:
• VPN Clients on the same network will be unable to communicate with each
other via the VPN-1 Edge Internal VPN Server. This is because their IP
addresses are on the same subnet, and they therefore attempt to communicate
directly over the local network, instead of through the secure VPN link.
• Some networking protocols or resources may require the client’s IP address to
be an internal one.
OfficeMode solves these problems by enabling the VPN-1 Edge DHCP Server to
automatically assign a unique local IP address to the VPN client, when the client connects
and authenticates. The IP addresses are allocated from a pool called the OfficeMode
network.
Note: OfficeMode requires either Check Point SecureClient or an L2TP client to be

installed on the VPN clients. It is not supported by Check Point SecuRemote.
When OfficeMode is not supported by the VPN client, traditional mode will be used
instead.

To configure the OfficeMode network

2. In the OfficeMode network's row, click Edit.
4. In the IP Address field, type the IP address to use as the OfficeMode network's
default gateway.
Note: The OfficeMode network must not overlap other networks.
5. In the Subnet Mask text box, type the OfficeMode internal network range.
7. If desired, configure DHCP options.
See Configuring DHCP Server Options on page 149.
8. Click Apply.
9. Click OK.

Configuring VLANs
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you to partition your network into several virtual LAN
networks (VLANs). A VLAN is a logical network behind the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Computers in the same VLAN behave as if they were on the same physical network: traffic
flows freely between them, without passing through a firewall. In contrast, traffic between
a VLAN and other networks passes through the firewall and is subject to the security
policy. By default, traffic from a VLAN to any other internal network (including other
VLANs) is blocked. In this way, defining VLANs can increase security and reduce
network congestion.
For example, you can assign each division within your organization to a different VLAN,
regardless of their physical location. The members of a division will be able to
communicate with each other and share resources, and only members who need to
communicate with other divisions will be allowed to do so. Furthermore, you can easily
transfer a member of one division to another division without rewiring your network, by
simply reassigning them to the desired VLAN.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the following VLAN types:

• Tag-based
In tag-based VLAN you use one of the gateway’s ports as a 802.1Q VLAN trunk,
connecting the appliance to a VLAN-aware switch. Each VLAN behind the trunk is
assigned an identifying number called a “VLAN ID”, also referred to as a "VLAN
tag". All outgoing traffic from a tag-based VLAN contains the VLAN's tag in the
packet headers. Incoming traffic to the VLAN must contain the VLAN's tag as well, or
the packets are dropped. Tagging ensures that traffic is directed to the correct VLAN.
Figure 19: Tag-based VLAN

• Port-based
Port-based VLAN allows assigning the appliance's LAN ports to VLANs, effectively
transforming the appliance's four-port switch into up to four firewall-isolated security
zones. You can assign multiple ports to the same VLAN, or each port to a separate
VLAN.
Port-based VLAN does not require an external VLAN-capable switch, and is therefore
simpler to use than tag-based VLAN. However, port-based VLAN is limited, because
the appliance's internal switch has only four ports.
Figure 20: Port-based VLAN

• Virtual access point (VAP)
In wireless VPN-1 Edge models, you can partition the primary WLAN network into
wireless VLANs called virtual access points (VAPs). You can use VAPs to grant
different permissions to groups of wireless users, by configuring each VAP with the
desired security policy and network settings, and then assigning each group of
wireless users to the relevant VAP. For example, you could assign different
permissions to employees and guests on the company's wireless network, by
configuring two VAPs called “Guest” and “Employee” with the desired set of
permissions.
To use VAPs, you must enable the primary WLAN network.
For more information on VAPs, see Overview on page 239.

• Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links

In wireless VPN-1 Edge models, you can extend the primary WLAN's coverage area,
by creating a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). A WDS is a system of access
points that communicate with each other wirelessly, without any need for a wired
backbone. WDS is usually used together with bridge mode to connect the networks
behind the access points.
To create a WDS, you must add WDS links between the desired access points. For
example, if your business extends across a large area, and a single access point does
not provide sufficient coverage, then you can add a second access point and create a
WDS link between the two access points.
To use WDS links, you must enable the primary WLAN network.
For more information on WDS links, see Overview on page 239.
In VPN-1 Edge models with unlimited nodes, you can define up to 32 VLAN networks
(port-based, tag-based, VAP, and WDS links combined), while in other models, you can
define up to ten VLAN networks. In wireless models, up to three of the VLAN networks
can be VAPs, and up to seven of the VLAN networks can be WDS links. For information
on counting VAPs and WDS links, see Configuring a Wireless Network on page 239.
For information on the default security policy for VLANs, see Default Security Policy on
page 298.
Adding and Editing VLANs
For information on adding and editing port-based VLANs, see Adding and Editing Port-
Based VLANs on page 165.
For information on adding and editing tag-based VLANs, see Adding and Editing Tag-
Based VLANs on page 167.
For information on adding and editing VAPs, see Configuring Virtual Access Points on
page 265.
For information on adding and editing WDS links, see Configuring WDS Links on page
269.

Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs
To add or edit a port-based VLAN

• To add a VLAN, click Add Network.

• To edit a VLAN, click Edit in the desired VLAN’s row.
The Edit Network Settings page for VLAN networks appears.
3. In the Network Name field, type a name for the VLAN.

4. In the Type drop-down list, select Port Based VLAN.
The VLAN Tag field disappears.


6. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the VLAN network's default
gateway.
Note: The VLAN network must not overlap other networks.
7. In the Subnet Mask field, type the VLAN's internal network range.
10. Click Apply.
11. Click OK.
13. Next to the LAN port you want to assign, click Edit.
14. In the Assign to network drop-down list, select the VLAN network's name.
You can assign more than one port to the VLAN.
15. Click Apply.

Adding and Editing Tag-Based VLANs
To add or edit a tag-based VLAN

• To add a VLAN, click Add Network.

• To edit a VLAN, click Edit in the desired VLAN’s row.
The Edit Network Settings page for VLAN networks appears.
3. In the Network Name field, type a name for the VLAN.
4. In the Type drop-down list, select Tag Based VLAN.
The VLAN Tag field appears.
5. In the VLAN Tag field, type a tag for the VLAN.
This must be an integer between 1 and 4095.
7. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the VLAN network's default
gateway.
Note: The VLAN network must not overlap other networks.
8. In the Subnet Mask field, type the VLAN's internal network range.

11. Click Apply.

12. Click OK.
14. In the DMZ/WAN2 drop-down list, select VLAN Trunk.
15. Click Apply.
The DMZ/WAN2 port now operates as a VLAN Trunk port. In this mode, it will not
accept untagged packets.
16. Configure a VLAN trunk (802.1Q) port on the VLAN-aware switch, according
to the vendor instructions. Define the same VLAN IDs on the switch.
17. Connect the VPN-1 Edge appliance's DMZ/WAN2 port to the VLAN-aware
switch's VLAN trunk port.

Deleting VLANs
To delete a VLAN
1. If the VLAN is port-based, do the following:
a. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
b. Remove all port assignments to the VLAN, by selecting other networks
in the drop-down lists.
c. Click Apply.
2. Delete any firewall rules or VStream Antivirus rules that use this VLAN.
4. In the desired VLAN’s row, click the Erase icon.

A confirmation message appears.
5. Click OK.
The VLAN is deleted.

Using Network Objects
You can add individual computers or networks as network objects. This enables you to
configure various settings for the computer or network represented by the network object.
You can configure the following settings for a network object:
• Static NAT (or One-to-One NAT)
Static NAT allows the mapping of Internet IP addresses or address ranges to hosts
inside the internal network. This is useful if you want a computer in your private
network to have its own Internet IP address. For example, if you have both a mail
server and a Web server in your network, you can map each one to a separate Internet
IP address.
Static NAT rules do not imply any security rules. To allow incoming traffic to a host
for which you defined Static NAT, you must create an Allow rule. When specifying
firewall rules for such hosts, use the host’s internal IP address, and not the Internet IP
address to which the internal IP address is mapped. For further information, see Using
Rules on page 303.
Note: Static NAT and Hide NAT can be used together.
Note: The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports Proxy ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol). When an external source attempts to communicate with such a
computer, the VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically replies to ARP queries with its
own MAC address, thereby enabling communication. As a result, the Static NAT
Internet IP addresses appear to external sources to be real computers connected to
the WAN interface.

• Assign the network object's IP address to a MAC address

Normally, the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server consistently assigns the same IP address to a
specific computer. However, if the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server runs out of IP addresses
and the computer is down, then the DHCP server may reassign the IP address to a
different computer.
If you want to guarantee that a particular computer's IP address remains constant, you
can reserve the IP address for use by the computer's MAC address only. This is called
DHCP reservation, and it is useful if you are hosting a public Internet server on your
network.
• Web Filtering enforcement
You can specify whether or not to exclude the network object from Web Filtering.
Excluded network objects will be able to access the Internet without restriction. For
further information on Web Filtering, see Web Filtering on page 400.
• Secure HotSpot enforcement
You can specify whether or not to exclude the network object from HotSpot
enforcement. Excluded network objects will be able to access the network without
viewing the My HotSpot page. For further information on Secure HotSpot, see
Configuring Secure HotSpot on page 364.
Adding and Editing Network Objects
You can add or edit network objects via:

• The Network Objects page
This page enables you to add both individual computers and networks.
• The Active Computers page
This page enables you to add only individual computers as network objects. The
computer's details are filled in automatically in the wizard.

To add or edit a network object via the Network Objects page

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Network Objects tab.
The Network Objects page appears with a list of network objects.
• To add a network object, click New.

• To edit an existing network object, click Edit next to the desired computer in
the list.

The VPN-1 Edge Network Object Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Object Type
dialog box displayed.
• To specify that the network object should represent a single computer or

device, click Single Computer.
• To specify that the network object should represent a network, click Network.
4. Click Next.

The Step 2: Computer Details dialog box appears. If you chose Single Computer, the
dialog box includes the Reserve a fixed IP address for this computer option.
If you chose Network, the dialog box does not include this option.
5. Complete the fields using the information in the tables below.

6. Click Next.

The Step 3: Save dialog box appears.
7. Type a name for the network object in the field.

8. Click Finish.
To add or edit a network object via the Active Computers page

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Active Computers tab.

The Active Computers page appears.
If a computer has not yet been added as a network object, the Add button appears next
to it. If a computer has already been added as a network object, the Edit button appears
next to it.
• To add a network object, click Add next to the desired computer.

• To edit a network object, click Edit next to the desired computer.
The VPN-1 Edge Network Object Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Object Type
• To specify that the network object should represent a single computer or

device, click Single Computer.
• To specify that the network object should represent a network, click Network.
4. Click Next.

The Step 2: Computer Details dialog box appears.

The computer's IP address and MAC address are automatically filled in.
5. Complete the fields using the information in the tables below.
6. Click Next.
The Step 3: Save dialog box appears with the network object's name. If you are adding
a new network object, this name is the computer's name.
7. To change the network object name, type the desired name in the field.
8. Click Finish.
The new object appears in the Network Objects page.
Table 28: Network Object Fields for a Single Computer
IP Address Type the IP address of the local computer, or click This Computer to
specify your computer.
Reserve a fixed IP Select this option to assign the network object's IP address to a MAC
address for this address, and to allow the network object to connect to the WLAN
computer when MAC Filtering is used. For information about MAC Filtering, see
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 239.
MAC Address Type the MAC address you want to assign to the network object's IP
address, or click This Computer to specify your computer's MAC
address.
Perform Static NAT Select this option to map the local computer's IP address to an
(Network Address Internet IP address.
Translation)
You must then fill in the External IP field.
External IP Type the Internet IP address to which you want to map the local
computer's IP address.

Exclude this computer Select this option to exclude this computer from Secure HotSpot
from HotSpot enforcement.
enforcement
Exclude this computer Select this option to exclude this computer from Web Filtering.
from Web Filtering
Table 29: Network Object Fields for a Network
IP Range Type the range of local computer IP addresses in the network.
Perform Static NAT Select this option to map the network's IP address range to a range of
(Network Address Internet IP addresses of the same size.
Translation)
You must then fill in the External IP Range field.
External IP Range Type the Internet IP address range to which you want to map the
network's IP address range.
Exclude this network Select this option to exclude this network from Secure HotSpot
from HotSpot enforcement.
enforcement
Exclude this network Select this option to exclude this network from Web Filtering.
from Web Filtering

Using Static Routes
Viewing and Deleting Network Objects
To view or delete a network object

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Network Objects tab.
The Network Objects page appears with a list of network objects.
2. To delete a network object, do the following:
a. In the desired network object's row, click the Erase icon.

b. Click OK.
The network object is deleted.
Using Static Routes
A static route is a setting that explicitly specifies the route for packets originating in a
certain subnet and/or destined for a certain subnet. Packets with a source and destination
that does not match any defined static route will be routed to the default gateway. To
modify the default gateway, see Using a LAN Connection on page 110.
A static route can be based on the packet's destination IP address, or based on the source IP
address, in which case it is a source route.
Source routing can be used, for example, for load balancing between two Internet
connections. For example, if you have an Accounting department and a Marketing
department, and you want each to use a different Internet connection for outgoing traffic,
you can add a static route specifying that traffic originating from the Accounting
department should be sent via WAN1, and another static route specifying that traffic
originating from the Marketing department should be sent via WAN2.
The Static Routes page lists all existing routes, including the default, and indicates whether
each route is currently "Up" (reachable) or not.

Using Static Routes
Adding and Editing Static Routes
To add a static route

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Routes tab.
The Static Routes page appears, with a list of existing static routes.
• To add a static route, click New Route.

• To edit an existing static route, click Edit next to the desired route in the list.

Using Static Routes
The Static Route Wizard opens displaying the Step 1: Source and Destination dialog
box.
3. To select a specific source network (source routing), do the following:

a) In the Source drop-down list, select Specified Network.
New fields appear.
b) In the Network field, type the IP address of the source network.

c) In the Netmask drop-down list, select the subnet mask.

Using Static Routes
4. To select a specific destination network, do the following:

a) In the Destination drop-down list, select Specified Network.
New fields appear.
b) In the Network field, type the IP address of the destination network.

c) In the Netmask drop-down list, select the subnet mask.
5. Click Next.
The Step 2: Next Hop and Metric dialog box appears.

Using Static Routes
6. In the Next Hop IP field, type the IP address of the gateway (next hop router) to
which to route the packets destined for this network.
7. In the Metric field, type the static route's metric.
The gateway sends a packet to the route that matches the packet's destination and has
the lowest metric.
The default value is 10.
8. Click Next.
The new static route is saved.

Using Static Routes
Viewing and Deleting Static Routes
Note: The “default” route cannot be deleted.
To view or delete a static route

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Routes tab.
The Static Routes page appears, with a list of existing static routes.
2. To refresh the view, click Refresh.
3. To delete a route, do the following:
a. In the desired route row, click the Erase icon.

b. Click OK.
The route is deleted.

Managing Ports
Managing Ports
The VPN-1 Edge appliance enables you to quickly and easily assign its ports to different
uses, as shown in the following table. If desired, you can also disable ports.
Table 30: Ports and Assignments
You can assign this port... To these uses...
LAN 1-4 LAN network
A WAN Internet connection
A port-based VLAN
A VLAN that is dynamically assigned by a RADIUS server,

as part of an 802.1x port-based security scheme
DMZ/WAN2 DMZ network
A WAN Internet connection
VLAN trunk
A port-based VLAN
A VLAN that is dynamically assigned by a RADIUS server,

as part of an 802.1x port-based security scheme
WAN A WAN Internet connection
Serial RS232 modem
Serial console

Managing Ports
You can assign this port... To these uses...
USB Printers
USB-based modems
The VPN-1 Edge appliance also allows you to restrict each port to a specific link speed
and duplex setting and to configure its security scheme. For information on port-based
security, see Using Port-Based Security on page 359.
Viewing Port Statuses
You can view the status of the VPN-1 Edge appliance's ports on the Ports page, including
each Ethernet connection's duplex state. This is useful if you need to check whether the
appliance's physical connections are working, and you can’t see the LEDs on front of the
appliance.
To view port statuses


Managing Ports
The Ports page appears. In non-ADSL models, this page appears as follows:

Managing Ports
In ADSL models, this page appears as follows:
The page displays the information for each port, as described in the following table.
2. To refresh the display, click Refresh.

Managing Ports
Table 31: Ports Fields
This field… Displays…
Assign To The port's current assignment.
For example, if the DMZ/WAN2 port is currently used for the DMZ, the
field displays "DMZ".
Status The port's current status. This can be any of the following:
• The detected link speed (10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) and duplex
(Full Duplex or Half Duplex)
• No Link. The appliance does not detect anything connected
to the port.
• Disabled. The port is disabled. For example, the DMZ/WAN2
port's status will be "Disabled" if the port is assigned to
"None", or if it assigned to "DMZ" and the DMZ is disabled.
• No Sync. The ADSL modem failed to synchronize with the
ADSL service provider. Check that a micro-filter is properly
connected, and check that your DSL Standard setting is
compatible with your service provider. You can view this
setting in the Network > Internet Setup page.
This status is relevant for the ADSL port only.
• Connected (number). USB devices (printers or modem) are
connected to the USB ports. The number of connected
devices appears in parentheses.
This status is relevant for the USB ports only.
• Not Connected. No USB devices are connected to the USB
ports.
This status is relevant for the USB ports only.

Managing Ports
802.1x The port's security scheme. This can be any of the following:
• N/A. No security scheme is defined for the port.

• Unauthorized. An 802.1x security scheme is defined for the
port. Users have not yet connected to the port and attempted
to authenticate, or a user failed to authenticate and no
Quarantine network is configured.
• Authorized (network). An 802.1x security scheme is defined for
the port. A user connected to the port, authenticated
successfully, and was assigned to a network. The name of the
assigned network appears in parentheses.
• Quarantine (network). An 802.1x security scheme is defined for
the port. A user connected to the port, failed to authenticate,
and was assigned to the Quarantine network. The name of
the Quarantine network appears in parentheses.
For information on configuring 802.1x port-based security, see Using

Port-Based Security on page 359.
Modifying Port Assignments
You can assign ports to different networks or purposes. Since modifying port assignments
often requires additional configurations, use the following table to determine which
procedure you should use.
Table 32: Modifying Port Assignments
To assign a port to... See...
No network The procedure below. This disables the port.
LAN The procedure below

Managing Ports
To assign a port to... See...
VLAN or Configuring VLANs on page 161

VLAN Trunk
A WAN Internet connection The procedure below.
Note: When you configure an Ethernet-based Internet

connection on a port, the port is automatically assigned to
Internet use. For information on configuring an Internet
connection, see Using Internet Setup on page 99.
DMZ Configuring a DMZ Network
Console Using a Console on page 524
A VLAN network, dynamically Configuring Port-Based Security on page 360

assigned by a RADIUS server
A printer Setting Up Network Printers on page 562
An RS232 Modem Setting Up an RS232 Modem on page 130
A USB-based modem Setting Up a USB Modem on page 133
To modify a port assignment

2. Next to the desired port, click Edit.

Managing Ports
3. In the Assign to Network drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To assign a network port to the LAN, elect LAN.

• To configure a network port for use with a WAN Internet connection, select
Internet.
• To disable a network port, select None.
• To disable the Serial port, select Disabled.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click OK.
The port is reassigned to the specified network or purpose.

Managing Ports
Modifying Link Configurations
By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically detects the link speed and duplex. If
desired, you can manually restrict the appliance's ports to a specific link speed and duplex.
To modify a port's link configuration

3. In the Link Configuration drop-down list, do one of the following:
• Select the desired link speed and duplex.

• Select Automatic Detection to configure the port to automatically detect the
link speed and duplex.
This is the default.
4. Click Apply.
5. Click OK.
The port uses the specified link speed and duplex.

Managing Ports
Resetting Ports to Defaults
You can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance's ports to their default link configurations
("Automatic Detection") and default assignments (shown in the following table).
Table 33: Default Port Assignments
Port Default Assignment
1-4 LAN
DMZ / WAN2 DMZ
WAN This port is always assigned to the WAN.
ADSL This port is always assigned to the ADSL connection.
Serial Console
Note: When you reset ports to their defaults, all currently-established connections
that are not supported by the default settings may be broken. For example, if you
were using the DMZ/WAN2 port as WAN2, the port reverts to its DMZ assignment,
and the secondary Internet connection moves to the WAN or ADSL port.

Managing Ports
Resetting All Ports to Defaults
To reset all ports to defaults

2. Click Default.
3. Click OK.
All ports are reset to their default assignments and to "Automatic Detection" link
configuration.
Resetting Individual Ports to Defaults
To reset a port to defaults

3. Click Default.
4. Click OK.
The port is reset to its default assignment and to "Automatic Detection" link
configuration.

Overview
Chapter 6
Using Bridges
This chapter describes how to connect multiple network segments at the data-link layer,
using bridges.
Overview ..................................................................................................197
Workflow..................................................................................................203
Adding and Editing Bridges .....................................................................204
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges.......................................................208
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges ..................................................213
Overview
The VPN-1 Edge appliance enables you to connect multiple network segments at the data-
link layer, by configuring a bridge. Bridges offer the following advantages:
• Easy network segmentation
Bridges can be used to compartmentalize an existing network into several security
zones, without changing the IP addressing scheme or the routers' configuration.
Ordinarily, if you need to deploy a firewall within an internal network, you can divide
the existing subnet into two networks and configure a new routing scheme. However,
in some deployments, the amount of network reconfiguration required prohibits such a
solution. Adding a bridge not only allows you to segment your network quickly and
easily, but it allows you to choose whether to enable the firewall between network
segments.
Chapter 6: Using Bridges 197

Overview
If you enable the firewall between bridged network segments, the gateway operates as
a regular firewall between network segments, inspecting traffic and dropping or
blocking unauthorized or unsafe traffic. In contrast, if you disable the firewall between
bridged network segments, all network interfaces assigned to the bridge are connected
directly, with no firewall filtering the traffic between them. The network interfaces
operate as if they were connected by a hub or switch.
Figure 21: Bridge with Four VLANs

Overview
For example, if you assign the LAN and primary WLAN networks to a bridge and
disable the bridge's internal firewall, the two networks will act as a single, seamless
network, and only traffic from the LAN and primary WLAN networks to other
networks (for example, the Internet) will be inspected by the firewall. If you enable
the internal firewall, it will enforce security rules and inspect traffic between the LAN
and primary WLAN networks.
Figure 22: Bridge Firewalling

Overview
• Transparent roaming
In a routed network, if a host is physically moved from one network area to another,
then the host must be configured with a new IP address. However, in a bridged
network, there is no need to reconfigure the host, and work can continue with minimal
interruption.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you to configure anti-spoofing for bridged network
segments. When anti-spoofing is configured for a segment, only IP addresses within a
specific IP address range can be sent from that network segment. For example, if you
configure anti-spoofing for the “Marketing” network segment, the following things
happens:
• If a host with an IP address outside of the allowed IP address range tries to
connect from a port or VLAN that belongs to the “Marketing” network segment,
the connection will be blocked and logged as “Spoofed IP”.
• If a host with an IP address within the bridge IP address range tries to connect
from a port or VLAN that belongs to a network segment other than the
“Marketing” segment, the connection will be blocked and logged as “Spoofed
IP”.
Note: The following VPN-1 Edge models do not support using bridge mode with port-
based VLAN:
• SBX166-LHGE-2
• SBX166-LHGE-3
How Does Bridge Mode Work?

Bridges operate at layer 2 of the OSI model, therefore adding a bridge to an existing
network is completely transparent and does not require any changes to the network's
structure.
Each bridge maintains a forwarding table, which consists of <MAC Address, Port>
associations. When a packet is received on one of the bridge ports, the forwarding table is
automatically updated to map the source MAC address to the network port from which the
packet originated, and the gateway processes the received packet according to the packet's
type.

Overview
When a bridge receives an IP packet, the gateway processes the packet as follows:
1. The destination MAC address is looked up in the bridge's forwarding table.
2. If the destination MAC address is found in the forwarding table, the packet is
forwarded to the corresponding port.
3. If the destination MAC address is not found in the forwarding table, the
destination IP address is searched for in all the defined bridge IP address
ranges.
4. If the destination IP address is found in the bridge IP address range of exactly
one port, the IP address is transmitted to that port.
5. If the IP address is found in the bridge IP address range of more than one port,
the packet is dropped. The gateway then sends an ARP query to each of the
relevant ports.
6. If a host responds to the ARP request packet with an ARP reply, the
forwarding table is updated with the correct <MAC Address, Port>
association. Subsequent packets will be forwarded using the forwarding table.
If a bridge receives a non-IP packet, and the bridge is configured to forward non-IP
protocol Layer-2 traffic, the gateway processes the packet as follows:
1. The destination MAC address is looked up in the bridge's forwarding table.
2. If the destination MAC address is found in the forwarding table, the packet is
forwarded to the corresponding port.
3. If the destination MAC address is not found in the forwarding table, the packet
is flooded to all the ports on the bridge.

Overview
Multiple Bridges and Spanning Tree Protocol

When using multiple bridges, you can enable fault tolerance and optimal packet routing, by
configuring Spanning Tree Protocol (STP - IEEE 802.1d). When STP is enabled, each
bridge communicates with its neighboring bridges or switches to discover how they are
interconnected. This information is then used to eliminate loops, while providing optimal
routing of packets. STP also uses this information to provide fault tolerance, by re-
computing the topology in the event that a bridge or a network link fails.
Figure 23: Dual Redundant Bridges with STP

Workflow
Figure 24: Link Redundancy with STP
Workflow
To use a bridge
1. Add a bridge.
See Adding and Editing Bridges on page 204.
2. Add the desired internal networks to the bridge.
See Adding Internal Networks to Bridges on page 208.
3. Add the desired Internet connections to the bridge.
See Adding Internet Connections to Bridges on page 213.
4. If you enabled the firewall between networks on this bridge, add security rules
and VStream Antivirus rules as needed.

Adding and Editing Bridges
For information on adding security rules, see Adding and Editing Rules on page 307.
For information on adding VStream Antivirus rules, see Adding and Editing Vstream
Antivirus Rules on page 379.
To add or edit a bridge


• To add a bridge, click Add Bridge.

• To edit a bridge, click Edit in the desired bridge's row.
The Bridge Configuration page appears.
3. Complete the fields using the following table.

4. Click Apply.

Table 34: Bridge Configuration Fields
Network Name Type a name for the bridge.
Firewall Between Members Specify whether the firewall should be enabled between
networks on this bridge, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. The firewall is enabled, and it will inspect

traffic between networks on the bridge, enforcing
firewall rules and SmartDefense protections. This is
the default value.
• Disabled. The firewall is disabled between networks
on this bridge.
Non IP Traffic Specify how the firewall should handle non-IP protocol traffic
between networks on this bridge, by selecting one of the
following:
• Block. The firewall will block all non-IP protocol

traffic on this bridge. This is the default value.
• Pass. The firewall will allow all non-IP protocol traffic
on this bridge and process it as described in Using
Bridges on page 197.
Spanning Tree Protocol Specify whether to enable STP for this bridge, by selecting one
of the following:
• Enabled. STP is enabled.

• Disabled. STP is disabled. This is the default value.
If you selected Enabled, the Bridge Priority field appears.

Bridge Priority Select the bridge's priority.
The bridge's priority is combined with a bridged network's MAC

address to create the bridge's ID. The bridge with the lowest ID
is elected as the root bridge. The other bridges in the tree
calculate the shortest distance to the root bridge, in order to
eliminate loops in the topology and provide fault tolerance.
To increase the chance of this bridge being elected as the root

bridge, select a lower priority.
Note: If you select the same priority for all bridges, the root
bridge will be elected based on MAC address.
This field only appears if STP is enabled.
Type the IP address to use for this gateway on the bridge.
Note: The bridge must not overlap other networks.
Subnet Mask Select the bridge's subnet mask.

Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
Note: In order to add a VLAN of any type (port-based, tag-based, VAP, or WDS link)
to the bridge, you must first create the desired VLAN.
For information on adding port-based VLANs, see Adding and Editing Port-Based
VLANs on page 165. For information on adding tag-based VLANs, see Adding and
Editing Tag-Based VLANs on page 167.For information on adding VAPs, see
Configuring Virtual Access Points on page 265. For information on adding WDS
links, see Configuring WDS Links on page 269.
To add an internal network to a bridge

2. Click Edit in the desired network's row.
3. In the Mode drop-down list, select Bridged.

New fields appear.
4. Complete these fields as described below.

If you assign the network to a bridge that uses STP, additional fields appear.
5. Click Apply.
6. Click OK.

In the My Network page, the internal network appears indented under the bridge.
Table 35: Bridged Network Fields
Assign to Bridge Select the bridge to which the connection should be assigned.
Bridge Anti-Spoofing Select this option to enable anti-spoofing.
If anti-spoofing is enabled, only IP addresses within the Allowed

IP Range can be source IP addresses for packets on this
network.

Allowed IP Range Type the range of IP addresses that should be allowed on this
network.
Note: When assigning IP addresses to machines in a bridged

network segment, the VPN-1 Edge DHCP server allocates only
addresses within the allowed IP address range.
To enable clients to move between bridged networks without

changing IP addresses, configure identical IP address ranges
for the desired networks, thus allowing the IP addresses to be
used on either of the bridged networks.
Note: Configuring overlapping or identical allowed IP address

ranges will decrease the effectiveness of anti-spoofing
between the bridged networks.
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port Type the port's cost.

Cost
STP uses the available port with the lowest cost to forward
frames to the root port. All other ports are blocked.
It is recommended to set a lower value for faster links.
This field only appears if the selected bridge uses STP.

Adding Internet Connections to Bridges
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port Select the port's priority.

Priority
The port's priority is combined with the port's logical number to
create the port's ID. The port with the lowest ID is elected as
the root port, which forwards frames out of the bridge. The
other ports in the bridge calculate the least-cost path to the
root port, in order to eliminate loops in the topology and
provide fault tolerance.
To increase the chance of this port being elected as the root

port, select a lower priority.
Note: If you select the same priority for all ports, the root port
will be elected based on the port's logical number.
To add an Internet connection to a bridge

2. Next to the desired Internet connection, click Edit.
The Internet Setup page appears.

3. In the Port drop-down list, specify the port that the Internet connection should
use, by doing one of the following:
• To use the ADSL port, select ADSL.

This option is available in ADSL models only.
• To use the WAN port, select WAN.
This option is available in non-ADSL models only.
• To use the DMZ/WAN2 port, select WAN2.
4. In the Connection Type field, select Bridged.
New fields appear.
5. Complete the fields specified in the table below.

6. Complete the rest of the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup
Fields on page 122.

New fields appear, depending on the selected options, and whether the selected bridge
uses STP.
7. Click Apply.

Table 36: Bridged Connection Fields
Assign to Bridge Select the bridge to which the connection should be assigned.
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port Type the port's cost.

Cost
STP uses the available port with the lowest cost to forward
frames to the root port. All other ports are blocked.
It is recommended to set a lower value for faster links.
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port Select the port's priority.

Priority
The port's priority is combined with the port's logical number to
create the port's ID. The port with the lowest ID is elected as
the root port, which forwards frames out of the bridge. The
other ports in the bridge calculate the least-cost path to the
root port, in order to eliminate loops in the topology and
provide fault tolerance.
To increase the chance of this port being elected as the root

port, select a lower priority.
Note: If you select the same priority for all ports, the root port
will be elected based on the port's logical number.

Overview
Chapter 7
Configuring High Availability

This chapter describes how to configure High Availability (HA) for two or more VPN-1
Edge appliances.
Overview ..................................................................................................217
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway...........................................220
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways ..............................................224
Overview
You can create a High Availability (HA) cluster consisting of two or more VPN-1 Edge
appliances. For example, you can install two VPN-1 Edge appliances on your network, one
acting as the “Master”, the default gateway through which all network traffic is routed, and
one acting as the “Backup”. If the Master fails, the Backup automatically and transparently
takes over all the roles of the Master. This ensures that your network is consistently
protected by a VPN-1 Edge appliance and connected to the Internet.
The gateways in a HA cluster each have a separate IP address within the local network. In
addition, the gateways share a single virtual IP address, which is the default gateway
address for the local network. Control of the virtual IP address is passed as follows:
1. Each gateway is assigned a priority, which determines the gateway's role: the
gateway with the highest priority is the Active Gateway and uses the virtual IP
address, and the rest of the gateways are Passive Gateways.
2. The Active Gateway sends periodic signals, or “heartbeats”, to the network via
a synchronization interface.
The synchronization interface can be any internal network or bridge existing on both
gateways, except the WAN interface.
3. If the heartbeat from the Active Gateway stops (indicating that the Active
Gateway has failed), the gateway with the highest priority becomes the new
Active Gateway and takes over the virtual IP address.
Chapter 7: Configuring High Availability 217

Overview
4. When a gateway that was offline comes back online, or a gateway's priority
changes, the gateway sends a heartbeat notifying the other gateways in the
cluster.
If the gateway's priority is now the highest, it becomes the Active Gateway.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports Internet connection tracking, which means that each
appliance tracks its Internet connection's status and reduces its own priority by a user-
specified amount, if its Internet connection goes down. If the Active Gateway's priority
drops below another gateway's priority, then the other gateway becomes the Active
Gateway.
Note: You can force a fail-over to a passive VPN-1 Edge appliance. You may want
to do this in order to verify that HA is working properly, or if the active VPN-1 Edge
appliance needs repairs. To force a fail-over, switch off the primary box or
disconnect it from the LAN network.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports configuring multiple HA clusters on the same
network segment. To this end, each cluster must be assigned a unique ID number.
When HA is configured, you can specify that only the Active Gateway in the cluster
should connect to the Internet. This is called WAN HA, and it is useful in the following
situations:
• Your Internet subscription cost is based is on connection time, and therefore
having the Passive appliances needlessly connected to the Internet costs you
money.
• You want multiple appliances to share the same static IP address without
creating an IP address conflict.
WAN HA avoids an IP address change, and thereby ensures virtually uninterrupted access
from the Internet to internal servers at your network.
On the other hand, you might prefer to keep Passive Gateways connected to the Internet at
all times, so that they can download updates from the Service Center and be accessible for
remote management, even when not acting as the Active Gateway. In this case, you must
assign a virtual IP address to the WAN interface. Each Passive Gateway will remain
constantly connected to the Internet using its WAN interface's primary IP address, while
remaining on standby to take over the WAN virtual IP address, in the event that the Active
Gateway fails. If desired, you can configure a WAN virtual IP address for the WAN2
interface, as well.

Overview
Note: To use a WAN virtual IP address, the Internet connection method must be
"Static IP". PPP-based connections and dynamic IP connections are not supported.
Before configuring HA, the following requirements must be met:

• You must have at least two identical VPN-1 Edge appliances.
• The appliances must have identical firmware versions and firewall rules.
• The appliances' internal networks and bridges must be the same.
• The appliances must have different real internal IP addresses, but share the same
virtual IP address.
• The appliances' synchronization interface ports must be connected either
directly, or via a hub or a switch. For example, if the DMZ is the
synchronization interface, then the DMZ/WAN2 ports on the appliances must be
connected to each other.
The synchronization interface need not be dedicated for synchronization only. It may
be shared with an active internal network or bridge.
You can configure HA for the WAN interface, for any bridge, and for any internal network
except wireless networks and the OfficeMode network.
Note: You can enable the DHCP server in all VPN-1 Edge appliances. A Passive
Gateway’s DHCP server will start answering DHCP requests only if the Active
Gateway fails.
Note: If you configure HA for the primary WLAN network:
• A passive appliance's wireless transmitter will be disabled until the

gateway becomes active.
• The two primary WLAN networks can share the same SSID and
wireless frequency.
• The primary WLAN interface cannot serve as the synchronization
interface.

Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
The following procedure explains how to configure HA on a single gateway. You must
perform this procedure on each VPN-1 Edge appliance that you want to include in the HA
cluster.
To configure HA on a VPN-1 Edge appliance

1. Set the appliance’s internal IP addresses and network range.
Each appliance must have a different internal IP address.
2. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The High Availability page appears.
3. Select the Gateway High Availability check box.

4. Next to each network for which you want to enable HA, select the HA check
box.
The Internet-Primary field represents the WAN interface, and the Internet-Secondary
field represents the WAN2 interface.
5. In the Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address.
This can be any unused IP address in the network, and must be the same for all
gateways.

You can assign a virtual IP address to any internal interface, as well as to Internet
connections that are configured as “LAN - Static IP”.
6. Click the Synchronization radio button next to the network you want to use as
the synchronization interface.
Note: The synchronization interface must be the same for all gateways, and must
always be connected and enabled on all gateways. Otherwise, multiple appliances
may become active, causing unpredictable problems.
The synchronization interface cannot be an Internet connection or a wireless

interface.
7. Complete the fields using the information the following table.

8. Click Apply.
9. If desired, configure WAN HA for both the primary and secondary Internet
connection.
This setting should be the same for all gateways. For further information, see the Do
not connect if this gateway is in passive state field in Using Internet Setup on page 99.
10. If you configured a virtual IP address for the WAN or WAN2 interface,
configure the Internet connection to use the "Static IP" connection method.
Table 37: High Availability Page Fields
Priority
My Priority Type the gateway's priority.

Internet Connection
Tracking
Internet - Primary Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the primary Internet
connection goes down.
Internet - Secondary Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the secondary
Internet connection goes down.
Note: This value is only relevant if you configured a backup connection.

For information on configuring a backup connection, see Configuring
a Backup Internet Connection on page 140.
Port Tracking
LAN1/2/3/4 Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the LAN port's
Ethernet link is lost.
DMZ Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the DMZ / WAN2
port's Ethernet link is lost.

Sample Implementation on Two Gateways
Advanced
Group ID If multiple HA clusters exist on the same network segment, type the ID
number of the cluster to which the gateway should belong.
The default value is 55. If only one HA cluster exists, there is no need
to change this value.
The following procedure illustrates how to configure HA for the following two VPN-1
Edge gateways, Gateway A and Gateway B:
Table 38: Gateway Details
Gateway A Gateway B
Internal Networks LAN, DMZ LAN, DMZ
Internet Connections Primary and secondary Primary only
LAN Network IP Address 192.169.100.1 192.169.100.2
LAN Network 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Subnet Mask
DMZ Network IP Address 192.169.101.1 192.169.101.2
DMZ Network 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

Subnet Mask

The gateways have two internal networks in common, LAN and DMZ. This means that
you can configure HA for the LAN network, the DMZ network, or both. You can use
either of the networks as the synchronization interface.
The procedure below shows how to configure HA for both the LAN and DMZ networks.
The synchronization interface is the DMZ network, the LAN virtual IP address is
192.168.100.3, and the DMZ virtual IP address is 192.168.101.3. Gateway A is the Active
Gateway.
To configure HA for Gateway A and Gateway B

1. Connect the LAN port of Gateways A and B to hub 1.
2. Connect the DMZ port of Gateways A and B to hub 2.
3. Connect the LAN network computers of Gateways A and B to hub 1.
4. Connect the DMZ network computers of Gateways A and B to hub 2.
5. Do the following on Gateway A:
a. Set the gateway's internal IP addresses and network range to the values
specified in the table above.
b. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
c. Select the Gateway High Availability check box.
The Gateway High Availability area is enabled. The LAN and DMZ networks are
listed.
d. Next to LAN, select the HA check box.
e. In the LAN network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.100.3.
f. Next to DMZ, select the HA check box.
g. In the DMZ network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.101.3.
h. Click the Synchronization radio button next to DMZ.

i. In the My Priority field, type "100".

The high priority means that Gateway A will be the Active Gateway.
j. In the Internet - Primary field, type "20".
Gateway A will reduce its priority by 20, if its primary Internet connection goes
down.
k. In the Internet - Secondary field, type "30".
Gateway A will reduce its priority by 30, if its secondary Internet connection goes
down.
l. Click Apply.
6. Do the following on Gateway B:
a. Set the gateway's internal IP addresses and network range to the values
specified in the table above.
b. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
c. Select the Gateway High Availability check box.
The Gateway High Availability area is enabled. The LAN and DMZ networks are
listed.
d. Next to LAN, select the HA check box.
e. In the LAN network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.100.3.
f. Next to DMZ, select the HA check box.
g. In the DMZ network's Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.101.3.
h. Click the Synchronization radio button next to DMZ.
i. In the My Priority field, type "60".
The low priority means that Gateway B will be the Passive Gateway.

j. In the Internet - Primary field, type "20".

Gateway B will reduce its priority by 20, if its Internet connection goes down.
k. Click Apply.
Gateway A's priority is 100, and Gateway B's priority is 60. So long as one of Gateway A's
Internet connections is up, Gateway A is the Active Gateway, because its priority is higher
than that of Gateway B.
If both of Gateway A's Internet connections are down, it deducts from its priority 20 (for
the primary connection) and 30 (for the secondary connection), reducing its priority to 50.
In this case, Gateway B's priority is the higher priority, and it becomes the Active
Gateway.

Overview
Chapter 8
Using Traffic Shaper

This chapter describes how to use Traffic Shaper to control the flow of communication to
and from your network.
Overview ..................................................................................................229
Setting Up Traffic Shaper.........................................................................230
Predefined QoS Classes............................................................................231
Adding and Editing Classes......................................................................232
Deleting Classes .......................................................................................236
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults ............................................................237
Overview
Traffic Shaper is a bandwidth management solution that allows you to set bandwidth
policies to control the flow of communication. Traffic Shaper ensures that important traffic
takes precedence over less important traffic, so that your business can continue to function
with minimum disruption, despite network congestion.
Traffic Shaper uses Stateful Inspection technology to access and analyze data derived from
all communication layers. This data is used to classify traffic in up to eight user-defined
Quality of Service (QoS) classes. Traffic Shaper divides available bandwidth among the
classes according to weight. For example, suppose Web traffic is deemed three times as
important as FTP traffic, and these services are assigned weights of 30 and 10 respectively.
If the lines are congested, Traffic Shaper will maintain the ratio of bandwidth allocated to
Web traffic and FTP traffic at 3:1.
If a specific class is not using all of its bandwidth, the leftover bandwidth is divided among
the remaining classes, in accordance with their relative weights. In the example above, if
only one Web and one FTP connection are active and they are competing, the Web
connection will receive 75% (30/40) of the leftover bandwidth, and the FTP connection
will receive 25% (10/40) of the leftover bandwidth. If the Web connection closes, the FTP
connection will receive 100% of the bandwidth.
Chapter 8: Using Traffic Shaper 229

Setting Up Traffic Shaper
Traffic Shaper allows you to give a class a bandwidth limit. A class's bandwidth limit is the
maximum amount of bandwidth that connections belonging to that class may use together.
Once a class has reached its bandwidth limit, connections belonging to that class will not
be allocated further bandwidth, even if there is unused bandwidth available. For example,
you can limit all traffic used by Peer-To-Peer file-sharing applications to a specific rate,
such as 512 kilobit per second. Traffic Shaper also allows you to assign a “Delay
Sensitivity” value to a class, indicating whether connections belonging to the class should
be given precedence over connections belonging to other classes.
Traffic Shaper supports DiffServ (Differentiated Services) Packet Marking. DiffServ
marks packets as belonging to a certain Quality of Service class. These packets are then
granted priority on the public network according to their class.
Setting Up Traffic Shaper
To set up Traffic Shaper

1. Enable Traffic Shaper for the Internet connection.
You can enable Traffic Shaper for incoming or outgoing connections.
Note: Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of packets it receives from
the Internet; it can only affect the rate of incoming traffic by dropping received
packets. This makes the shaping of inbound traffic less accurate than the shaping
of outbound traffic. It is therefore recommended to enable traffic shaping for
incoming traffic only if necessary.
2. Define QoS classes that reflect your communication needs. Alternatively, use
the four built-in QoS classes.
See Adding and Editing a Class on page 232.
3. Use Allow or Allow and Forward rules to assign different types of connections
to QoS classes.
For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for outgoing traffic, and you create an Allow
rule associating all outgoing VPN traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then Traffic

Predefined QoS Classes
Shaper will handle outgoing VPN traffic as specified in the bandwidth policy for the
Urgent class.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 307.
Note: Traffic Shaper must be enabled for the direction of traffic specified in the rule.
Note: If you do not assign a connection type to a class, Traffic Shaper automatically
assigns the connection type to the built-in "Default" class.
Predefined QoS Classes
Traffic Shaper provides the following predefined QoS classes.

To assign traffic to these classes, define firewall rules as described in Using Rules on page
303.
Table 39: Predefined QoS Classes
Class Weight Delay Sensitivity Useful for
Default 10 Medium Normal traffic.

(Normal Traffic)
All traffic is assigned to this class by default.
Urgent 15 High Traffic that is highly sensitive to delay. For

(Interactive Traffic) example, IP telephony, videoconferencing,
and interactive protocols that require quick
user response, such as telnet.
Important 20 Medium Normal traffic

(Normal Traffic)

Adding and Editing Classes
Class Weight Delay Sensitivity Useful for
Low Priority 5 Low Traffic that is not sensitive to long delays. For
(Bulk Traffic) example, SMTP traffic (outgoing email).
To add or edit a QoS class

1. Click Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.
The Quality of Service Classes page appears.
2. Click Add.

The VPN-1 Edge QoS Class Editor wizard opens, with the Step 1 of 3: Quality of Service
Parameters dialog box displayed.
4. Click Next.
The Step 2 of 3: Advanced Options dialog box appears.

Note: Traffic Shaper may not enforce guaranteed rates and relative weights for
incoming traffic as accurately as for outgoing traffic. This is because Traffic Shaper
cannot control the number or type of packets it receives from the Internet; it can
only affect the rate of incoming traffic by dropping received packets. It is therefore
recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if necessary. For
information on enabling Traffic Shaper for incoming and outgoing traffic, see Using
Internet Setup on page 99.
6. Click Next.
The Step 3 of 3: Save dialog box appears with a summary of the class.
7. Type a name for the class.

For example, if you are creating a class for high priority Web connections, you can
name the class "High Priority Web".
8. Click Finish.
The new class appears in the Quality of Service Classes page.

Table 40: QoS Class Fields
Relative Weight Type a value indicating the class's importance relative to the other
defined classes.
For example, if you assign one class a weight of 100, and you assign
another class a weight of 50, the first class will be allocated twice the
amount of bandwidth as the second when the lines are congested.
Delay Sensitivity Select the degree of precedence to give this class in the transmission
queue:
• Low (Bulk Traffic) - Traffic that is not sensitive to long delays.

For example, SMTP traffic (outgoing email).
• Medium (Normal Traffic) - Normal traffic
• High (Interactive Traffic) - Traffic that is highly sensitive to delay.
For example, IP telephony, videoconferencing, and interactive
protocols that require quick user response, such as telnet.
Traffic Shaper serves delay-sensitive traffic with a lower latency. That is,
Traffic Shaper attempts to send packets with a "High (Interactive Traffic)"
level before packets with a "Medium (Normal Traffic)" or "Low (Bulk
Traffic)" level.
Outgoing Traffic: Select this option to guarantee a minimum bandwidth for outgoing traffic
Guarantee At belonging to this class. Then type the minimum bandwidth (in
Least kilobits/second) in the field provided.
Outgoing Traffic: Select this option to limit the rate of outgoing traffic belonging to this
Limit rate to class. Then type the maximum rate (in kilobits/second) in the field
provided.
Incoming Traffic: Select this option to guarantee a minimum bandwidth for incoming traffic
Guarantee At belonging to this class. Then type the minimum bandwidth (in
Least kilobits/second) in the field provided.

Deleting Classes
Incoming Traffic: Select this option to limit the rate of incoming traffic belonging to this
Limit rate to class. Then type the maximum rate (in kilobits/second) in the field
provided.
DiffServ Code Select this option to mark packets belonging to this class with a DiffServ
Point Code Point (DSCP), which is an integer between 0 and 63. Then type the
DSCP in the field provided.
The marked packets will be given priority on the public network according
to their DSCP.
To use this option, your ISP or private WAN must support DiffServ. You
can obtain the correct DSCP value from your ISP or private WAN
administrator.
Deleting Classes
You cannot delete a class that is currently used by a rule. You can determine whether a
class is in use or not, by viewing the Rules page.
To delete an existing QoS class

2. In the desired class's row, click the Erase icon.

3. Click OK.
The class is deleted.

Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults
If desired, you can reset the Traffic Shaper bandwidth policy to use the four predefined
classes, and restore these classes to their default settings. For information on these classes
and their defaults, see Predefined QoS Classes on page 231.
Note: This will delete any additional classes you defined in Traffic Shaper
and reset all rules to use the Default class.
If one of the additional classes is currently used by a rule, you cannot
reset Traffic Shaper to defaults. You can determine whether a class is in
use or not, by viewing the Rules page.
To restore Traffic Shaper defaults

2. Click Restore Defaults.
3. Click OK.

Overview
Chapter 9
Working with Wireless Networks

This chapter describes how to configure wireless internal networks.
Overview ..................................................................................................239
Configuring Wireless Networks ...............................................................247
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity ...................................................273
Overview
Your VPN-1 Edge wireless appliance features a built-in 802.11b/g access point that is
tightly integrated with the firewall and VPN.
VPN-1 Edge wireless appliances support the latest 802.11g standard (up to 54 Mbps) and
are backwards compatible with the older 802.11b standard (up to 11 Mbps), so that both
new and old adapters of these standards are interoperable. VPN-1 Edge wireless appliances
also support a special Super G mode that allows reaching a throughput of up to 108 Mbps
with Super G compatible stations. For more information on the Super G mode refer to:
http://www.super-ag.com.
VPN-1 Edge wireless appliances transmit in 2.4GHz range, using dual diversity antennas
to increase the range. In addition, VPN-1 Edge appliances support a special extended range
(XR) mode that allows up to three times the range of a regular 802.11g access point. XR
dramatically stretches the performance of a wireless LAN, by enabling long-range
connections. The architecture delivers receive sensitivities of up to 105 dBm, over 20 dB
more than the 802.11 specification. This allows ranges of up to 300 meters indoors, and up
to 1 km (3200 ft) outdoors, with XR-enabled wireless stations (actual range depends on
environment).
Chapter 9: Working with Wireless Networks 239

Overview
The Primary WLAN
In addition to the LAN and DMZ networks, you can define a wireless internal network
called the primary WLAN (wireless LAN) network. The primary WLAN is the main
wireless network, and it controls all other wireless network's statuses: wireless networks
can be enabled only if the primary WLAN is enabled, and disabling the primary WLAN
automatically disables all other wireless network. In addition, all wireless networks inherit
certain settings from the primary WLAN.
You can configure the primary WLAN in either of the following ways:
• Wireless Configuration Wizard. Guides you through the primary WLAN setup,
step by step.
See Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard on page 247.
• Manual configuration. Offers advanced setup options for the primary WLAN.
See Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 253.
Virtual Access Points
The VPN-1 Edge appliance enables you to partition the primary WLAN into virtual access
points (VAPs). A VAP is a logical wireless network behind the VPN-1 Edge appliance and
is a type of VLAN (see Configuring VLANs on page 161). Like other types of VLANs,
VAPs are isolated from each other and can have separate security policies, IP network
segments, and Traffic Shaper settings. This enables you to configure separate policies for
different groups of wireless users.
For example, you could assign different permissions to employees and guests using your
company's wireless network, by defining two VAPs called “Guest” and “Employee”. The
Guest VAP would use simple WPA-Personal encryption, and the security policy would
mandate that stations connected to this network can access the Internet, but not sensitive
company resources. You could configure Traffic Shaper bandwidth management to give
stations in the Guest network a low priority, and by enabling Secure HotSpot on this
network, you could define terms of use that the guest users must accept before accessing
the Internet. In contrast, the Employee VAP would use the more secure WPA2-Enterprise

Overview
(802.11i) encryption standard and allow employees to access company resources such as
the intranet.
You can configure up to three VAPs, in addition to the primary WLAN. For information
on configuring VAPs, see Configuring VAPs on page 265.
Wireless Distribution System Links
The VPN-1 Edge appliance enables you to extend the primary WLAN's coverage area, by
creating a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). A WDS is a system of access points that
communicate with each other wirelessly via WDS links, without any need for a wired
backbone. For example, if your business has expanded across two buildings, and a single
access point no longer provides sufficient coverage, you can add another access point that
acts as a repeater. If it is impractical or costly to run wires between the access points, you
can connect them by configuring a WDS that includes both access points.
WDS is usually used together with bridge mode to connect the networks behind the access
points. For example, if you have two network segments, each of which is served by a
different access point, you can bridge the two network segments over WDS links. The
network segments will communicate with each other wirelessly via their access points and
act as a single network. For information on bridge mode, see Using Bridges on page 197.
WDS links are considered a type of VLAN (see Configuring VLANs on page 161).
Therefore, they can have separate security policies, IP network segments, and Traffic
Shaper settings.

Overview
You can use WDS links to create loop-free topologies, such as a star or tree of access
points.
Figure 25: WDS Star of Wireless Access Points

When used together with bridge mode and Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), you can use
WDS links to create redundant topologies, such as a loop or mesh of linked access points.
Figure 26: Two Access Points Linked by a WDS Bridge

Overview
Figure 27: Redundant Loop of Access Points Linked by WDS and STP
You can configure up to seven WDS links, in addition to the primary WLAN. For
information on configuring WDS links, see Configuring WDS Links on page 269.
Note: All access points in a WDS must use the same radio channel for the WDS link
and for communicating with wireless stations. Therefore, using WDS may have a
negative impact on wireless throughput. In this case, it is recommended to use a
traditional wired backbone to connect the access points, instead of WDS links.

Overview
Network Count Limitations
You can configure a total of eight wireless objects, including any combination of the
following:
• The primary WLAN
• Up to three virtual access points (VAPs)
• Up to seven WDS links
For example, if you configure the primary WLAN and two VAPs, then you can configure
five WDS links, or one more VAP and four WDS links.
When Extended Range (XR) mode is enabled for a wireless object, then it is counted as
two objects. For example, if you configure XR mode for the primary WLAN and one
VAP, they are counted as four wireless objects.
For information on default security policy rules controlling traffic to and from the primary
WLAN and VAPs, see Default Security Policy on page 298.
Wireless Security Protocols

The VPN-1 Edge wireless security appliance supports the following security protocols:
Table 41: Wireless Security Protocols
Security Description
Protocol
None No security method is used. This option is not recommended, because it

allows unauthorized users to access your wireless network, although you can
still limit access from the wireless network by creating firewall rules. This
method is suitable for creating public access points.

Overview
Protocol
WEP encryption In the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption security method, wireless
stations must use a pre-shared key to connect to your network. This method
is not recommended, due to known security flaws in the WEP protocol. It is
provided for compatibility with existing wireless deployments.
Note: The appliance and the wireless stations must be configured with the
same WEP key.
802.1x: RADIUS In the 802.1x security method, wireless stations (supplicants) attempting to
authentication, no connect to the access point (authenticator) must first be authenticated by a
encryption RADIUS server (authentication server) which supports 802.1x . All messages
are passed in EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).
This method is recommended for situations in which you want to authenticate

wireless users, but do not need to encrypt the data.
This security method is not supported for WDS links.
Note: To use this security method, you must first configure a RADIUS server.
See Using RADIUS Authentication. on page 492
WPA-Enterprise: The WPA-Enterprise (Wi-Fi Protected Access) security method uses MIC
RADIUS (message integrity check) to ensure the integrity of messages, and TKIP
authentication, (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) to enhance data encryption.
encryption
Furthermore, WPA-Enterprise includes 802.1x and EAP authentication,
based on a central RADIUS authentication server. This method is
recommended for situations where you want to authenticate wireless stations
using a RADIUS server, and to encrypt the transmitted data.
Note: To use this security method, you must first configure a RADIUS server
which supports 802.1x. See Using RADIUS Authentication. on page 492

Overview
Protocol
WPA-Personal: The WPA-Personal security method (also called WPA-PSK) is a variation of

password WPA-Enterprise that does not require an authentication server. WPA-
authentication, Personal periodically changes and authenticates encryption keys. This is
encryption called rekeying.
This option is recommended for small networks, which want to authenticate

and encrypt wireless data, but do not want to install a RADIUS server.
Note: The appliance and the wireless stations must be configured with the
same passphrase.
WPA2 (802.11i) The WPA2 security method uses the more secure Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) cipher, instead of the RC4 cipher used by WPA and WEP.
When using WPA-Enterprise or WPA-Personal security methods, the VPN-1

Edge appliance enables you to restrict access to the wireless network to
wireless stations that support the WPA2 security method. If this setting is not
selected, the VPN-1 Edge appliance allows clients to connect using both
WPA and WPA2.
Note: For increased security, it is recommended to enable the VPN-1 Edge internal
VPN Server for users connecting from your internal networks, and to install
SecuRemote/SecureClient on each computer in the wireless network. This ensures
that all connections from the wireless network to the LAN are encrypted and
authenticated. For information, see Internal VPN Server on page 419 and Setting
Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server on page 420.

Configuring Wireless Networks

Note: It is recommended to configure wireless networks via Ethernet and not via a
wireless connection, because the wireless connection could be broken after making
a change to the configuration.
Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard
The Wireless Configuration Wizard provides a quick and simple way of setting up your
basic primary WLAN parameters for the first time.
Note: You cannot configure WPA-Enterprise and 802.1x using this wizard. For
information on configuring these modes, see Manually Configuring a Wireless
Network on page 253.
To configure a WLAN using the Wireless Configuration Wizard

1. Prepare the appliance for a wireless connection as described in Network
Installation on page 57.
3. In the WLAN network's row, click Edit.
4. Click Wireless Wizard.

The Wireless Configuration Wizard opens, with the Wireless Configuration dialog box
displayed.
5. Select the Enable wireless networking check box to enable the primary WLAN.
6. Complete the fields using the information in Basic WLAN Settings Fields on
page 256.
7. Click Next.
8. The Wireless Security dialog box appears.

• Click WPA-Personal to use the WPA-Personal security mode.

WPA-Personal (also called WPA-PSK) uses a passphrase for authentication. This
method is recommended for small, private wireless networks, which want to
authenticate and encrypt wireless data but do not want to install a RADIUS
server. Both WPA and the newer, more secure WPA2 (802.11i) will be accepted.
To allow only the more secure WPA2 and not WPA, see Manually Configuring
a WLAN on page 253. For larger wireless networks with many users, configure
the primary WLAN to use WPA-Enterprise, using the procedure Manually
Configuring a WLAN on page 253.
• Click WEP to use the WEP security mode.
Using WEP, wireless stations must use a pre-shared key to connect to your
network. WEP is widely known to be insecure, and is supported mainly for
compatibility with existing networks and stations that do not support other
methods.
• Click No Security to use no security to create a public, unsecured access point.
10. Click Next.

WPA-Personal
If you chose WPA-Personal, the Wireless Configuration-WPA-Personal dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1. In the text box, type the passphrase for accessing the network, or click Random
to randomly generate a passphrase.
This must be between 8 and 63 characters. It can contain spaces and special
characters, and is case-sensitive.
2. Click Next.

The Wireless Security Confirmation dialog box appears.
3. Click Next.
4. The Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
5. Click Finish.
The wizard closes.
6. Prepare the wireless stations.

WEP
If you chose WEP, the Wireless Configuration-WEP dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1. Choose a WEP key length.
The possible key lengths are:
• 64 Bits - The key length is 10 hexadecimal characters.

Some wireless card vendors call these lengths 40/104/128, respectively.
Note that WEP is generally considered to be insecure, regardless of the selected key
length.
2. In the text box, type the WEP key, or click Random to randomly generate a
key matching the selected length.
The key is composed of characters 0-9 and A-F, and is not case-sensitive. The wireless
stations must be configured with this same key.
3. Click Next.
The Wireless Security Confirmation dialog box appears.
4. Click Next.

The Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.

5. Click Finish.
The wizard closes.
6. Prepare the wireless stations.
No Security
The Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
• Click Finish.
The wizard closes.
Manually Configuring a Wireless Network
To manually configure a wireless network

1. Prepare the appliance for a wireless connection as described in Network
Installation on page 57.
2. If you want to use 802.1x or WPA-Enterprise security mode for the wireless
network, configure a RADIUS server.
For information on security modes, see Basic Wireless Settings Fields on page 256.
For information on configuring RADIUS servers, see Using RADIUS Authentication
on page 492.
4. In the desired wireless network's row, click Edit.


6. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the wireless network network's
default gateway.
The wireless network must not overlap other networks.
7. In the Subnet Mask field, type the wireless network’s internal network range.


10. Complete the fields using the information in Basic Wireless Settings Fields on
page 256.
11. To configure advanced settings, click Show Advanced Settings and complete
the fields using the information in Advanced Wireless Settings Fields on page
261.
New fields appear.

12. Click Apply.

A warning message appears, telling you that you are about to change your network
settings.
13. Click OK.
Note: Some wireless cards have "Infrastructure" and "Ad-hoc" modes. These modes
are also called "Access Point" and "Peer to Peer". On the wireless client, choose
the "Infrastructure" or "Access Point" mode.
You can set the wireless cards to either "Long Preamble" or "Short Preamble".
Table 42: Basic Wireless Settings Fields
Wireless Settings
Network Name Type the network name (SSID) that identifies your wireless network. This
(SSID) name will be visible to wireless stations passing near your access point,
unless you enable the Hide the Network Name (SSID) option.
It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and is case-sensitive.
Country Select the country where you are located.
Warning: Choosing an incorrect country may result in the violation of

government regulations.
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is
inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.

Operation Mode Select an operation mode:
• 802.11b (11 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range and offers a
maximum theoretical rate of 11 Mbps. When using this mode,
only 802.11b stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11g (54 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers a
maximum theoretical rate of 54 Mbps. When using this mode,
only 802.11g stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11b/g (11/54 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers
a maximum theoretical rate of 54 Mbps. When using this mode,
both 802.11b stations and 802.11g stations will be able to
connect.
• 802.11g Super (54/108 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and
offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108 Mbps. When using this
mode, 802.1g stations and 802.11g Super stations will be able to
connect.
• 802.11g Super (11/54/108). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and
offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108 Mbps. When using this
mode, 802.11b stations, 802.11g stations, and 802.11g Super
stations will all be able to connect.

Each operation mode indicates a wireless protocol (such as 802.11g

Super), followed by the maximum bandwidth (such as 108 Mbps).
The list of modes is dependent on the selected country.
You can prevent older wireless stations from slowing down your network, by
choosing an operation mode that restricts access to newer wireless
stations.
Note: The actual data transfer speed is usually significantly lower than the
maximum theoretical bandwidth and degrades with distance.
Important: The station wireless cards must support the selected operation
mode. For a list of cards supporting 802.11g Super, refer to
http://www.super-ag.com.
Channel Select the radio frequency to use for the wireless connection:
• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects a

channel. This is the default.
• A specific channel. The list of channels is dependent on the
selected country and operation mode.
Note: If there is another wireless network in the vicinity, the two networks
may interfere with one another. To avoid this problem, the networks should
be assigned channels that are at least 25 MHz (5 channels) apart.
Alternatively, you can reduce the transmission power.

Security Select the security protocol to use. For information on the supported
security protocols, see Wireless Security Protocols on page 244.
If you select WEP encryption, the WEP Keys area opens.
If you select WPA-Enterprise, the Require WPA2 (802.11i) field appears.
If you select WPA-Personal, the Passphrase and Require WPA2 (802.11i) fields
appear.
Note: When configuring a WDS link, only None and WEP are not supported.
Passphrase Type the passphrase for accessing the network, or click Random to randomly
generate a passphrase.
This must be between 8 and 63 characters. It can contain spaces and

special characters, and is case-sensitive.
For the highest security, choose a long passphrase that is hard to guess, or
use the Random button.
Note: The wireless stations must be configured with this passphrase as well.
Require WPA2 Specify whether you want to require wireless stations to connect using
(802.11i) WPA2, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. Only wireless stations using WPA2 can access the

wireless network.
• Disabled. Wireless stations using either WPA or WPA2 can
access the wireless network. This is the default.

WEP Keys If you selected WEP encryption, you must configure at least one WEP key.
The wireless stations must be configured with the same key, as well.
Key 1, 2, 3, 4 radio Click the radio button next to the WEP key that this gateway should use for
button transmission.
The selected key must be entered in the same key slot (1-4) on the station
devices, but the key need not be selected as the transmit key on the
stations.
Note: You can use all four keys to receive data.
Key 1, 2, 3, 4 Select the WEP key length from the drop-down list.
length
The possible key lengths are:
• 64 Bits. The key length is 10 characters.

Note: Some wireless card vendors call these lengths 40/104/128,

respectively.
Note: WEP is generally considered to be insecure, regardless of the

selected key length.
Key 1, 2, 3, 4 text Type the WEP key, or click Random to randomly generate a key matching
box the selected length. The key is composed of hexadecimal characters 0-9
and A-F, and is not case-sensitive.

Table 43: Advanced Wireless Settings Fields
Advanced Security
Hide the Network Specify whether you want to hide your network's SSID, by selecting one of
Name (SSID) the following:
• Yes. Hide the SSID.

Only devices to which your SSID is known can connect to your
network.
• No. Do not hide the SSID.
Any device within range can detect your network name using the
wireless network discovery features of some products, such as
Microsoft Windows XP, and attempt to connect to your network.
Note: Hiding the SSID does not provide strong security, because a
determined attacker can still discover your SSID. Therefore, it is not
recommended to rely on this setting alone for security.
MAC Address Specify whether you want to enable MAC address filtering, by selecting one
Filtering of the following:
• Yes. Enable MAC address filtering.

Only MAC addresses that you added as network objects can
connect to your network.
For information on network objects, see Using Network
Objects on page 170.
• No. Disable MAC address filtering. This is the default.
Note: MAC address filtering does not provide strong security, since MAC
addresses can be spoofed by a determined attacker. Therefore, it is not
recommended to rely on this setting alone for security.

Station to Station Specify whether you want to allow wireless stations on this network to
Traffic communicate with each other, by selecting one of the following:
• Allow. Allow stations to communicate with each other.

• Block. Block traffic between wireless stations.
Wireless Transmitter
Transmission Rate Select the transmission rate:

rate. This is the default.
• A specific rate
Transmitter Power Select the transmitter power.
Setting a higher transmitter power increases the access point's range. A

lower power reduces interference with other access points in the vicinity.
The default value is Full. It is not necessary to change this value, unless
there are other access points in the vicinity.

Antenna Selection Multipath distortion is caused by the reflection of Radio Frequency (RF)
signals traveling from the transmitter to the receiver along more than one
path. Signals that were reflected by some surface reach the receiver after
non-reflected signals and distort them.
VPN-1 Edge appliances avoid the problems of multipath distortion by using

an antenna diversity system. To provide antenna diversity, each wireless
security appliance has two antennas.
Specify which antenna to use for communicating with wireless stations:
• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance receives signals through

both antennas and automatically selects the antenna with the
lowest distortion signal to use for communicating. The selection
is made on a per-station basis. This is the default.
• ANT 1. The ANT 1antenna is always used for communicating.
• ANT 2. The ANT 2 antenna is always used for communicating.
Use manual diversity control (ANT 1 or ANT 2), if there is only one antenna
connected to the appliance.
Fragmentation Type the smallest IP packet size (in bytes) that requires that the IP packet
Threshold be split into smaller fragments.
If you are experiencing significant radio interference, set the threshold to a

low value (around 1000), to reduce error penalty and increase overall
throughput.
Otherwise, set the threshold to a high value (around 2000), to reduce

overhead.

RTS Threshold Type the smallest IP packet size for which a station must send an RTS
(Request To Send) before sending the IP packet.
If multiple wireless stations are in range of the access point, but not in range
of each other, they might send data to the access point simultaneously,
thereby causing data collisions and failures. RTS ensures that the channel
is clear before the each packet is sent.
If your network is congested, and the users are distant from one another,
set the RTS threshold to a low value (around 500).
Setting a value equal to the fragmentation threshold effectively disables

RTS.
Extended Range Specify whether to use Extended Range (XR) mode:

Mode (XR)
• Disabled. XR mode is disabled.
• Enabled. XR mode is enabled. XR will be automatically
negotiated with XR-enabled wireless stations and used as
needed. This is the default.
For more information on XR mode, see About the Wireless Hardware in

Your Wireless Appliance.
Multimedia QoS Specify whether to use the Wireless Multimedia (WMM) standard to
(WMM) prioritize traffic from WMM-compliant multimedia applications. This can
have the following values:
• Disabled. WMM is disabled. This is the default.

• Enabled. WMM is enabled. The VPN-1 Edge appliance will
prioritize multimedia traffic according to four access categories
(Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background). This allows for
smoother streaming of voice and video when using WMM aware
applications.

Configuring Virtual Access Points
You can partition the wireless network into wireless VLANs called virtual access points
(VAPs). You can use VAPs to grant different permissions to groups of wireless users, by
configuring each VAP with the desired security policy and network settings, and then
assigning each group of wireless users to the relevant VAP. For more information on
VAPs, see Overview on page 239.
Note: While virtual access points (VAPs) can have different security settings and
network names, all VAPs inherit the following wireless settings from the primary
WLAN:
• Country
• Operation Mode
• Channel
• Transmission Rate
• Transmitter Power
• Antenna Selection
For information on configuring these settings in the primary WLAN, see Manually
Note: To enable VAPs, you must first enable the primary WLAN network. If you
disable the primary WLAN network, all VAPs are automatically disabled.
The procedure below explains how to add or edit a VAP. For information on deleting a
VAP, see Deleting VLANs on page 169.
To add or edit a VAP

1. Configure and enable the primary WLAN.
For information on configuring the primary WLAN manually, see Manually
For information on using a wizard to configure the primary WLAN, see Using the
Wireless Wizard on page 247.

2. If you want to use WPA-Enterprise or 802.1x security mode for the VAP,
make sure a RADIUS server is configured.
For information on security modes, see Basic Wireless Settings Fields on page 256.
For information on configuring RADIUS servers, see Using RADIUS Authentication
on page 492.
4. Click Add Network.
5. In the Network Name field, type a name for the VAP.

6. In the Type drop-down list, select Virtual Access Point.

New fields appear.

8. In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the VAP network's default
gateway.
The VAP network must not overlap other networks.
9. In the Subnet Mask field, type the VAP's internal network range.

12. Complete the fields using the information in Basic Wireless Settings Fields on
page 256.
the fields using the information in Advanced Wireless Settings Fields on page
261.
New fields appear.
14. Click Apply.
Note: Some wireless cards have "Infrastructure" and "Ad-hoc" modes. These modes
are also called "Access Point" and "Peer to Peer". On the wireless client, choose
the "Infrastructure" or "Access Point" mode.
You can set the wireless cards to either "Long Preamble" or "Short Preamble".

Configuring Wireless Distribution System Links
You can extend the wireless network across multiple access points, or connect the
networks behind different access points, by creating a Wireless Distribution System
(WDS). To create a WDS, you must add WDS links between the desired access points.
For more information on WDS links, see Overview on page 239.
Note: While WDS links can have different security settings, all WDS links inherit the
following wireless settings from the primary WLAN:
• Country
• Operation Mode
• Channel
• Transmission Rate
• Transmitter Power
• Antenna Selection
For information on configuring these settings in the primary WLAN, see Manually
Note: To enable WDS links, you must first enable the primary WLAN network. If you
disable the primary WLAN network, all WDS links are automatically disabled.
The procedure below explains how to add or edit a WDS link. For information on deleting
a WDS link, see Deleting VLANs on page 169.
To add or edit a WDS link

1. Configure and enable the primary WLAN.
For information on configuring the primary WLAN manually, see Manually
For information on using a wizard to configure the primary WLAN, see Using the
Wireless Wizard on page 247.

3. Click Add Network.

4. In the Network Name field, type a name for the WDS link.
5. In the Type drop-down list, select Wireless Distribution System.
New fields appear.
6. In the Peer WLAN MAC Address field, type the WLAN MAC address of the
access point to which you want to create a WDS link.
Note: This is the MAC address of the WLAN interface, not the WAN MAC address.
To see your access point's WLAN MAC address, click Reports in the main menu,
and then click Wireless.

• To create a bridged WDS link:

1) In the Mode drop-down list, select Bridged.
The fields are enabled and additional fields appear.
2) Complete these fields as described in Bridged Network Fields on
page 211.
• To create a routed WDS link, do the following:
1) In the Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
2) In the IP Address field, type the IP address of the WDS link's default
gateway.
The WDS link must not overlap other networks.
3) In the Subnet Mask field, type the WDS link's internal network range.
10. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Basic Wireless Settings
Fields on page 256.
the fields using the relevant information in Advanced Wireless Settings Fields
on page 261.

New fields appear.
12. Click Apply.
Note: Both sides of the WDS link must use the same radio channel and security
settings.
Note: WDS links support using the WEP security mode or no security. However, the
access point can use any supported security protocol to communicate with wireless
stations, including the WPA/WPA2 protocols.

Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity

I cannot connect to a wireless network from a wireless station. What should I do?
• Check that the SSID configured on the station matches the VPN-1 Edge
appliance's SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
• Check that the encryption settings configured on the station (encryption mode
and keys) match the VPN-1 Edge appliance's encryption settings.
• If MAC filtering is enabled, verify that the MAC address of all stations is listed
in the Network Objects page (see Viewing and Deleting Network Objects on
page 179).
• Check that the wireless card region matches the access point region.
• Check the wireless card supports the wireless standard that you configured.
I cannot connect to an access point over a WDS link. What should I do?
• Check that both sides of the WDS link are configured with their peer's WLAN
MAC address (and not the WAN MAC address).
• Check that both sides of the WDS link are configured to use the same radio
channel and security settings.
• Make sure that the peer access points are not too far apart for proper reception.
How do I test wireless reception?

• Look at the Wireless page, and check for excessive errors or dropped packets.
• Look at the Active Computers page, to see information for specific wireless
stations, such as the number of transmission errors, and the current reception
power of each station.
• On the wireless station, open a command window and type ping my.firewall. If
you see a large number of dropped packets, you are experiencing poor reception.

Wireless reception is poor. What should I do?

• Adjust the angle of the antennas, until the reception improves. The antennas
radiate horizontally in all directions.
• If both antennas are connected to the VPN-1 Edge appliance, check that the
Antenna Selection parameter in the primary WLAN's advanced settings is set to
Automatic (see Manually Configuring a Wireless Network on page 253).
• Relocate the VPN-1 Edge appliance to a place with better reception, and avoid
obstructions, such as walls and electrical equipment. For example, try mounting
the appliance in a high place with a direct line of sight to the wireless stations.
• Check for interference with nearby electrical equipment, such as microwave
ovens and cordless or cellular phones.
• Check the Transmission Power parameter in the primary WLAN's advanced
settings.
• Make sure that you are not using two access points in close proximity and on the
same frequency. For minimum interference, channel separation between nearby
access points must be at least 25 MHz (5 channels).
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports XR (Extended Range) technology. For best
range, enable XR mode in the wireless network's advanced settings, and use XR-
enabled stations.
• Range outdoors is normally much higher than indoors, depending on
environmental conditions.
Note: You can observe any changes in the wireless reception in the Active Computers
page. Make sure to refresh the page after making a change.
Note: Professional companies are available for help in setting up reliable wireless
networks, with access to specialized testing equipment and procedures.
There are excessive collisions between wireless stations. What should I do?
If you have many concurrently active wireless stations, there may be collisions between
them. Such collisions may be the result of a "hidden node" problem: not all of the stations
are within range of each other, and therefore are "hidden" from one another. For example,
if station A and station C do not detect each other, but both stations detect and are detected
by station B, then both station A and C may attempt to send packets to station B

simultaneously. In this case, the packets will collide, and Station B will receive corrupted
data.
The solution to this problem lies in the use of the RTS protocol. Before sending a certain
size IP packet, a station sends an RTS (Request To Send) packet. If the recipient is not
currently receiving packets from another source, it sends back a CTS (Clear To Send)
packet, indicating that the station can send the IP packet. Try setting the RTS Threshold
parameter in the wireless network's advanced settings to a lower value. This will cause
stations to use RTS for smaller IP packets, thus decreasing the likeliness of collisions.
In addition, try setting the Fragmentation Threshold parameter in the wireless network's
advanced settings to a lower value. This will cause stations to fragment IP packets of a
certain size into smaller packets, thereby reducing the likeliness of collisions and
increasing network speed.
Note: Reducing the RTS Threshold and the Fragmentation Threshold too much can
have a negative impact on performance.
Note: Setting an RTS Threshold value equal to the Fragmentation Threshold value
effectively disables RTS.
I am not getting the full speed. What should I do?

• The actual speed is always less then the theoretical speed, and degrades with
distance.
• Read the section about reception problems. Better reception means better speed.
• Check that all your wireless stations support the wireless standard you are using
(802.11g or 802.11g Super), and that this standard is enabled in the station
software. Transmission speed is determined by the slowest station associated
with the access point. For a list of wireless stations that support 802.11g Super,
see www.super-ag.com.

Viewing the Event Log
Chapter 10
Viewing Reports
This chapter describes the VPN-1 Edge Portal reports.
Viewing the Event Log.............................................................................277
Using the Traffic Monitor ........................................................................280
Viewing Computers..................................................................................285
Viewing Connections ...............................................................................287
Viewing Wireless Statistics ......................................................................289
Viewing ADSL Statistics .........................................................................293
You can track network activity using the Event Log. The Event Log displays the most
recent events and color-codes them.
Table 44: Event Log Color Coding
An event marked in Indicates…

this color…
Blue Changes in your setup that you have made yourself or as a result of
a security update implemented by your Service Center.
Red Connection attempts that were blocked by your firewall.
Orange Connection attempts that were blocked by your custom security

rules.
Chapter 10: Viewing Reports 277

An event marked in Indicates…

this color…
Green Traffic accepted by the firewall.
By default, accepted traffic is not logged. However, such traffic may

be logged if specified by a security policy downloaded from your
Service Center, or if specified in user-defined rules. In addition,
accepted traffic may be logged if SmartDefense protections' Action
field is set to "Track" instead of "Block".
You can create firewall rules specifying that certain types of connections should be logged,
whether the connections are incoming or outgoing, blocked or accepted. For information,
see Using Rules on page 303.
The logs detail the date and the time the event occurred, and its type. If the event is a
communication attempt that was rejected by the firewall, the event details include the
source and destination IP address, the destination port, and the protocol used for the
communication attempt (for example, TCP or UDP). If the event is a connection made or
attempted over a VPN tunnel, the event is marked by a lock icon in the VPN column.
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export the logs to an *.xls
(Microsoft Excel) file, and then store it for analysis purposes or send it to technical
support.
Note: You can configure the VPN-1 Edge appliance to send event logs to a Syslog
server. For information, see Configuring Syslog Logging on page 520.

To view the event log

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Event Log tab.
The Event Log page appears.
2. If an event is highlighted in red, indicating a blocked attack on your network,

you can display the attacker’s details, by clicking on the IP address of the
attacking machine.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server, and a window
displays the name of the entity to whom the IP address is registered and their contact
information. This information is useful in tracking down hackers.
4. To save the displayed events to an *.xls file:
a. Click Save.
A standard File Download dialog box appears.

Using the Traffic Monitor
b. Click Save.
The Save As dialog box appears.
c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
d. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
The *.xls file is created and saved to the specified directory.
5. To clear all displayed events:
a. Click Clear.
b. Click OK.
All events are cleared.
You can view incoming and outgoing traffic for selected network interfaces and QoS
classes using the Traffic Monitor. This enables you to identify network traffic trends and
anomalies, and to fine tune Traffic Shaper QoS class assignments.
The Traffic Monitor displays separate bar charts for incoming traffic and outgoing traffic,
and displays traffic rates in kilobits/second. If desired, you can change the number of
seconds represented by the bars in the charts, using the procedure Configuring Traffic
Monitor Settings on page 284.
In network traffic reports, the traffic is color-coded as described in the following table. In
the All QoS Classes report, the traffic is color-coded by QoS class.

Table 45: Traffic Monitor Color Coding for Networks
Traffic marked in this color… Indicates…
Blue VPN-encrypted traffic
Red Traffic blocked by the firewall
Green Traffic accepted by the firewall
You can export a detailed traffic report for all enabled networks and all defined QoS
classes, using the procedure Exporting General Traffic Reports on page 283.
Viewing Traffic Reports
To view a traffic report

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic Monitor tab.

The Traffic Monitor page appears.
2. In the Traffic Monitor Report drop-down list, select the network interface for
which you want to view a report.
The list includes all currently enabled networks. For example, if the DMZ network is
enabled, it will appear in the list.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled, the list also includes the defined QoS classes. Choose All
QoS Classes to display a report including all QoS classes. For information on enabling
Traffic Shaper see Using Internet Setup on page 99.
The selected report appears in the Traffic Monitor page.
3. To refresh all traffic reports, click Refresh.
4. To clear all traffic reports, click Clear.
Note: The firewall blocks broadcast packets used during the normal operation of
your network. This may lead to a certain amount of traffic of the type "Traffic
blocked by firewall" that appears under normal circumstances and usually does not
indicate an attack.

Exporting General Traffic Reports
You can export a general traffic report that includes information for all enabled networks
and all defined QoS classes to a *.csv (Comma Separated Values) file. You can open and
view the file in Microsoft Excel.
To export a general traffic report

2. Click Export.
3. Click Save.
4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
5. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
A *.csv file is created and saved to the specified directory.

Configuring Traffic Monitor Settings
You can configure the interval at which the VPN-1 Edge appliance should collect traffic
data for network traffic reports.
To configure Traffic Monitor settings

2. Click Settings.
The Traffic Monitor Settings page appears.
3. In the Sample monitoring data every field, type the interval (in seconds) at
which the VPN-1 Edge appliance should collect traffic data.
The default value is one sample every 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
4. Click Apply.

Viewing Computers
Viewing Computers
This option allows you to view the currently active computers on your network. The active
computers are graphically displayed, each with its name, IP address, and settings (DHCP,
Static, etc.). You can also view node limit information.
To view the active computers

If you configured High Availability, both the master and backup appliances are
shown. If you configured OfficeMode, the OfficeMode network is shown.
If there are wireless networks, the wireless stations are shown under the network to
which they are connected. For information on viewing statistics for these computers,
see Viewing Wireless Statistics on page 289. If a wireless station has been blocked

Viewing Computers
from accessing the Internet through the VPN-1 Edge appliance, the reason why it was
blocked is shown in red.
If a network is bridged, the bridge's name appears in parentheses next to the network's
name.
If you are exceeding the maximum number of computers allowed by your license, a
warning message appears, and the computers over the node limit are marked in red.
These computers are still protected, but they are blocked from accessing the Internet
through the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
Note: Computers that did not communicate through the firewall are not counted for
node limit purposes, even though they are protected by the firewall and appear in
the Active Computers table.
Note: To increase the number of computers allowed by your license, you can
upgrade your product. For further information, see Upgrading Your Software
Product on page 518.
If HotSpot mode is enabled for some networks, each computer's HotSpot status is
displayed next to it. The possible statuses include:
• Authenticated. The computer is logged on to My HotSpot.

• Not Authenticated. The computer is not logged on to My HotSpot.
• Excluded from HotSpot. The computer is in an IP address range excluded from
HotSpot enforcement. To enforce HotSpot, you must edit the network object.
See Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 171.
If Remote Desktop is enabled, a link appears next to each computer, enabling you to
access its desktop remotely. For information on using Remote Desktop, see Using
Remote Desktop on page 501.
Next to each computer, an Add button enables you to add a network object for the
computer, or an Edit button enables you to edit an existing network object for the
computer. For information on adding and editing network objects, see Adding and
Editing Network Objects on page 171.
3. To view node limit information, do the following:
a. Click Node Limit.

Viewing Connections
The Node Limit window appears with installed software product and the number
of nodes used.
b. Click Close to close the window.
Viewing Connections
This option allows you to view currently active connections between your networks, as
well as those from your networks to the Internet.
Note: The report does not display connections between bridged networks, where
Firewall Between Members is disabled.
To view the active connections

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Connections tab.

Viewing Connections
The Connections page appears.
The page displays the information in the following table.

3. To view information on the destination machine, click its IP address.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server, and a window
displays the name of the entity to which the IP address is registered and their contact
information.
4. To view information about a source or destination port, click the port.
A window opens displaying information about the port.
Table 46: Active Connections Fields
Protocol The protocol used (TCP, UDP, etc.)
Source - IP Address The source IP address
Source - Port The source port

Viewing Wireless Statistics
Destination - IP The destination IP address

Address
Destination -Port The destination port
QoS Class The QoS class to which the connection belongs (if Traffic Shaper is
enabled)
Options An icon indicating further details:
• - The connection is encrypted.

• - The connection is being scanned by VStream Antivirus.
If the primary WLAN is enabled, you can view wireless statistics for the primary WLAN
and VAPs, or for individual wireless stations.
To view statistics for the primary WLAN and VAPs

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the Wireless tab.

The Wireless page appears.
The page displays the information in the following tables.


Table 47: Wireless Statistics
Status
Wireless Mode The operation mode used by the primary WLAN, followed by the
transmission rate in Mbps
Domain The VPN-1 Edge access point's region
Country The country configured for the primary WLAN
Channel The radio frequency used by the primary WLAN
Statistics for This information is displayed for the primary WLAN and VAPs.
primary WLAN and
VAPs
MAC Address The MAC address of the wireless network interface
Security The security mode used by the wireless network
Frames OK The total number of frames that were successfully transmitted and received
Errors The total number of transmitted and received frames for which an error
occurred
Wrong The total number of transmitted and received packets with the wrong SSID
NWID/ESSID
Invalid Encryption The total number of transmitted and received packets with the wrong
Key encryption key
Missing Fragments The total number of packets missed during transmission and reception that
were dropped, because fragments of the packet were lost

Discarded Retries The total number of discarded retry packets that were transmitted and
received
Discarded Misc The total number of transmitted and received packets that were discarded
for other reasons
To view statistics for a wireless station

The following information appears next to each wireless station:
• The signal strength in dB

• A bar chart representing the signal strength
2. Mouse-over the information icon next to the wireless station.
A tooltip displays statistics for the wireless station, as described in the following table.
Table 48: Wireless Station Statistics
Current Rate The current reception and transmission rate in Mbps
Management The total number of transmitted and received management packets
Control The total number of received control packets
occurred

Viewing ADSL Statistics
QoS Indicates whether the client is using Multimedia QoS (WMM). Possible values
are:
• yes. The client is using WMM.

• no. The client is not using WMM.
XR Indicates whether the wireless client supports Extended Range (XR) mode.
Possible values are:
• yes. The wireless client supports XR mode.

• no. The wireless client does not support XR mode.
If you are using an ADSL model, you can view statistics for the ADSL connection.
To view ADSL statistics

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the ADSL tab.

The ADSL page appears.
The page displays the information in the following table.

Table 49: ADSL Statistics
Status The ADSL connection's current status (OK, Modem Initializing, No Sync,
Establishing Connection, Connected, Disabled)
DSL Standard The DSL line's standard
Self Test Indicates whether DSL modem has passed a self-test
Trellis Coding The DSL line's trellis coding

Framing The DSL line's framing structure

Structure
Line Rate The line rate for transmission (TX) and reception (RX) in kbps
Tx Power The local and remote transmission power in dB.
SNR Margin The local and remote Signal to Noise Ration (SNR) margin in dB.
The SNR margin is the difference between the amount of noise received by the
by the local/remote line end, and the amount of noise it can tolerate.
Line The local and remote line attenuation in dB.

Attenuation
The line attenuation is the difference between the signal power transmitted to
the local/remote line end, and that which it received.
occurred

Chapter 11
Setting Your Security Policy

This chapter describes how to set up your VPN-1 Edge appliance security policy.
You can enhance your security policy by subscribing to services such as Web Filtering and
Email Filtering. You can also integrate all VPN-1 Edge appliances into an overall
enterprise security policy by connecting to SMART management.
Note: When the firewall is managed by SmartCenter, the SmartCenter security

policy replaces the default security policy and the firewall security levels. The
firewall security level is set to High and cannot be changed.
Note: Local security rules take precedence over rules configured by the central
management.
For information on subscribing to services and SMART Management, see SMART

Management and Subscription Services on page 391.
Default Security Policy............................................................................ 298
Setting the Firewall Security Level ......................................................... 298
Configuring Servers................................................................................. 301
Using Rules ............................................................................................. 303
Using SmartDefense ................................................................................ 314
Using Port-Based Security....................................................................... 359
Using Secure HotSpot ............................................................................. 364
Defining an Exposed Host ....................................................................... 370
Chapter 11: Setting Your Security Policy 297

Default Security Policy
Default Security Policy

The VPN-1 Edge default security policy includes the following rules:
• Access is blocked from the WAN (Internet) to all internal networks (LAN,
DMZ, primary WLAN, VLANs, VAPs, and OfficeMode).
• Access is allowed from the internal networks to the WAN, according to the
firewall security level (Low/Medium/High).
• Access is allowed from the LAN network to the other internal networks (DMZ,
primary WLAN, VLANs, VAPs, and OfficeMode).
• Access is blocked from the DMZ, primary WLAN, VLAN, VAP, and
OfficeMode networks to the other internal networks, (including between
different VLANs and VAPs).
• HTTP access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal (my.firewall and my.vpn) is allowed
from all internal networks except the WLAN and VAPs. The primary WLAN
and VAPs can only access the VPN-1 Edge Portal using HTTPS, unless a
specific user-defined rule allows this.
• When using the print server function (see Using Network Printers on page 561),
access from internal networks to connected network printers is allowed.
• Access from the WAN to network printers is blocked.
These rules are independent of the firewall security level.
You can easily override the default security policy, by creating user-defined firewall rules.
For further information, see Using Rules on page 303.
Setting the Firewall Security Level
The firewall security level can be controlled using a simple lever available on the Firewall
page. You can set the lever to the following states.

Table 50: Firewall Security Levels
This Does this… Further Details

level…
Low Enforces basic control on All inbound traffic is blocked to the external VPN-1
incoming connections, Edge appliance IP address, except for ICMP
while permitting all echoes ("pings").
outgoing connections.
All outbound connections are allowed.
Medium Enforces strict control on All inbound traffic is blocked.

all incoming connections,
All outbound traffic is allowed to the Internet
while permitting safe
except for Windows file sharing (NBT ports 137,
outgoing connections.
138, 139 and 445).
This is the default level
and is recommended for
most cases. Leave it
unchanged unless you
have a specific need for a
higher or lower security
level.
High Enforces strict control on all All inbound traffic is blocked.

incoming and outgoing
Restricts all outbound traffic except for the
connections.
following: Web traffic (HTTP, HTTPS), email (IMAP,
POP3, SMTP), ftp, newsgroups, Telnet, DNS,
IPSEC IKE and VPN traffic.
Block All Blocks all access between All inbound and outbound traffic is blocked
networks. between the internal networks.
This does not affect traffic to and from the

gateway itself.

The definitions of firewall security levels provided in this table represent the VPN-1 Edge
appliance’s default security policy.
You can easily override the default security policy, by creating user-defined firewall rules.
For further information, see Using Rules on page 303.
Note: If the security policy is remotely managed, this lever might be disabled.
Note: Security updates downloaded from a Service Center may alter the security
policy and change these definitions.
To change the firewall security level

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Firewall tab.
The Firewall page appears.
2. Drag the security lever to the desired level.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance security level changes accordingly.

Configuring Servers
Configuring Servers
Note: If you do not intend to host any public Internet servers (Web Server, Mail
Server etc.) in your network, you can skip this section.
Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal, you can selectively allow incoming network connections
into your network. For example, you can set up your own Web server, Mail server or FTP
server.
Note: Configuring servers allows you to create simple Allow and Forward rules for
common services, and it is equivalent to creating Allow and Forward rules in the
Rules page. For information on creating rules, see Using Rules on page 303.
To allow a service to be run on a specific host

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Servers tab.
The Servers page appears, displaying a list of services and a host IP address for each
allowed service.

Configuring Servers

3. Click Apply.
A success message appears, and the selected computer is allowed to run the desired
service or application.
Table 51: Servers Page Fields
In this Do this…
column…
Allow Select the desired service or application.
Host IP Type the IP address of the computer that will run the service (one of your
network computers) or click the corresponding This Computer button to
allow your computer to host the service.
VPN Only Select this option to allow only connections made through a VPN.
To stop the forwarding of a service to a specific host

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Servers tab.
The Servers page appears, displaying a list of services and a host IP address for each
allowed service.
2. In the desired service or application’s row, click Clear.
The Host IP field of the desired service is cleared.
3. Click Apply.
The service or application is not allowed on the specific host.

Using Rules
Using Rules
The VPN-1 Edge appliance checks the protocol used, the ports range, and the destination
IP address, when deciding whether to allow or block traffic.
User-defined rules have priority over the default security policy rules and provide you with
greater flexibility in defining and customizing your security policy.
For example, if you assign your company’s accounting department to the LAN network
and the rest of the company to the DMZ network, then as a result of the default security
policy rules, the accounting department will be able to connect to all company computers,
while the rest of the employees will not be able to access any sensitive information on the
accounting department computers. You can override the default security policy rules, by
creating firewall rules that allow specific DMZ computers (such a manager’s computer) to
connect to the LAN network and the accounting department.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance processes user-defined rules in the order they appear in the
Rules table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to define
exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the Rules table.

Using Rules
For example, if you want to block all outgoing FTP traffic, except traffic from a specific IP
address, you can create a rule blocking all outgoing FTP traffic and move the rule down in
the Rules table. Then create a rule allowing FTP traffic from the desired IP address and
move this rule to a higher location in the Rules table than the first rule. In the figure below,
the general rule is rule number 2, and the exception is rule number 1.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance will process rule 1 first, allowing outgoing FTP traffic from
the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, blocking all outgoing FTP
traffic.
The following rule types exist:

Using Rules
Table 52: Firewall Rule Types
Rule Description
Allow and This rule type enables you to do the following:

Forward
• Permit incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in
your internal network.
• Forward all such connections to a specific computer in your
network.
• Redirect the specified connections to a specific port. This option is
called Port Address Translation (PAT).
• Assign traffic to a QoS class.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled for incoming traffic, then Traffic Shaper
will handle relevant connections as specified in the bandwidth policy
for the selected QoS class. For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled
for incoming traffic, and you create an Allow and Forward rule
associating all incoming Web traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then
Traffic Shaper will handle incoming Web traffic as specified in the
bandwidth policy for the Urgent class.
For information on Traffic Shaper and QoS classes, see Using
Traffic Shaper.
Creating an Allow and Forward rule is equivalent to defining a server in the

Servers page.
Note: You must use this type of rule to allow incoming connections if your
network uses Hide NAT.
Note: You cannot specify two Allow and Forward rules that forward the same
service to two different destinations.

Using Rules
Rule Description
Allow This rule type enables you to do the following:
• Permit outgoing access from your internal network to a specific

service on the Internet.
Note: You can allow outgoing connections for services that are not
permitted by the default security policy.
• Permit incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in
your internal network.
• Assign traffic to a QoS class.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled for the direction of traffic specified in the
rule (incoming or outgoing), then Traffic Shaper will handle relevant
connections as specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected
QoS class. For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for outgoing
traffic, and you create an Allow rule associating all outgoing Web
traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then Traffic Shaper will handle
outgoing Web traffic as specified in the bandwidth policy for the
Urgent class.
For information on Traffic Shaper and QoS classes, see Using
Traffic Shaper.
Note: You cannot use an Allow rule to permit incoming traffic, if the network or
VPN uses Hide NAT. However, you can use Allow rules for static NAT IP
addresses.
Block This rule type enables you to do the following:
• Block outgoing access from your internal network to a specific

service on the Internet.
• Block incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in your
internal network.

Using Rules
Adding and Editing Firewall Rules
To add or edit a firewall rule

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The Rules page appears.
• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.

• To edit an existing rule, click the Edit icon next to the desired rule.

Using Rules
The VPN-1 Edge Firewall Rule wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box
displayed.
3. Select the type of rule you want to create.

4. Click Next.
The Step 2: Service dialog box appears.
The example below shows an Allow rule.
6. Click Next.

Using Rules
The Step 3: Destination & Source dialog box appears.
The Step 4: Done dialog box appears.
8. Click Finish.
The new rule appears in the Firewall Rules page.

Using Rules
Table 53: Firewall Rule Fields
Any Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to any service.
Standard Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific standard
Service service.
You must then select the desired service from the drop-down list.
Custom Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific non-
standard service.
The Protocol and Port Range fields are enabled. You must fill them in.
Protocol Select the protocol (ESP, GRE, TCP, UDP, ICMP, OSPF, or ANY) for which
the rule should apply.
Note: You can specify additional protocols via the CLI. For information, refer
to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
Ports To specify the port range to which the rule applies, type the start port
number in the left text box, and the end port number in the right text box.
Note: If you do not enter a port range, the rule will apply to all ports. If you
enter only one port number, the range will include only that port.
Source Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block.
To specify an IP address, select Specified IP and type the desired IP address

in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.

Using Rules
Destination Select the destination of the connections you want to allow or block.

in the text box.
IP address range in the fields provided. This option is not available in Allow
and Forward rules.
To specify the VPN-1 Edge IP address, select This Gateway. This option is
not available in Allow and Forward rules.
To specify any destination except the VPN-1 Edge Portal and network
printers, select ANY.
Quality of Select the QoS class to which you want to assign the specified connections.
Service class
If Traffic Shaper is enabled, Traffic Shaper will handle these connections as
specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected QoS class. If Traffic Shaper
is not enabled, this setting is ignored. For information on Traffic Shaper and
QoS classes, see Using Traffic Shaper.
This drop-down list only appears when defining an Allow rule or an Allow and
Forward rule.
Log accepted Select this option to log the specified blocked or allowed connections.
connections /
By default, accepted connections are not logged, and blocked connections
Log blocked
are logged. You can modify this behavior by changing the check box's state.
connections

Using Rules
Redirect to port Select this option to redirect the connections to a specific port.
You must then type the desired port in the field provided.
This option is called Port Address Translation (PAT), and is only available
when defining an Allow and Forward rule.
Enabling/Disabling Firewall Rules
You can temporarily disable a user-defined rule.
To enable/disable a firewall rule

2. Next to the desired rule, do one of the following:
• To enable the rule, click .

The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click .
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.

Using Rules
Changing Firewall Rules' Priority
To change a firewall rule's priority

• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule up in the table.
• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule down in the table.
The rule's priority changes accordingly.
Deleting Firewall Rules
To delete an existing firewall rule

2. Click the Erase icon of the rule you wish to delete.

3. Click OK.
The rule is deleted.

Using SmartDefense
Using SmartDefense
The VPN-1 Edge appliance includes Check Point SmartDefense Services, based on Check
Point Application Intelligence. SmartDefense provides a combination of attack safeguards
and attack-blocking tools that protect your network in the following ways:
• Validating compliance to standards
• Validating expected usage of protocols (Protocol Anomaly Detection)
• Limiting application ability to carry malicious data
• Controlling application-layer operations
In addition, SmartDefense aids proper usage of Internet resources, such as FTP, instant
messaging, Peer-to-Peer (P2P) file sharing, file-sharing operations, and File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) uploading, among others.
Configuring SmartDefense
You can configure SmartDefense using the following tools:

• SmartDefense Wizard. Resets all SmartDefense settings to their defaults, and then
creates a SmartDefense security policy according to your network and security
preferences. See Using the SmartDefense Wizard on page 315.
• SmartDefense Tree. Enables you to fine tune individual settings in the
SmartDefense policy. You can use the SmartDefense tree instead of, or in
addition to, the wizard. See Using the SmartDefense Tree on page 319.

Using SmartDefense
Using the SmartDefense Wizard
The SmartDefense Wizard allows you to configure your SmartDefense security policy
quickly and easily through its user-friendly interface.
Note: The SmartDefense wizard clears any existing SmartDefense settings.
After using the wizard, you can fine tune the policy settings using the SmartDefense tree.
See Using the SmartDefense Tree on page 319.
To configure the SmartDefense policy using the wizard

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the SmartDefense tab.
The SmartDefense page appears.
2. Click SmartDefense Wizard.

Using SmartDefense
The SmartDefense Wizard opens, with the Step 1: SmartDefense Level dialog box
displayed.
3. Drag the lever to the desired level of SmartDefense enforcement.

For information on the levels, see the following table.
4. Click Next.
The Step 2: Application Intelligence Server Types dialog box appears.
5. Select the check boxes next to the types of public servers that are running on
your network.

Using SmartDefense
6. Click Next.
The Step 3: Application Blocking dialog box appears.
7. Select the check boxes next to the types of applications you want to block
from running on your network.
8. Click Next.
The Step 4: Confirmation dialog box appears.
9. Click Finish.

Using SmartDefense
Existing SmartDefense settings are cleared, and the security policy is applied.
Table 54: SmartDefense Security Levels
This level… Does this…
Minimal Disables all SmartDefense protections, except those that cannot be disabled.
Normal Enables the following:
• Teardrop
• Ping of Death
• LAND
• Packet Sanity
• Max Ping Size (set to 1500)
• Welchia
• Cisco IOS
• Null Payload
• IGMP
• Small PMTU (Log Only)
This level blocks the most common attacks.
High Enables the same protections as Normal level, as well as the following:
• Host Port Scan

• Sweep Scan
• HTTP Header Rejection
• Strict TCP (Log Only)
Extra Strict Enables the same protections as High level, as well as the following:
• Strict TCP (Log + Block)

• Small PMTU (Log + Block)
• Max Ping Size (set to 512)
• Network Quota

Using SmartDefense
Using the SmartDefense Tree
For convenience, SmartDefense is organized as a tree, in which each branch represents a

category of settings.
When a category is expanded, the settings it contains appear as nodes. For information on
each category and the nodes it contains, see SmartDefense Categories on page 321.
Each node represents an attack type, a sanity check, or a protocol or service that is
vulnerable to attacks. To control how SmartDefense handles a specific attack, you must
configure the relevant node's settings.

Using SmartDefense
To configure a SmartDefense node

The left pane displays a tree containing SmartDefense categories.
• To expand a category, click the icon next to it.

• To collapse a category, click the icon next to it.
2. Expand the relevant category, and click on the desired node.
The right pane displays a description of the node, followed by fields.
3. To modify the node's current settings, do the following:

a) Complete the fields using the relevant information in SmartDefense
Categories on page 321.
b) Click Apply.
4. To reset the node to its default values:
a) Click Default.

Using SmartDefense

b) Click OK.
The fields are reset to their default values, and your changes are saved.
SmartDefense Categories
SmartDefense includes the following categories:
• Denial of Service on page 321
• IP and ICMP on page 327
• TCP on page 338
• Port Scan on page 342
• FTP on page 345
• HTTP on page 349
• Microsoft Networks on page 351
• IGMP on page 353
• Peer-to-Peer on page 354
• Instant Messaging Traffic on page 356
Denial of Service
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at overwhelming the target with spurious data,
to the point where it is no longer able to respond to legitimate service requests.
This category includes the following attacks:
• DDoS Attack on page 326
• LAND on page 324
• Non-TCP Flooding on page 325
• Ping of Death on page 323
• Teardrop on page 322

Using SmartDefense
Teardrop
In a Teardrop attack, the attacker sends two IP fragments, the latter entirely contained
within the former. This causes some computers to allocate too much memory and crash.
You can configure how Teardrop attacks should be handled.
Table 55: Teardrop Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a Teardrop attack occurs, by selecting one
of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.

• None. No action.
Track Specify whether to log Teardrop attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.

• None. Do not log the attack.

Using SmartDefense
Ping of Death
In a Ping of Death attack, the attacker sends a fragmented PING request that exceeds the
maximum IP packet size (64KB). Some operating systems are unable to handle such
requests and crash.
You can configure how Ping of Death attacks should be handled.
Table 56: Ping of Death Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a Ping of Death attack occurs, by selecting
one of the following:

Track Specify whether to log Ping of Death attacks, by selecting one of the
following:


Using SmartDefense
LAND
In a LAND attack, the attacker sends a SYN packet, in which the source address and port
are the same as the destination (the victim computer). The victim computer then tries to
reply to itself and either reboots or crashes.
You can configure how LAND attacks should be handled.
Table 57: LAND Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a LAND attack occurs, by selecting one of
the following:

Track Specify whether to log LAND attacks, by selecting one of the following:


Using SmartDefense
Non-TCP Flooding
Advanced firewalls maintain state information about connections in a State table. In Non-
TCP Flooding attacks, the attacker sends high volumes of non-TCP traffic. Since such
traffic is connectionless, the related state information cannot be cleared or reset, and the
firewall State table is quickly filled up. This prevents the firewall from accepting new
connections and results in a Denial of Service (DoS).
You can protect against Non-TCP Flooding attacks by limiting the percentage of state table
capacity used for non-TCP connections.
Table 58: Non-TCP Flooding Fields
Action Specify what action to take when the percentage of state table capacity used
for non-TCP connections reaches the Max. percent non TCP traffic threshold.
Select one of the following:
• Block. Block any additional non-TCP connections.

• None. No action. This is the default.
Track Specify whether to log non-TCP connections that exceed the Max. Percent
Non-TCP Traffic threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the connections.

• None. Do not log the connections. This is the default.

Using SmartDefense
Max. Percent Type the maximum percentage of state table capacity allowed for non-TCP
Non-TCP Traffic connections.
The default value is 10%.
DDoS Attack
In a distributed denial-of-service attack (DDoS attack), the attacker directs multiple hosts
in a coordinated attack on a victim computer or network. The attacking hosts send large
amounts of spurious data to the victim, so that the victim is no longer able to respond to
legitimate service requests.
You can configure how DDoS attacks should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 59: Distributed Denial of Service Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a DDoS attack occurs, by selecting one of
the following:

Track Specify whether to log DDoS attacks, by selecting one of the following:

IP and ICMP
This category allows you to enable various IP and ICMP protocol tests, and to configure
various protections against IP and ICMP-related attacks. It includes the following:
• Cisco IOS DOS on page 335
• IP Fragments on page 331
• Max Ping Size on page 330
• Network Quota on page 333
• Null Payload on page 337
• Packet Sanity on page 328
• Welchia on page 334

Using SmartDefense
Packet Sanity
Packet Sanity performs several Layer 3 and Layer 4 sanity checks. These include verifying
packet size, UDP and TCP header lengths, dropping IP options, and verifying the TCP
flags.
You can configure whether logs should be issued for offending packets.
Table 60: Packet Sanity Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a packet fails a sanity test, by selecting
• Block. Block the packet. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to issue logs for packets that fail the packet sanity tests, by
selecting one of the following:
• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.

• None. Do not issue logs.

Using SmartDefense
Disable relaxed The UDP length verification sanity check measures the UDP header length
UDP length and compares it to the UDP header length specified in the UDP header. If
verification the two values differ, the packet may be corrupted.
However, since different applications may measure UDP header length

differently, the VPN-1 Edge appliance relaxes the UDP length verification
sanity check by default, performing the check but not dropping offending
packets. This is called relaxed UDP length verification.
Specify whether the VPN-1 Edge appliance should relax the UDP length
verification sanity check or not, by selecting one of the following:
• True. Disable relaxed UDP length verification. The VPN-1 Edge

appliance will drop packets that fail the UDP length verification
check.
• False. Do not disable relaxed UDP length verification. The VPN-1
Edge appliance will not drop packets that fail the UDP length
verification check. This is the default.

Using SmartDefense
Max Ping Size

PING (ICMP echo request) is a program that uses ICMP protocol to check whether a
remote machine is up. A request is sent by the client, and the server responds with a reply
echoing the client's data.
An attacker can echo the client with a large amount of data, causing a buffer overflow.
You can protect against such attacks by limiting the allowed size for ICMP echo requests.
Table 61: Max Ping Size Fields
Action Specify what action to take when an ICMP echo response exceeds the Max
Ping Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the request. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to log ICMP echo responses that exceed the Max Ping Size
threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the responses. This is the default.

• None. Do not log the responses.
Max Ping Size Specify the maximum data size for ICMP echo response.

Using SmartDefense
IP Fragments
When an IP packet is too big to be transported by a network link, it is split into several
smaller IP packets and transmitted in fragments. To conceal a known attack or exploit, an
attacker might imitate this common behavior and break the data section of a single packet
into several fragmented packets. Without reassembling the fragments, it is not always
possible to detect such an attack. Therefore, the VPN-1 Edge appliance always
reassembles all the fragments of a given IP packet, before inspecting it to make sure there
are no attacks or exploits in the packet.
You can configure how fragmented packets should be handled.
Table 62: IP Fragments Fields
Forbid IP Fragments Specify whether all fragmented packets should be dropped, by selecting
• True. Drop all fragmented packets.

• False. No action. This is the default.
Under normal circumstances, it is recommended to leave this field set to

False. Setting this field to True may disrupt Internet connectivity, because
it does not allow any fragmented packets.

Using SmartDefense
Max Number of Type the maximum number of fragmented packets allowed. Packets
Incomplete Packets exceeding this threshold will be dropped.
Timeout for When the VPN-1 Edge appliance receives packet fragments, it waits for
Discarding additional fragments to arrive, so that it can reassemble the packet.
Incomplete Packets Type the number of seconds to wait before discarding incomplete
packets.
Track Specify whether to log fragmented packets, by selecting one of the

following:
• Log. Log all fragmented packets.

• None. Do not log the fragmented packets. This is the default.

Using SmartDefense
Network Quota
An attacker may try to overload a server in your network by establishing a very large
number of connections per second. To protect against Denial Of Service (DoS) attacks,
Network Quota enforces a limit upon the number of connections per second that are
allowed from the same source IP address.
You can configure how connections that exceed that limit should be handled.
Table 63: Network Quota Fields
Action Specify what action to take when the number of network connections
from the same source reaches the Max. Connections/Second per Source IP
threshold. Select one of the following:
• Block. Block all new connections from the source. Existing

connections will not be blocked. This is the default.
Track Specify whether to log connections from a specific source that exceed
the Max. Connections/Second per Source IP threshold, by selecting one of
the following:
• Log. Log the connections. This is the default.

• None. Do not log the connections.

Using SmartDefense
Max. Type the maximum number of network connections allowed per second
Connections/Second from the same source IP address.
from Same Source IP
Set a lower threshold for stronger protection against DoS attacks.
Note: Setting this value too low can lead to false alarms.
Welchia
The Welchia worm uses the MS DCOM vulnerability or a WebDAV vulnerability. After
infecting a computer, the worm begins searching for other live computers to infect. It does
so by sending a specific ping packet to a target and waiting for the reply that signals that
the target is alive. This flood of pings may disrupt network connectivity.
You can configure how the Welchia worm should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 64: Welchia Fields
Action Specify what action to take when the Welchia worm is detected, by selecting

Track Specify whether to log Welchia worm attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

Cisco IOS DOS

Cisco routers are configured to process and accept Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4)
packets by default. When a Cisco IOS device is sent a specially crafted sequence of IPv4
packets (with protocol type 53 - SWIPE, 55 - IP Mobility, 77 - Sun ND, or 103 - Protocol
Independent Multicast - PIM), the router will stop processing inbound traffic on that
interface.
You can configure how Cisco IOS DOS attacks should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 65: Cisco IOS DOS
Action Specify what action to take when a Cisco IOS DOS attack occurs,
by selecting one of the following:

Track Specify whether to log Cisco IOS DOS attacks, by selecting one of
the following:

Number of Hops to Protect Type the number of hops from the enforcement module that Cisco
routers should be protected.
Action Protection for Specify what action to take when an IPv4 packet of the specific
SWIPE - Protocol 53 / protocol type is received, by selecting one of the following:
IP Mobility - Protocol 55 /
• Block. Drop the packet. This is the default.
SUN-ND - Protocol 77 / • None. No action.
PIM - Protocol 103

Using SmartDefense
Null Payload
Some worms, such as Sasser, use ICMP echo request packets with null payload to detect
potentially vulnerable hosts.
You can configure how null payload ping packets should be handled.
Table 66: Null Payload Fields
Action Specify what action to take when null payload ping packets are detected, by
• Block. Block the packets. This is the default.

Track Specify whether to log null payload ping packets, by selecting one of the
following:
• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.

• None. Do not log the packets.

Using SmartDefense
TCP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the TCP protocol. It
includes the following:
• Small PMTU on page 339
• Strict TCP on page 338
• SynDefender on page 341
Strict TCP
Out-of-state TCP packets are SYN-ACK or data packets that arrive out of order, before the
TCP SYN packet.
Note: In normal conditions, out-of-state TCP packets can occur after the VPN-1
Edge restarts, since connections which were established prior to the reboot are
unknown. This is normal and does not indicate an attack.
You can configure how out-of-state TCP packets should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 67: Strict TCP
Action Specify what action to take when an out-of-state TCP packet arrives, by
• Block. Block the packets.

Track Specify whether to log null payload ping packets, by selecting one of the
following:
• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.

• None. Do not log the packets.
Small PMTU
Small PMTU (Packet MTU) is a bandwidth attack in which the client fools the server into
sending large amounts of data using small packets. Each packet has a large overhead that
creates a "bottleneck" on the server.
You can protect against this attack by specifying a minimum packet size for data sent over
the Internet.

Using SmartDefense
Table 68: Small PMTU Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a packet is smaller than the Minimal MTU
Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packet.

Track Specify whether to issue logs for packets are smaller than the Minimal MTU
Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:

Minimal MTU Type the minimum value allowed for the MTU field in IP packets sent by a
Size client.
An overly small value will not prevent an attack, while an overly large value
might degrade performance and cause legitimate requests to be dropped.

Using SmartDefense
SynDefender
In a SYN attack, the attacker sends many SYN packets without finishing the three-way
handshake. This causes the attacked host to be unable to accept new connections.
You can protect against this attack by specifying a maximum amount of time for
completing handshakes.
Table 69: SynDefender Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a SYN attack occurs, by selecting one of
the following:
• Block. Block the packet. This is the default.

A SYN attack is when more than 5 incomplete TCP handshakes are

detected within 10 seconds. A handshake is considered incomplete when it
exceeds the Maximum time for completing the handshake threshold.
Track Specify whether to issue logs for the events specified by the Log Mode
parameter, by selecting one of the following:


Using SmartDefense
Log Mode Specify upon which events logs should be issued, by selecting one of the
following:

• Log per attack. Issue logs for each SYN attack. This is the default.
• Log individual unfinished handshakes. Issue logs for each incomplete
handshake.
This field is only relevant if the Track field is set to Log.
Maximum time for Type the maximum amount of time in seconds after which a TCP handshake
completing the is considered incomplete.
handshake
The default value is 10 seconds.
Protect external Specify whether SynDefender should be enabled for external (WAN)
interfaces only interfaces only, by selecting one of the following:
• Disabled. Enable SynDefender for all the firewall interfaces. This

is the default.
• Enabled. Enable SynDefender for external interfaces only.
Port Scan
An attacker can perform a port scan to determine whether ports are open and vulnerable to
an attack. This is most commonly done by attempting to access a port and waiting for a
response. The response indicates whether or not the port is open.
This category includes the following types of port scans:
• Host Port Scan. The attacker scans a specific host's ports to determine which of
the ports are open.
• Sweep Scan. The attacker scans various hosts to determine where a specific port
is open.

Using SmartDefense
You can configure how the VPN-1 Edge appliance should react when a port scan is
detected.
Table 70: Port Scan Fields
Number of ports SmartDefense detects ports scans by measuring the number of ports
accessed accessed over a period of time. The number of ports accessed must exceed
the Number of ports accessed value, within the number of seconds specified by
the In a period of [seconds] value, in order for SmartDefense to consider the
activity a scan.
Type the minimum number of ports that must be accessed within the In a
period of [seconds] period, in order for SmartDefense to detect the activity as
a port scan.
For example, if this value is 30, and 40 ports are accessed within a specified
period of time, SmartDefense will detect the activity as a port scan.
For Host Port Scan, the default value is 30. For Sweep Scan, the default
value is 50.

Using SmartDefense
In a period of SmartDefense detects ports scans by measuring the number of ports

[seconds] accessed over a period of time. The number of ports accessed must exceed
the Number of ports accessed value, within the number of seconds specified by
the In a period of [seconds] value, in order for SmartDefense to consider the
activity a scan.
Type the maximum number of seconds that can elapse, during which the
Number of ports accessed threshold is exceeded, in order for SmartDefense to
detect the activity as a port scan.
For example, if this value is 20, and the Number of ports accessed threshold is
exceeded for 15 seconds, SmartDefense will detect the activity as a port
scan. If the threshold is exceeded for 30 seconds, SmartDefense will not
detect the activity as a port scan.
Track Specify whether to issue logs for scans, by selecting one of the following:

• None. Do not issue logs. This is the default.
Detect scans Specify whether to detect only scans originating from the Internet, by
from Internet only selecting one of the following:
• False. Do not detect only scans from the Internet. This is the
default.
• True. Detect only scans from the Internet.

Using SmartDefense
FTP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the FTP protocol. It
• Blocked FTP Commands on page 348
• Block Known Ports on page 346
• Block Port Overflow on page 347
• FTP Bounce on page 345
FTP Bounce
When connecting to an FTP server, the client sends a PORT command specifying the IP
address and port to which the FTP server should connect and send data. An FTP Bounce
attack is when an attacker sends a PORT command specifying the IP address of a third
party instead of the attacker's own IP address. The FTP server then sends data to the victim
machine.
You can configure how FTP bounce attacks should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 71: FTP Bounce Fields
Action Specify what action to take when an FTP Bounce attack occurs, by selecting

Track Specify whether to log FTP Bounce attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

Block Known Ports

You can choose to block the FTP server from connecting to well-known ports.
Note: Known ports are published ports associated with services (for example, SMTP
is port 25).
This provides a second layer of protection against FTP bounce attacks, by preventing such
attacks from reaching well-known ports.

Using SmartDefense
Table 72: Block Known Ports Fields
Action Specify what action to take when the FTP server attempts to connect to a
well-known port, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the connection.

Block Port Overflow

FTP clients send PORT commands when connecting to the FTP sever. A PORT command
consists of a series of numbers between 0 and 255, separated by commas.
To enforce compliance to the FTP standard and prevent potential attacks against the FTP
server, you can block PORT commands that contain a number greater than 255.
Table 73: Block Port Overflow
Action Specify what action to take for PORT commands containing a number
greater than 255, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the PORT command. This is the default.


Using SmartDefense
Blocked FTP Commands

Some seldom-used FTP commands may compromise FTP server security and integrity.
You can specify which FTP commands should be allowed to pass through the security
server, and which should be blocked.
To enable FTP command blocking

• In the Action drop-down list, select Block.
The FTP commands listed in the Blocked commands box will be blocked.
FTP command blocking is enabled by default.
To disable FTP command blocking

• In the Action drop-down list, select None.
All FTP commands are allowed, including those in the Blocked commands box.
To block a specific FTP command

1. In the Allowed commands box, select the desired FTP command.
2. Click Block.
The FTP command appears in the Blocked commands box.
3. Click Apply.
When FTP command blocking is enabled, the FTP command will be blocked.

Using SmartDefense
To allow a specific FTP command

1. In the Blocked commands box, select the desired FTP command.
2. Click Accept.
The FTP command appears in the Allowed commands box.
3. Click Apply.
The FTP command will be allowed, regardless of whether FTP command blocking is
enabled or disabled.
HTTP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the HTTP protocol. It
• Header Rejection on page 349
• Worm Catcher on page 350
Header Rejection
Some exploits are carried in standard HTTP headers with custom values (for example, in
the Host header), or in custom HTTP headers. You can protect against such exploits by
rejecting HTTP requests that contain specific headers and header values.

Using SmartDefense
Table 74: Header Rejection Fields
Action Specify what action to take when an HTTP header-based exploit is

detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack.

Track Specify whether to log HTTP header-based exploits, by selecting one of

the following:
• Log. Log the attack.

• None. Do not log the attack. This is the default.
Select the HTTP header values to detect.
HTTP header values
list
Worm Catcher
A worm is a self-replicating malware (malicious software) that propagates by actively
sending itself to new machines. Some worms propagate by using security vulnerabilities in
the HTTP protocol.
You can specify how HTTP-based worm attacks should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 75: Worm Catcher Fields
Action Specify what action to take when an HTTP-based worm attack is

detected, by selecting one of the following:

Track Specify whether to log HTTP-based worm attacks, by selecting one of

the following:

Select the worm patterns to detect.
HTTP-based worm
patterns list
Microsoft Networks
This category includes File and Print Sharing.
Microsoft operating systems and Samba clients rely on Common Internet File System
(CIFS), a protocol for sharing files and printers. However, this protocol is also widely used
by worms as a means of propagation.
You can configure how CIFS worms should be handled.

Using SmartDefense
Table 76: File Print and Sharing Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a CIFS worm attack is detected, by

Track Specify whether to log CIFS worm attacks, by selecting one of the
following:

Select the worm patterns to detect.
CIFS worm patterns
list Patterns are matched against file names (including file paths but
excluding the disk share name) that the client is trying to read or
write from the server.

Using SmartDefense
IGMP
This category includes the IGMP protocol.
IGMP is used by hosts and routers to dynamically register and discover multicast group
membership. Attacks on the IGMP protocol usually target a vulnerability in the multicast
routing software/hardware used, by sending specially crafted IGMP packets.
You can configure how IGMP attacks should be handled.
Table 77: IGMP Fields
Action Specify what action to take when an IGMP attack occurs, by selecting

Track Specify whether to log IGMP attacks, by selecting one of the following:


Using SmartDefense
Enforce IGMP to According to the IGMP specification, IGMP packets must be sent to
multicast addresses multicast addresses. Sending IGMP packets to a unicast or broadcast
address might constitute and attack; therefore the VPN-1 Edge appliance
blocks such packets.
Specify whether to allow or block IGMP packets that are sent to non-
multicast addresses, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block IGMP packets that are sent to non-multicast

addresses. This is the default.
Peer-to-Peer
SmartDefense can block peer-to-peer traffic, by identifying the proprietary protocols and
preventing the initial connection to the peer-to-peer networks. This prevents not only
downloads, but also search operations.
This category includes the following nodes:
• BitTorrent
• eMule
• Gnutella
• KaZaA
• Winny
Note: SmartDefense can detect peer-to-peer traffic regardless of the TCP port being
used to initiate the session.

Using SmartDefense
In each node, you can configure how peer-to-peer connections of the selected type should
be handled, using the following table.
Table 78: Peer to Peer Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a connection is attempted, by selecting


Track Specify whether to log peer-to-peer connections, by selecting one of the

following:
• Log. Log the connection.

• None. Do not log the connection. This is the default.
Block proprietary Specify whether proprietary protocols should be blocked on all ports, by
protocols on all ports selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the proprietary protocol on all ports. This in effect

prevents all communication using this peer-to-peer
application. This is the default.
• None. Do not block the proprietary protocol on all ports.

Using SmartDefense
Block masquerading Specify whether to block using the peer-to-peer application over HTTP,
over HTTP protocol by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block using the application over HTTP. This is the

default.
• None. Do not block using the application over HTTP.
This field is not relevant for eMule and Winny.
Instant Messaging Traffic

SmartDefense can block instant messaging applications that use VoIP protocols, by
identifying the messaging application's fingerprints and HTTP headers.
This category includes the following nodes:
• ICQ
• Skype
• Yahoo

Using SmartDefense
Note: SmartDefense can detect instant messaging traffic regardless of the TCP port
being used to initiate the session.
Note: Note: Skype versions up to 2.0.0.103 are supported.
In each node, you can configure how instant messaging connections of the selected type
should be handled, using the following table.
Table 79: Instant Messengers Fields
Action Specify what action to take when a connection is attempted, by selecting


Track Specify whether to log instant messenger connections, by selecting one

of the following:
• Log. Log the connection.

• None. Do not log the connection. This is the default.

Using SmartDefense
Block proprietary Specify whether proprietary protocols should be blocked on all ports, by
protocols on all ports selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the proprietary protocol on all ports. This in effect

prevents all communication using this instant messenger
application. This is the default.
• None. Do not block the proprietary protocol on all ports.
Block masquerading Specify whether to block using the instant messenger application over
over HTTP protocol HTTP, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block using the application over HTTP. This is the

default.
• None. Do not block using the application over HTTP.
Resetting SmartDefense to its Defaults
If desired, you can reset the SmartDefense security policy to its default settings. For
information on the default value of each SmartDefense setting, see SmartDefense
Categories on page 321.
For information on resetting individual nodes in the SmartDefense tree to their default
settings, see Using the SmartDefense Tree on page 319.
To reset SmartDefense to its defaults

2. Click Reset to Defaults.
3. Click OK.
The SmartDefense policy is reset to its default settings.

Using Port-Based Security
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the IEEE 802.1x standard for secure RADIUS
authentication of users and devices that are directly attached to VPN-1 Edge appliance's
LAN and DMZ ports, as well as the wireless LAN.
When an 802.1x security scheme is implemented for a port, users attempting to connect to
that port are required to authenticate using their network user name and password. The
VPN-1 Edge appliance sends the user's credentials to the configured RADIUS server, and
if authentication succeeds, a connection is established. If the user fails to authenticate, the
port is physically isolated from other ports on the gateway.
If desired, you can specify how users should be handled after successful or failed
authentication. You can assign authenticated users to specific network segments, by
configuring dynamic VLAN assignment on the RADIUS server. Upon successful
authentication, the RADIUS server sends RADIUS option 81 [Tunnel-Private-Group-ID]
to the VPN-1 Edge appliance, indicating to which network segment the user should be
assigned. For example, if a member of the Accounting team connects to a network port and
attempts to log on, the VPN-1 Edge appliance relays the information to the RADIUS
server, which replies with RADIUS option 81 and the value “Accounting”. The appliance
then assigns the user’s port to the Accounting network, granting the user access to all the
resources of the Accounting team.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance also enables you to automatically assign users to a
“Quarantine” network when authentication fails. All Quarantine network security and
network rules will apply to those users. For example, you can create security rules
allowing users on the Quarantine network to access the Internet and blocking them from
accessing sensitive company resources. You can also configure Traffic Shaper to grant
members of the Quarantine network a lower amount of bandwidth than authorized users.

Configuring Port-Based Security
To configure 802.1x port-based security for a port

1. Configure RADIUS authentication on the appliance.
For instructions, see Using RADIUS Authentication on page 492.
2. Configure the clients for 802.1x authentication.
For information, refer to your RADIUS server documentation.
3. To configure dynamic VLAN assignment, do the following:
a. Add port-based VLAN networks as needed.
See Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs on page 165.
b. Configure RADIUS option 81 [Tunnel-Private-Group-ID] on the
RADIUS server.
For information, refer to your RADIUS server documentation.
4. To configure a Quarantine network other than the LAN or DMZ, add a port-
based VLAN network.
See Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs on page 165.


7. In the Assign to Network drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To configure dynamic VLAN assignment, select From RADIUS.

• To configure 802.1x security without dynamic VLAN assignment, select the
network to which users should be assigned upon successful authentication.
8. In the Port Security drop-down list, select 802.1x.
9. To configure a Quarantine network, in the Quarantine Network drop-down list,
select the network that should be the Quarantine network.
10. Click Apply.
11. Click OK.

Resetting 802.1x Locking
When 802.1x port-based security is configured for a LAN port, the first host that attempts
to connect to this port is “locked” to the port. In order to connect a different computer to
the port, you must first reset 802.1x locking.
To reset 802.1x locking on all ports

2. Click Reset 802.1x.
3. Click OK.
The 802.1x status of all ports is reset to "Unauthenticated".

Using Secure HotSpot
You can enable your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a public Internet access hotspot for specific
networks. When users on those networks attempt to access the Internet, they are
automatically re-directed to the My HotSpot page http://my.hotspot.
Note: You can configure Secure HotSpot to use HTTPS. In this case, the My
HotSpot page will be https://my.hotspot.
On this page, users must read and accept the My HotSpot terms of use, and if My HotSpot
is configured to be password-protected, they must log on using their VPN-1 Edge
username and password. The users may then access the Internet.
Users can also log out in the My HotSpot page.
Note: HotSpot users are automatically logged out after one hour of inactivity.
VPN-1 Edge Secure HotSpot is useful in any wired or wireless environment where Web-
based user authentication or terms-of-use approval is required prior to gaining access to the
network. For example, Secure HotSpot can be used in public computer labs, educational
institutions, libraries, Internet cafés, and so on.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you to add guest users quickly and easily. By default,
guest users are given a username and password that expire in 24 hours and granted
HotSpot Access permissions only. For information on adding quick guest users, see
Adding Quick Guest Users on page 489.
You can choose to exclude specific network objects from HotSpot enforcement. For
information, see Using Network Objects on page 170.
Important: SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN software users who are authenticated by

the Internal VPN Server are automatically exempt from HotSpot enforcement. This
allows, for example, authenticated employees to gain full access to the corporate
LAN, while guest users are permitted to access the Internet only.
Note: HotSpot enforcement can block traffic passing through the firewall; however, it
does not block local traffic on the same network segment (traffic that does not pass
through the firewall).
Setting Up Secure HotSpot
To set up Secure HotSpot

1. Enable Secure HotSpot for the desired networks.
See Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot on page 366.
2. Customize Secure HotSpot as desired.
See Customizing Secure HotSpot on page 367.
3. Grant HotSpot Access permissions to users on the selected networks.
See Adding and Editing Users on page 486.
4. To exclude specific computers from HotSpot enforcement, add or edit their
network objects.
See Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 171.
You must select Exclude this computer/network from HotSpot enforcement option.
5. Add quick guest users as needed.

See Adding Quick Guest Users on page 489.
Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot
To enable/disable Secure HotSpot

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the My HotSpot tab.
The My HotSpot page appears.

2. In the HotSpot Networks area, do one of the following:
• To enable Secure HotSpot for a specific network, select the check box next to
the network.
• To disable Secure HotSpot for a specific network, clear the check box next to
the network.
3. Click Apply.
Customizing Secure HotSpot
To customize Secure HotSpot

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the My HotSpot tab.
The My HotSpot page appears.

Additional fields may appear.
3. To preview the My HotSpot page, click Preview.

A browser window opens displaying the My HotSpot page.
4. Click Apply.
Your changes are saved.

Table 80: My HotSpot Fields
My HotSpot Type the title that should appear on the My HotSpot page.
Title
The default title is "Welcome to My HotSpot".
My HotSpot Type the terms to which the user must agree before accessing the Internet.
Terms
You can use HTML tags as needed.
My HotSpot is Select this option to require users to enter their username and password
password- before accessing the Internet.
protected
If this option is not selected, users will be required only to accept the terms of
use before accessing the network.
The Allow a user to login from more than one computer at the same time check box
appears.
Allow a user to Select this option to allow a single user to log on to My HotSpot from multiple
login from more computers at the same time.
than one
computer at the
same time
Use HTTPS Select this option to use HTTPS for Secure HotSpot.

Defining an Exposed Host
The VPN-1 Edge appliance allows you to define an exposed host, which is a computer that
is not protected by the firewall. This is useful for setting up a public server. It allows
unlimited incoming and outgoing connections between the Internet and the exposed host
computer.
The exposed host receives all traffic that was not forwarded to another computer by use of
Allow and Forward rules.
Warning: Entering an IP address may make the designated computer vulnerable to

hacker attacks. Defining an exposed host is not recommended unless you are fully
aware of the security risks.
To define a computer as an exposed host

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Exposed Host tab.
The Exposed Host page appears.
2. In the Exposed Host field, type the IP address of the computer you wish to
define as an exposed host.

Alternatively, you can click This Computer to define your computer as the exposed
host.
3. Click Apply.
The selected computer is now defined as an exposed host.
To clear the exposed host

1. Click Security in the main menu, and click the Exposed Host tab.
The Exposed Host page appears.
2. Click Clear.
3. Click Apply.
No exposed host is defined.

Overview
Chapter 12
Using VStream Antivirus

This chapter explains how to use the VStream Antivirus engine to block security threats
before they reach your network.
Overview ..................................................................................................373
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus....................................................375
Viewing VStream Signature Database Information .................................376
Configuring VStream Antivirus ...............................................................377
Updating VStream Antivirus ....................................................................390
Overview
The VPN-1 Edge appliance includes VStream Antivirus, an embedded stream-based
antivirus engine based on Check Point Stateful Inspection and Application Intelligence
technologies, that performs virus scanning at the kernel level.
VStream Antivirus scans files for malicious content on the fly, without downloading the
files into intermediate storage. This means minimal added latency and support for
unlimited file sizes; and since VStream Antivirus stores only minimal state information per
connection, it can scan thousands of connections concurrently. In order to scan archive
files on the fly, VStream Antivirus performs real-time decompression and scanning of ZIP,
TAR, and GZ archive files, with support for nested archive files.
When VStream Antivirus detects malicious content, the action it takes depends on the
protocol in which the virus was found. See the following table. In each case, VStream
Antivirus blocks the file and writes a log to the Event Log.
Chapter 12: Using VStream Antivirus 373

Overview
Table 81: VStream Antivirus Actions
If a virus if found in VStream Antivirus does this... The protocol is detected

this protocol... on this port...
HTTP • Terminates the All ports on which VStream is

connection
enabled by the policy, not
only port 80
POP3 • Terminates the The standard TCP port 110.

connection
• Deletes the virus-
infected email from the
server
IMAP • Terminates the The standard TCP port 143

connection
• Replaces the virus-
infected email with a
message notifying the
user that a virus was
found
SMTP • Rejects the virus- The standard TCP port 25

infected email with error
code 554
• Sends a "Virus
detected" message to
the sender
FTP • Terminates the data The standard TCP port 21

connection
• Sends a "Virus detected"
message to the FTP
client
TCP and UDP • Terminates the Generic TCP and UDP ports,
connection
other than those listed above
Note: In protocols that are not listed in this table, VStream Antivirus uses a "best
effort" approach to detect viruses. In such cases, detection of viruses is not
guaranteed and depends on the specific encoding used by the protocol.

Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus
If you are subscribed to the VStream Antivirus subscription service, VStream Antivirus
virus signatures are automatically updated, so that security is always up-to-date, and your
network is always protected.
Note: VStream Antivirus differs from the Email Antivirus subscription service (part of
the Email Filtering service) in the following ways:
• Email Antivirus is centralized, redirecting traffic through the Service

Center for scanning, while VStream Antivirus scans for viruses in the
VPN-1 Edge gateway itself.
• Email Antivirus is specific to email, scanning incoming POP3 and
outgoing SMTP connections only, while VStream Antivirus supports
additional protocols, including incoming SMTP and outgoing POP3
connections.
You can use either antivirus solution or both in conjunction. For information on
Email Antivirus, see Email Filtering on page 405.
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus
To enable/disable VStream Antivirus

1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Antivirus tab.

Viewing VStream Signature Database Information
The VStream Antivirus page appears.
2. Drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.

VStream Antivirus is enabled/disabled for all internal network computers.
Viewing VStream Signature Database Information
VStream Antivirus maintains two databases: a daily database and a main database. The
daily database is updated frequently with the newest virus signatures. Periodically, the
contents of the daily database are moved to the main database, leaving the daily database
empty. This system of incremental updates to the main database allows for quicker updates
and saves on network bandwidth.
You can view information about the VStream signature databases currently in use, in the
VStream Antivirus page.

Configuring VStream Antivirus
Table 82: VStream Antivirus Page Fields
Main database The date and time at which the main database was last updated,
followed by the version number.
Daily database The date and time at which the daily database was last updated, followed
by the version number.
Next update The next date and time at which the VPN-1 Edge appliance will check for
updates.
Status The current status of the database. This includes the following statuses:
• Database Not Installed

• OK

You can configure VStream Antivirus in the following ways:
• Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy on page 377
• Configuring VStream Advanced Settings on page 385
Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy
VStream Antivirus includes a flexible mechanism that allows the user to define exactly
which traffic should be scanned, by specifying the protocol, ports, and source and
destination IP addresses.
VStream Antivirus processes policy rules in the order they appear in the Antivirus Policy
table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to define
exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the Rules table.
For example, if you want to scan all outgoing SMTP traffic, except traffic from a specific
IP address, you can create a rule scanning all outgoing SMTP traffic and move the rule

down in the Antivirus Policy table. Then create a rule passing SMTP traffic from the
desired IP address and move this rule to a higher location in the Antivirus Policy table than
the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule number 2, and the exception is
rule number 1.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance will process rule 1 first, passing outgoing SMTP traffic from
the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, scanning all outgoing SMTP
traffic.
The following rule types exist:
Table 83: VStream Antivirus Rule Types
Rule Description
Pass This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antivirus should not scan
traffic matching the rule.
Scan This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antivirus should scan traffic
matching the rule.
If a virus is found, it is blocked and logged.

Adding and Editing VStream Antivirus Rules
To add or edit a VStream Antivirus rule

1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The Antivirus Policy page appears.
• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.

• To edit an existing rule, click the Edit icon next to the desired rule.

The VStream Policy Rule Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box
displayed.
3. Select the type of rule you want to create.

4. Click Next.
The Step 2: Service dialog box appears.
The example below shows a Scan rule.

6. Click Next.
The Step 3: Destination & Source dialog box appears.
8. Click Next.
The Step 4: Done dialog box appears.
9. Click Finish.
The new rule appears in the Firewall Rules page.

Table 84: VStream Rule Fields
Any Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to any service.
Standard Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific standard
Service service.
You must then select the desired service from the drop-down list.
Custom Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific non-
standard service.
The Protocol and Port Range fields are enabled. You must fill them in.
Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, or ANY) for which the rule should apply.
Ports To specify the port range to which the rule applies, type the start port
number in the left text box, and the end port number in the right text box.
Note: If you do not enter a port range, the rule will apply to all ports. If you
enter only one port number, the range will include only that port.
If the Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block.

connection
source is
in the field provided.

And the Select the destination of the connections you want to allow or block.
destination is
in the text box.
To specify the VPN-1 Edge Portal and network printers, select This Gateway.
To specify any destination except the VPN-1 Edge Portal and network
printers, select ANY.
Data Direction Select the direction of connections to which the rule should apply:
• Download and Upload data. The rule applies to downloaded and

uploaded data. This is the default.
• Download data. The rule applies to downloaded data, that is, data
flowing from the destination of the connection to the source of the
connection.
• Upload data. The rule applies to uploaded data, that is, data flowing
from the source of the connection to the destination of the
connection.

Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus Rules
You can temporarily disable a VStream Antivirus rule.
To enable/disable a VStream Antivirus rule

2. Next to the desired rule, do one of the following:
• To enable the rule, click .

The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click .
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.
Changing VStream Antivirus Rules' Priority
To change a VStream Antivirus rule's priority

• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule up in the table.
• Click next to the desired rule, to move the rule down in the table.
The rule's priority changes accordingly.

Deleting VStream Antivirus Rules
To delete an existing VStream Antivirus rule

2. Click the Erase icon of the rule you wish to delete.

3. Click OK.
The rule is deleted.
Configuring VStream Antivirus Advanced Settings
To configure VStream Antivirus advanced settings

1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Advanced tab.

The Advanced Antivirus Settings page appears.

3. Click Apply.
4. To restore the default VStream Antivirus settings, do the following:
a) Click Default.
b) Click OK.
The VStream Antivirus settings are reset to their defaults. For information on the
default values, refer to the following table.

Table 85: Advanced Antivirus Settings Fields
File Types
Block potentially unsafe Select this option to block all emails containing potentially unsafe
file types in email attachments.
messages
Unsafe file types are:
• DOS/Windows executables, libraries and drivers

• Compiled HTML Help files
• VBScript files
• Files with {CLSID} in their name
• The following file extensions: ade, adp, bas, bat, chm,
cmd,com, cpl, crt, exe, hlp, hta, inf, ins, isp, js, jse,
lnk, mdb, mde, msc, msi, msp, mst, pcd, pif, reg, scr,
sct, shs,shb, url, vb, vbe, vbs, wsc, wsf, wsh.
To view a list of unsafe file types and their descriptions, click

Show next to this option.

Pass safe file types Select this option to accept common file types that are known to
without scanning be safe, without scanning them.
Safe files types are:
• MPEG streams
• RIFF Ogg Stream
• MP3
• PDF
• PostScript
• WMA/WMV/ASF
• RealMedia
• JPEG - only the header is scanned, and the rest of
the file is skipped
To view a list of safe file types, click Show next to this option.
Selecting this option reduces the load on the gateway by skipping

safe file types. This option is selected by default.
Archive File Handling
Maximum Nesting Level Type the maximum number of nested content levels that
VStream Antivirus should scan.
Setting a higher number increases security. Setting a lower

number prevents attackers from overloading the gateway by
sending extremely nested archive files.
The default value is 5 levels.

Maximum Compression Fill in the field to complete the maximum compression ratio of
Ratio 1:x files that VStream Antivirus should scan.
For example, to specify a 1:150 maximum compression ratio,

type 150.
Setting a higher number allows the scanning of highly

compressed files, but creates a potential for highly compressible
files to create a heavy load on the appliance. Setting a lower
number prevents attackers from overloading the gateway by
sending extremely compressible files.
When archived file Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle files that exceed
exceeds limit or extraction the Maximum nesting level or the Maximum compression ratio, and
fails files for which scanning fails. Select one of the following:
• Pass file without scanning. Scan only the number of

levels specified, and skip the scanning of more deeply
nested archives. Furthermore, skip scanning highly
compressible files, and skip scanning archives that
cannot be extracted because they are corrupt. This is
the default.
• Block file. Block the file.
When a password-protected VStream Antivirus cannot extract and scan password-protected

file is found in archive files inside archives. Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle
such files, by selecting one of the following:
• Pass file without scanning. Accept the file without

scanning it. This is the default.
• Block file. Block the file.

Updating VStream Antivirus
Corrupt Files
When a corrupt file is Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle corrupt files and
found or decoding fails protocol anomalies, by selecting one of the following:
• Ignore and continue scanning. Log the corrupt file or

protocol anomaly, and scan the information on a best-
effort basis. This is the default.
• Block file. Block and log the corrupt file or protocol
anomaly.
When you are subscribed to the VStream Antivirus updates service, VStream Antivirus
virus signatures are automatically updated, keeping security up-to-date with no need for
user intervention. However, you can still check for updates manually, if needed.
To update the VStream Antivirus virus signature database

1. Click Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Antivirus tab.
The VStream Antivirus page appears.
2. Click Update Now.
The VStream Antivirus database is updated with the latest virus signatures.

Chapter 13
SMART Management and Subscription

Services
You can integrate all VPN-1 Edge appliances into an overall enterprise security policy for
maximum security. Check Point's Security Management Architecture (SMART) delivers a
single enterprise-wide security policy that you can centrally manage and automatically
deploy to an unlimited number of VPN-1 Edge gateways.
Alternatively, you can subscribe to security services available from select service
providers, including firewall security updates, Web filtering, and dynamic DNS. Business
users can use the VPN-1 Edge appliance to securely connect to the office network.
This chapter explains how to connect your appliance to SMART management or to
managed subscription services.
Note: Although some procedures in this chapter specifically

relate to managed security services, you can use these same
procedures to connect to and use SMART management.

Connecting to a Service Center ............................................................... 392
Viewing Services Information ................................................................. 397
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection........................................... 398
Configuring Your Account ...................................................................... 399
Disconnecting from Your Service Center................................................ 399
Web Filtering........................................................................................... 400
Email Filtering......................................................................................... 405
Automatic and Manual Updates .............................................................. 410
Chapter 13: SMART Management and Subscription Services 391

Connecting to a Service Center
To connect to a Service Center

1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The Account page appears.
2. In the Service Account area, click Connect.

The VPN-1 Edge Services Wizard opens, with the Service Center dialog box displayed.
3. Make sure the Connect to a Service Center check box is selected.

• To connect to the SofaWare Service Center, choose usercenter.sofaware.com.

• To specify a Service Center, choose Specified IP and then in the Specified IP
field, enter the desired Service Center’s IP address, as given to you by your
system administrator.
5. Click Next.
• The Connecting screen appears.

• If the Service Center requires authentication, the Service Center Login dialog
box appears.
Enter your gateway ID and registration key in the appropriate fields, as given to
you by your service provider, then click Next.
• The Connecting screen appears.
• The Confirmation dialog box appears with a list of services to which you are
subscribed.
6. Click Next.

The Done screen appears with a success message.
7. Click Finish.
The following things happen:
• If a new firmware is available, the VPN-1 Edge appliance may start

downloading it. This may take several minutes. Once the download is
complete, the VPN-1 Edge appliance restarts using the new firmware.
• The Welcome page appears.

• The services to which you are subscribed are now available on your VPN-1
Edge appliance and listed as such on the Account page. See Viewing Services
Information on page 397 for further information.
• The Services submenu includes the services to which you are subscribed.

Viewing Services Information
Viewing Services Information
The Account page displays the following information about your subscription.
Table 86: Account Page Fields
Service Center The name of the Service Center to which you are connected (if known).
Name
Gateway ID Your gateway ID.
Subscription will The date on which your subscription to services will end.
end on
Service The services available in your service plan.
Subscription The status of your subscription to each service:
• Subscribed
• Not Subscribed
Status The status of each service:
• Connected. You are connected to the service through the

Service Center.
• Connecting. Connecting to the Service Center.
• N/A. The service is not available.

Refreshing Your Service Center Connection
Information The mode to which each service is set.
If you are subscribed to Dynamic DNS, this field displays your gateway's
domain name.
For further information, see Web Filtering on page 400, Virus Scanning
on page 405, and Automatic and Manual Updates on page 410.
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection
This option restarts your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s connection to the Service Center and
refreshes your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s service settings.
To refresh your Service Center connection

2. In the Service Account area, click Refresh.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance reconnects to the Service Center.
Your service settings are refreshed.

Configuring Your Account
Configuring Your Account
This option allows you to access your Service Center's Web site, which may offer
additional configuration options for your account. Contact your Service Center for a user
ID and password.
To configure your account

2. In the Service Account area, click Configure.
Note: If no additional settings are available from your Service Center, this button will
not appear.
Your Service Center's Web site opens.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Disconnecting from Your Service Center
If desired, you can disconnect from your Service Center.
To disconnect from your Service Center

2. In the Service Account area, click Connect.
The VPN-1 Edge Services Wizard opens, with the first Subscription Services dialog box
displayed.
3. Clear the Connect to a Service Center check box.

Web Filtering
4. Click Next.
The Done screen appears with a success message.
5. Click Finish.
• You are disconnected from the Service Center.

• The services to which you were subscribed are no longer available on your
Web Filtering
When the Web Filtering service is enabled, access to Web content is restricted according to
the categories specified under Allow Categories. If a user attempts to access a blocked page,
the Access Denied window appears.
If desired, you can permit specific users to override Web Filtering. Such users will be able
to view Web pages without restriction, after they have provided an administrator password
via the Access Denied window. For information on granting Web Filtering override
permissions, see Adding and Editing Users on page 486.
In addition, you can choose to exclude specific network objects from Web Filtering
enforcement. Users connecting from these network objects will be able to view Web pages
without restriction, regardless of whether they have Web Filtering override permissions.
For information on configuring network objects, see Using Network Objects on page 170.
Note: Web Filtering is only available if you are connected to a Service Center and
subscribed to this service.

Web Filtering
Enabling/Disabling Web Filtering
Note: If you are remotely managed, contact your Service Center to change these
settings.
To enable/disable Web Filtering

1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The Web Filtering page appears.
2. Drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.

Web Filtering is enabled/disabled.

Web Filtering
Selecting Categories for Blocking
You can define which types of Web sites should be considered appropriate for your family
or office members, by selecting the categories. Categories marked with will remain
visible, while categories marked with will be blocked and will require the administrator
password for viewing.
settings.
To allow/block a category
2. In the Allow Categories area, click or next to the desired category.
Configuring Web Filtering Advanced Settings
settings.
To configure Web Filtering advanced settings

2. Next to the Bypass scanning if Service Center is unavailable option, specify
how the gateway should handle Web Filtering when the service is enabled and
the Service Center is unavailable, by doing do one of the following:
• To temporarily block all connections to the Internet, click .

Web Filtering
This ensures that users will not gain access to undesirable Web sites, even when
the Service Center is unavailable.
The button changes to .
• To temporarily allow all connections to the Internet, click .
This ensures continuous access to the Internet.
When the Service Center is available again, the gateway will enforce the configured
Web Filtering policy.
Temporarily Disabling Web Filtering
If desired, you can temporarily disable the Web Filtering service.
To temporarily disable Web Filtering

2. Click Snooze.
• Web Filtering is temporarily disabled for all internal network computers.

Web Filtering
• The Snooze button changes to Resume.
• The Web Filtering Off popup window opens.
3. To re-enable the service, click Resume, either in the popup window, or on the
Web Filtering page.
• The service is re-enabled for all internal network computers.

• If you clicked Resume in the Web Filtering page, the button changes to
Snooze.

Email Filtering
• If you clicked Resume in the Web Filtering Off popup window, the popup
window closes.
Email Filtering
There are two Email Filtering services:
• Email Antivirus
When the Email Antivirus service is enabled, your email is automatically scanned for
the detection and elimination of all known viruses and vandals. If a virus is detected, it
is removed and replaced with a warning message.
Note: The Email Antivirus subscription service differs from VStream Antivirus in the
following ways:
• Email Antivirus is centralized, redirecting traffic through the Service

Center for scanning, while VStream Antivirus scans for viruses in the
VPN-1 Edge gateway itself.
• Email Antivirus is specific to email, scanning incoming POP3 and
outgoing SMTP connections only, while VStream Antivirus supports
additional protocols, including incoming SMTP and outgoing POP3
connections.
You can use either antivirus solution or both in conjunction. For information on
VStream Antivirus, see Using VStream Antivirus on page 373.
• Email Antispam
When the Email Antispam service is enabled, your email is automatically scanned for
the detection of spam. If spam is detected, the email’s Subject line is modified to
indicate that it is suspected spam. You can create rules to divert such messages to a
special folder.
Note: Email Filtering services are only available if you are connected to a Service
Center and subscribed to the services.

Email Filtering
Enabling/Disabling Email Filtering
settings.
To enable/disable Email Filtering

1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The Email Filtering page appears.
2. Next to Email Antivirus, drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.

Email Antivirus is enabled/disabled.

Email Filtering
Selecting Protocols for Scanning
If you are locally managed, you can define which protocols should be scanned for viruses
and spam:
• Email retrieving (POP3). If enabled, all incoming email in the POP3 protocol will
be scanned.
• Email sending (SMTP). If enabled, all outgoing email will be scanned.
Protocols marked with will be scanned, while those marked with will not.
settings.
To enable virus and spam scanning for a protocol

2. In the Options area, click or next to the desired protocol.
Configuring Email Filtering Advanced Settings
settings.
To configure Email Filtering advanced settings


Email Filtering
2. Next to the Bypass scanning if Service Center is unavailable option, specify

how the gateway should handle Email Filtering when the service is enabled
and the Service Center is unavailable, by doing do one of the following:
• To temporarily block all email traffic, click .

This ensures constant protection from spam and viruses.
• To temporarily allow all email traffic, click .
This ensures continuous access to email; however, it does not protect against
viruses and spam, so use this option cautiously.
When the Service Center is available again, the gateway will enforce the configured
Email Filtering policy.
Temporarily Disabling Email Filtering
If you are having problems sending or receiving email you can temporarily disable the
Email Filtering services.
To temporarily disable Email Filtering

2. Click Snooze.
• Email Antivirus and Email Antispam are temporarily disabled for all internal
network computers.

Email Filtering
• The Snooze button changes to Resume.
• The Email Filtering Off popup window opens.
3. To re-enable Email Antivirus and Email Antispam, click Resume, either in the
popup window, or on the Email Filtering page.
• The services are re-enabled for all internal network computers.

• If you clicked Resume in the Email Filtering page, the button changes to
Snooze.
• If you clicked Resume in the Email Filtering Off popup window, the popup
window closes.

Automatic and Manual Updates

The Software Updates service enables you to check for new security and software updates.
Note: Software Updates are only available if you are connected to a Service Center
and subscribed to this service.
Checking for Software Updates when Locally Managed
If your VPN-1 Edge appliance is locally managed, you can set it to automatically check for
software updates, or you can set it so that software updates must be checked for manually.
To configure software updates when locally managed

1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Software Updates tab.
The Software Updates page appears.
2. To set the VPN-1 Edge appliance to automatically check for and install new
software updates, drag the Automatic/Manual lever upwards.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance checks for new updates and installs them according to its
schedule.
Note: When the Software Updates service is set to Automatic, you can still manually
check for updates.
3. To set the VPN-1 Edge appliance so that software updates must be checked for
manually, drag the Automatic/Manual lever downwards.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance does not check for software updates automatically.
4. To manually check for software updates, click Update Now.
The system checks for new updates and installs them.
Checking for Software Updates when Remotely Managed
If your VPN-1 Edge appliance is remotely managed, it automatically checks for software
updates and installs them without user intervention. However, you can still check for
updates manually, if needed.
To manually check for security and software updates

1. Click Services in the main menu, and click the Software Updates tab.

The Software Updates page appears.
2. Click Update Now.

The system checks for new updates and installs them.

Chapter 14
Working with VPNs

This chapter describes how to use your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a Remote Access VPN
Client, VPN server, or VPN gateway.
Note: For maximum security, you can integrate all
VPN-1 Edge appliances into an overall enterprise
security policy. Check Point's Security Management
Architecture (SMART) delivers a single enterprise-
wide security policy that you can centrally manage and
automatically deploy to an unlimited number of VPN-1
Edge gateways.
This chapter does not discuss creating and managing
VPNs using SMART management tools. For more
information on connecting and managing VPNs using
SMART management tools, refer to your SmartCenter
documentation.
Note: To connect an appliance to a Check Point
SMART management server, you must connect the
appliance to the Service Center using the Services page
Connect tab.
Overview ................................................................................................. 414
Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server..................... 420
Adding and Editing VPN Sites ............................................................... 433
Deleting a VPN Site ................................................................................ 464
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site ............................................................... 465
Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site .............................................. 466
Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site.................................................. 470
Installing a Certificate.............................................................................. 470
Uninstalling a Certificate......................................................................... 477
Viewing VPN Tunnels............................................................................. 478
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections............................................. 481
Chapter 14: Working with VPNs 413

Overview
Overview
You can configure your VPN-1 Edge appliance as part of a virtual private network (VPN).
A VPN is a private data network consisting of a group of gateways that can securely
connect to each other. Each member of the VPN is called a VPN site, and a connection
between two VPN sites is called a VPN tunnel. VPN tunnels encrypt and authenticate all
traffic passing through them. Through these tunnels, employees can safely use their
company’s network resources when working at home. For example, they can securely read
email, use the company’s intranet, or access the company’s database from home.
The are four types of VPN sites:
• SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server. Makes a network remotely available to
authorized users who connect to the Remote Access VPN Server using the
Check Point SecuRemote VPN Client (provided for free with your VPN-1 Edge)
or another VPN-1 Edge.
• SecuRemote Internal VPN Server. SecuRemote can also be used from your
internal networks, allowing you to secure your wired or wireless network with
strong encryption and authentication.
• L2TP VPN Server. Makes a network available to authorized users who connect
from the Internet or from your internal networks using an L2TP client such as
the Microsoft L2TP IPSec VPN Client.
• Site-to-Site VPN Gateway. Can connect with another Site-to-Site VPN Gateway in
a permanent, bi-directional relationship.
• Remote Access VPN Client. Can connect to a Remote Access VPN Server, but
other VPN sites cannot initiate a connection to the Remote Access VPN Client.
Defining a Remote Access VPN Client is a hardware alternative to using
SecuRemote software.
All VPN-1 Edge models provide VPN functionality. The VPN-1 Edge appliance can act as
a Remote Access VPN Client, a VPN Server, or a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway.
A virtual private network (VPN) must include at least one Remote Access VPN Server or
gateway. The type of VPN sites you include in a VPN depends on the type of VPN you
want to create, Site-to-Site or Remote Access.

Overview
Note: A locally managed VPN Server or gateway must have a static IP address. If
you need a VPN Server or gateway with a dynamic IP address, you must use
either Check Point SMART management or SofaWare Security Management
Portal (SMP) management.
A SecuRemote/SecureClient or VPN-1 Edge Remote Access VPN Client can

have a dynamic IP address, regardless of whether it is locally or remotely
managed.
Note: This chapter explains how to define a VPN locally. However, if your
appliance is centrally managed by a Service Center, then the Service Center can
automatically deploy VPN configuration for your appliance.

Overview
Site-to-Site VPNs
A Site-to-Site VPN consists of two or more Site-to-Site VPN Gateways that can
communicate with each other in a bi-directional relationship. The connected networks
function as a single network. You can use this type of VPN to mesh office branches into
one corporate network.
Figure 28: Site-to-Site VPN

Overview
To create a Site-to-Site VPN with two VPN sites

1. On the first VPN site’s VPN-1 Edge appliance, do the following:
a. Define the second VPN site as a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway, using the
procedure Adding and Editing VPN Sites on page 433.
b. Enable a Remote Access VPN Server using the procedure Setting Up
Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server on page 420.
2. On the second VPN site’s VPN-1 Edge appliance, do the following:
a. Define the first VPN site as a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway, using the
procedure Adding and Editing on page 433 VPN Sites .
b. Enable a Remote Access VPN Server using the procedure Setting Up
Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server on page 420.
Note: You can manually configure each VPN site's internal encryption domain via
the CLI. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.

Overview
Remote Access VPNs

A Remote Access VPN consists of one Remote Access VPN Server or Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway, and one or more Remote Access VPN Clients. You can use this type of VPN to
make an office network remotely available to authorized users, such as employees working
from home, who connect to the office Remote Access VPN Server with their Remote
Access VPN Clients.
Figure 29: Remote Access VPN

Overview
To create a Remote Access VPN with two VPN sites

1. On the remote user VPN site's VPN-1 Edge appliance, add the office Remote
Access VPN Server as a Remote Access VPN site.
See Adding and Editing VPN Sites on page 433.
The remote user's VPN-1 Edge appliance will act as a Remote Access VPN Client.
2. On the office VPN site's VPN-1 Edge appliance, enable a Remote Access
VPN Server.
See Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server on page 420.
Internal VPN Server

You can use your VPN-1 Edge appliance as an internal VPN Server, for enhanced wired
and wireless security. When an internal VPN Server is enabled, internal network PCs and
PDAs with the appropriate software installed can establish a Remote Access VPN session
to the gateway. This means that connections from internal network users to the gateway
can be encrypted and authenticated.
The benefits of using an internal VPN Server are two-fold:
• Accessibility
Using SecuRemote/SecureClient or L2TP, you can enjoy a secure connection from
anywhere—in your wireless network or on the road—without changing any settings.
The standard is completely transparent and allows you to access company resources
the same way, whether you are sitting at your desk or anywhere else.
• Security
Many of today's attacks are increasingly introduced from inside the network. Internal
security threats cause outages, downtime, and lost revenue. Wired networks that deal
with highly sensitive information—especially networks in public places, such as
classrooms—are vulnerable to users trying to hack the internal network.
Using an internal VPN Server, along with a strict security policy for non-VPN users,
can enhance security both for wired networks and for wireless networks, which are
particularly vulnerable to security breaches.
For information on setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance as an internal VPN Server, see
Configuring the Internal VPN Server on page 424.

Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN Server
Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge Appliance as a VPN

Server
You can make your network available to authorized users connecting from the Internet or
from your internal networks, by setting up your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a VPN Server.
When the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server or SecuRemote Internal VPN Server is
enabled, users can connect to the server via Check Point SecuRemote/SecureClient or via a
VPN-1 Edge appliance in Remote Access VPN mode. When the L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling
Protocol) VPN Server is enabled, users can connect to the server using an L2TP client such
as the Microsoft Windows L2TP IPSEC VPN Client. L2TP users are automatically
assigned to the OfficeMode network, enabling you to configure special security rules for
them.
SecuRemote/SecureClient supports split tunneling, which means that VPN Clients can
connect directly to the Internet, while traffic to and from VPN sites passes through the
VPN Server. In contrast, the L2TP VPN Client does not support split tunneling, meaning
that all Internet traffic to and from a VPN Client passes through the VPN Server and is
routed to the Internet.
Enabling the VPN-1 Edge VPN Server for users connecting from your internal networks
adds a layer of security to such connections. For example, while you could create a firewall
rule allowing a specific user on the DMZ to access the LAN, enabling VPN access for the
user means that such connections can be encrypted and authenticated. For more
information, see Internal VPN Server on page 419.

To set up your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a VPN Server

1. Configure the VPN Server in one or more of the following ways:
• To accept SecuRemote/SecureClient or VPN-1 Edge remote access

connections from the Internet.
See Configuring the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server on page 422.
• To accept SecuRemote/SecureClient connections from your internal networks.
See Configuring the Internal VPN Server on page 424.
• To accept L2TP remote access connections from the Internet, as well L2TP
connections from your internal networks.
See Configuring the L2TP VPN Server on page 425.
2. If you configured the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server, install
SecuRemote/SecureClient on the desired internal network computers.
See Installing SecuRemote on page 426.
3. If you configured the L2TP VPN Server, do the following:
a. Configure the OfficeMode network.
See Configuring the OfficeMode Network on page 159.
All users connecting via L2TP will be assigned to the OfficeMode network.
b. Configure L2TP VPN Clients on the desired internal network computers.
See Configuring L2TP VPN Clients on page 427.
4. Set up remote VPN access for users.
See Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 492.
Note: Disabling the VPN Server for a specific type of connection (from
SecuRemote/SecureClient clients on the Internet, from SecuRemote/SecureClient
clients on internal networks, or from L2TP clients) will cause all existing VPN
tunnels of that type to disconnect.

Configuring the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server
To configure the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server

1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The VPN Server page appears.
2. Select the Allow SecuRemote users to connect from the Internet check box.

New check boxes appear.
3. To allow authenticated users connecting from the Internet to bypass NAT

when connecting to your internal network, select the Bypass NAT check box.
4. To allow authenticated users connecting from the Internet to bypass the default
firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction, select the
Bypass default firewall policy check box.
User-defined rules will still apply to the authenticated users.
5. Click Apply.
The SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection
types.

Configuring the Internal VPN Server
To configure the internal VPN Server

The SecuRemote VPN Server page appears.
2. Select the Allow SecuRemote users to connect from my internal networks check
box.
3. To allow authenticated users connecting from internal networks to bypass the

default firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction,
select the Bypass default firewall policy check box.
Note: Bypass NAT is always enabled for the internal VPN Server, and cannot be
disabled.

4. Click Apply.
The internal VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.
Configuring the L2TP VPN Server
To configure the L2TP VPN Server

2. Select the Allow L2TP clients to connect check box.
3. In the Preshared Secret field, type the preshared secret to use for secure
communications between the L2TP clients and the VPN Server.
The secret can contain spaces and special characters. It is used to secure L2TP
connections for all users.

In addition to entering this secret, each L2TP user will have to authenticate with a
username and password.
For information on defining users with VPN access permissions, see Setting Up
Remote VPN Access for Users on page 492.
4. To allow authenticated users to bypass the default firewall policy and access
your internal network without restriction, select the Bypass default firewall
policy check box.
5. Click Apply.
The L2TP VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.
Installing SecuRemote
If you configured the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server, you must install the
SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN Client on all internal network computers that should be
allowed to remotely access your network via SecuRemote connections.
To install SecureClient/SecuRemote
2. Click the Download link.
The VPN-1 SecuRemote for VPN-1 Edge page opens in a new window.
3. Follow the online instructions to complete installation.
SecureClient/SecuRemote is installed.
For information on using SecureClient/SecuRemote, see the User Help. To access
SecureClient/SecuRemote User Help, right-click on the VPN Client icon in the
taskbar, select Settings, and then click Help.

Configuring L2TP VPN Clients
If you configured the L2TP VPN Server, you must configure the L2TP VPN Client on all
computers that should be allowed to remotely access your network via L2TP connections.
This procedure is relevant for computers with a Windows XP operating system.
Note: The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the following authentication methods:
• PAP. For both local users and RADIUS users

• EAP-MD5, CHAP. For local users, but not for RADIUS users
To configure L2TP VPN Clients on Microsoft Windows

The Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.
3. Click File > New Connection.
The New Connection Wizard opens displaying the Welcome to the New Connection
Wizard screen.
4. Click Next.

The Network Connection Type dialog box appears.
5. Choose Connect to the network at my workplace.

6. Click Next.
7. The Network Connection dialog box appears.
8. Choose Virtual Private Network connection.

9. Click Next.

The Connection Name dialog box appears.
10. In the Company Name field, type your company's name.

11. Click Next.
The Public Network dialog box appears.
12. Choose Do not dial the initial connection.

13. Click Next.

The VPN Server Selection dialog box appears.
14. In the field, type the VPN-1 Edge appliance's IP address.

The Completing the New Connection Wizard screen appears.
15. Click Finish.

16. In the Network and Dial-up Connections window, right-click on the L2TP
connection, and click Properties in the popup menu.
The connection's Properties dialog box opens.

17. In the Security tab, choose Advanced (custom settings).
18. Click Settings.

The Advanced Security Settings dialog box opens.
19. In the Data encryption drop-down list, select Optional encryption.

20. Choose Allow these protocols.
21. Select the Unencrypted password (PAP) check box, and clear all other check
boxes.
22. Click OK.
23. In Properties dialog box's Security tab, click IPSec Settings.

The IPSec Settings dialog box opens.
24. Select the Use pre-shared key for authentication check box.
25. In the Key field, type the preshared secret you configured on the L2TP VPN
Server.
26. Click OK.
27. In Properties dialog box, click the Networking tab.
28. In the Type of VPN drop-down list, select L2TP IPSec VPN.
29. Click OK.

Adding and Editing VPN Sites
To add or edit VPN sites

1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The VPN Sites page appears with a list of VPN sites.
• To add a VPN site, click New Site.

• To edit a VPN site, click Edit in the desired VPN site’s row.

The VPN-1 Edge VPN Site Wizard opens, with the Welcome to the VPN Site Wizard
• Select Remote Access VPN to establish remote access from your Remote
Access VPN Client to a Remote Access VPN Server.
• Select Site-to-Site VPN to create a permanent bi-directional connection to
another Site-to-Site VPN Gateway.
4. Click Next.

Configuring a Remote Access VPN Site

If you selected Remote Access VPN, the VPN Gateway Address dialog box appears.
1. Enter the IP address of the Remote Access VPN Server to which you want to
connect, as given to you by the network administrator.
2. To allow the VPN site to bypass the default firewall policy and access your
internal network without restriction, select the Bypass default firewall policy
check box.
User-defined rules will still apply to the VPN site.
3. Click Next.

The VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.
4. Specify how you want to obtain the VPN network configuration. Refer to VPN
Network Configuration Fields on page 444.
5. Click Next.
• If you chose Specify Configuration, a second VPN Network Configuration dialog

box appears.

Complete the fields using the information in VPN Network Configuration Fields
on page 444 and click Next.
• The Authentication Method dialog box appears.
6. Complete the fields using the information in Authentication Methods Fields

on page 446.
7. Click Next.

Username and Password Authentication Method

If you selected Username and Password, the VPN Login dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Login Fields on page 447.
2. Click Next.
• If you selected Automatic Login, the Connect dialog box appears.
Do the following:

1) To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the Try to
Connect to the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.
Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all
existing tunnels to this site will be terminated.
2) Click Next.
If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen
appears, and then the Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
• The Site Name dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the VPN site.

You may choose any name.
4. Click Next.

The VPN Site Created screen appears.
5. Click Finish.
The VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in the
VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the VPN
Sites list.

Certificate Authentication Method

If you selected Certificate, the Connect dialog box appears.
1. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the Try to Connect
to the VPN Gateway check box.
2. Click Next.
If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen appears,
and then the Contacting VPN Site screen appears.

The Site Name dialog box appears.

4. Click Next.
5. Click Finish.

Sites list.
RSA SecurID Authentication Method

If you selected RSA SecurID, the Site Name dialog box appears.

2. Click Next.

3. Click Finish.
Sites list.
Table 87: VPN Network Configuration Fields
Download Click this option to obtain the network configuration by downloading it from
Configuration the VPN site.
This option will automatically configure your VPN settings, by downloading

the network topology definition from the Remote Access VPN Server.
Note: Downloading the network configuration is only possible if you are

connecting to a Check Point VPN-1 or VPN-1 Edge Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway.

Specify Click this option to provide the network configuration manually.

Configuration
Route All Traffic Click this option to route all network traffic through the VPN site.
For example, if your VPN consists of a central office and a number of

remote offices, and the remote offices are only allowed to access Internet
resources through the central office, you can choose to route all traffic from
the remote offices through the central office.
Note: You can only configure one VPN site to route all traffic.
Route Based VPN Click this option to create a virtual tunnel interface (VTI) for this site, so
that it can participate in a route-based VPN.
Route-based VPNs allow routing connections over VPN tunnels, so that

remote VPN sites can participate in dynamic or static routing schemes.
This improves network and VPN management efficiency for large
networks.
For constantly changing networks, it is recommended to use a route-based

VPN combined with OSPF dynamic routing. This enables you to make
frequent changes to the network topology, such as adding an internal
network, without having to reconfigure static routes.
OSPF is enabled using CLI. For information on using CLI, see Controlling
the Appliance via the Command Line on page 522. For information on
the relevant commands for OSPF, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.
This option is only available for when configuring a Site-to-Site VPN

gateway.

Destination network Type up to three destination network addresses at the VPN site to which
you want to connect.
Subnet mask Select the subnet masks for the destination network addresses.
Note: Obtain the destination networks and subnet masks from the VPN
site’s system administrator.
Backup Gateway Type the name of the VPN site to use if the primary VPN site fails.
Table 88: Authentication Methods Fields
Username and Select this option to use a user name and password for VPN
Password authentication.
In the next step, you can specify whether you want to log on to the VPN
site automatically or manually.
Certificate Select this option to use a certificate for VPN authentication.
If you select this option, a certificate must have been installed. (Refer to
Installing a Certificate on page 470 for more information about
certificates and instructions on how to install a certificate.)
RSA SecurID Select this option to use an RSA SecurID token for VPN authentication.
Token
When authenticating to the VPN site, you must enter a four-digit PIN code
and the SecurID passcode shown in your SecurID token's display. The
RSA SecurID token generates a new passcode every minute.
SecurID is only supported in Remote Access manual login mode.

Table 89: VPN Login Fields
Manual Login Click this option to configure the site for Manual Login.
Manual Login connects only the computer you are currently logged onto to
the VPN site, and only when the appropriate user name and password
have been entered. For further information on Automatic and Manual
Login, see, Logging on to a VPN Site on page 466.
Automatic Login Click this option to enable the VPN-1 Edge appliance to log on to the VPN
site automatically.
You must then fill in the Username and Password fields.
Automatic Login provides all the computers on your internal network with
constant access to the VPN site. For further information on Automatic and
Manual Login, see Logging on to a VPN Site on page 466.
Username Type the user name to be used for logging on to the VPN site.
Password Type the password to be used for logging on to the VPN site.

Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway

If you selected Site-to-Site VPN, the VPN Gateway Address dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Gateway Address Fields on
page 460.
2. Click Next.
The VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.

3. Specify how you want to obtain the VPN network configuration. Refer to VPN
Network Configuration Fields on page 444.
4. Click Next.
• If you chose Specify Configuration, a second VPN Network Configuration dialog

box appears.
Complete the fields using the information in VPN Network Configuration Fields
on page 444, and then click Next.
• If you chose Route Based VPN, the Route Based VPN dialog box appears.

Complete the fields using the information in Route Based VPN Fields on page
460, and then click Next.
• The Authentication Method dialog box appears.
5. Complete the fields using the information in Authentication Methods Fields

on page 461.
6. Click Next.

Shared Secret Authentication Method

If you selected Shared Secret, the Authentication dialog box appears.
If you chose Download Configuration, the dialog box contains additional fields.
1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Authentication Fields on

page 461 and click Next.

The Security Methods dialog box appears.
2. To configure advanced security settings, click Show Advanced Settings.

New fields appear.
3. Complete the fields using the information in Security Methods Fields on page
462 and click Next.

The Connect dialog box appears.
5. Click Next.
• If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen
appears, and then the Contacting VPN Site screen appears.

6. Type a name for the VPN site.

7. To keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive even if there is no network traffic
between the VPN-1 Edge appliance and the VPN site, select Keep this site
alive.
8. Click Next.

• If you selected Keep this site alive, and previously you chose Download
Configuration, the "Keep Alive" Configuration dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1) Type up to three IP addresses which the VPN-1 Edge appliance
should ping in order to keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive.
2) Click Next.
• The VPN Site Created screen appears.
9. Click Finish.
Sites list.

Certificate Authentication Method

If you selected Certificate, the following things happen:
• If you chose Download Configuration, the Authentication dialog box appears.
Complete the fields using the information in VPN Authentication Fields on page
461 and click Next.
• The Security Methods dialog box appears.
1. To configure advanced security settings, click Show Advanced Settings.

New fields appear.
2. Complete the fields using the information in Security Methods Fields on page
462 and click Next.
The Connect dialog box appears.

4. Click Next.
• If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the following things
happen:
• The Contacting VPN Site screen appears.

6. To keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive even if there is no network traffic
between the VPN-1 Edge appliance and the VPN site, select Keep this site
alive.
7. Click Next.

• If you selected Keep this site alive, and previously you chose Download
Configuration, the "Keep Alive" Configuration dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1) Type up to three IP addresses which the VPN-1 Edge appliance
should ping in order to keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive.
2) Click Next.
• The VPN Site Created screen appears.
8. Click Finish.
Sites list.

Table 90: VPN Gateway Address Fields
Gateway Address Type the IP address of the Site-to-Site VPN Gateway to which you want
to connect, as given to you by the network administrator.
Bypass NAT Select this option to allow the VPN site to bypass NAT when connecting
to your internal network.
This option is selected by default.
Bypass default Select this option to allow the VPN site to bypass the default firewall
firewall policy policy and access your internal network without restriction.
User-defined rules will still apply to the VPN site.
Table 91: Route Based VPN Fields
Tunnel Local IP Type a local IP address for this end of the VPN tunnel.
Tunnel Remote IP Type the IP address of the remote end of the VPN tunnel.
OSPF Cost Type the cost of this link for dynamic routing purposes.
If OSPF is not enabled, this setting is not used. OSPF is enabled using
the VPN-1 Edge command line interface (CLI). For information on using
CLI, see Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line on page
522. For information on the relevant commands for OSPF, refer to the
Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.

Table 92: Authentication Methods Fields
Shared Secret Select this option to use a shared secret for VPN authentication.
A shared secret is a string used to identify VPN sites to each other.
Certificate Select this option to use a certificate for VPN authentication.
If you select this option, a certificate must have been installed. (Refer to
Installing a Certificate on page 470 for more information about
certificates and instructions on how to install a certificate.)
Table 93: VPN Authentication Fields
Topology User Type the topology user’s user name.
Topology Type the topology user’s password.

Password
Use Shared Type the shared secret to use for secure communications with the VPN
Secret site.
This shared secret is a string used to identify the VPN sites to each other.
The secret can contain spaces and special characters.

Table 94: Security Methods Fields
Phase 1
Security Methods Select the encryption and integrity algorithm to use for IKE negotiations:
• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects

the best security methods supported by the site. This is the
default.
• A specific algorithm
Diffie-Hellman Select the Diffie-Hellman group to use:

group
group. This is the default.
• A specific group
A group with more bits ensures a stronger key but lowers performance.
Renegotiate every Type the interval in minutes between IKE Phase-1 key negotiations. This
is the IKE Phase-1 SA lifetime.
A shorter interval ensures higher security, but impacts heavily on

performance. Therefore, it is recommended to keep the SA lifetime
around its default value.
The default value is 1440 minutes (one day).
Phase 2
Security Methods Select the encryption and integrity algorithm to use for VPN traffic:
• Automatic. The VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically selects

the best security methods supported by the site. This is the
default.
• A specific algorithm

Perfect Forward Specify whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), by selecting
Secrecy one of the following:
• Enabled. PFS is enabled. The Diffie-Hellman group field is

enabled.
• Disabled. PFS is disabled. This is the default.
Enabling PFS will generate a new Diffie-Hellman key during IKE Phase 2
and renew the key for each key exchange.
PFS increases security but lowers performance. It is recommended to

enable PFS only in situations where extreme security is required.
Diffie-Hellman Select the Diffie-Hellman group to use:

group
group. This is the default.
• A specific group
A group with more bits ensures a stronger key but lowers performance.
Renegotiate every Type the interval in seconds between IPSec SA key negotiations. This is
the IKE Phase-2 SA lifetime.
A shorter interval ensures higher security.
The default value is 3600 seconds (one hour).

Deleting a VPN Site
Deleting a VPN Site
To delete a VPN site

The VPN Sites page appears, with a list of VPN sites.
2. In the desired VPN site’s row, click the Erase icon.

3. Click OK.
The VPN site is deleted.

Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site
You can only connect to VPN sites that are enabled.
To enable/disable a VPN site

The VPN Sites page appears, with a list of VPN sites.
2. To enable a VPN site, do the following:
a. Click the icon in the desired VPN site’s row.
b. Click OK.
The icon changes to , and the VPN site is enabled.
3. To disable a VPN site, do the following:
Note: Disabling a VPN site eliminates the tunnel and erases the network topology.
a. Click the icon in the desired VPN site’s row.

b. Click OK.
The icon changes to , and the VPN site is disabled.

Logging on to a Remote Access VPN Site
You need to manually log on to Remote Access VPN Servers configured for Manual
Login. You do not need to manually log on to a Remote Access VPN Server configured for
Automatic Login or a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway: all the computers on your network have
constant access to it.
Manual Login can be done through either the VPN-1 Edge Portal or the my.vpn page.
When you log on and traffic is sent to the VPN site, a VPN tunnel is established. Only the
computer from which you logged on can use the tunnel. To share the tunnel with other
computers in your home network, you must log on to the VPN site from those computers,
using the same user name and password.
Note: You must use a single user name and password for each VPN destination
gateway.

Logging on through the VPN-1 Edge Portal
Note: You can only login to sites that are configured for Manual Login.
To manually log on to a VPN site through the VPN-1 Edge Portal

1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Login tab.
The VPN Login page appears.
2. From the Site Name list, select the site to which you want to log on.
Note: Disabled VPN sites will not appear in the Site Name list.
3. Type your user name and password in the appropriate fields.

4. Click Login.

• If the VPN-1 Edge appliance is configured to automatically download the

network configuration, the VPN-1 Edge appliance downloads the network
configuration.
• If when adding the VPN site you specified a network configuration, the VPN-
1 Edge appliance attempts to create a tunnel to the VPN site.
• Once the VPN-1 Edge appliance has finished connecting, the VPN Login
Status box appears. The Status field displays “Connected”.
• The VPN Login Status box remains open until you manually log off the VPN
site.
Logging on through the my.vpn page
Note: You don’t need to know the my.firewall page administrator’s password in order
to use the my.vpn page.
To manually log on to a VPN site through the my.vpn page

1. Direct your Web browser to http://my.vpn

The VPN Login screen appears.
2. In the Site Name list, select the site to which you want to log on.
3. Enter your user name and password in the appropriate fields.
4. Click Login.
• If the VPN-1 Edge appliance is configured to automatically download the

network configuration, the VPN-1 Edge appliance downloads the network
configuration.
• If when adding the VPN site you specified a network configuration, the VPN-
1 Edge appliance attempts to create a tunnel to the VPN site.
• The VPN Login Status box appears. The Status field tracks the connection’s
progress.
• Once the VPN-1 Edge appliance has finished connecting, the Status field
changes to “Connected”.
• The VPN Login Status box remains open until you manually log off of the
VPN site.

Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site
Logging off a Remote Access VPN Site
You need to manually log off a VPN site, if it is a Remote Access VPN site configured for
Manual Login.
To log off a VPN site

• In the VPN Login Status box, click Logout.
All open tunnels from the VPN-1 Edge appliance to the VPN site are closed, and the
VPN Login Status box closes.
Note: Closing the browser or dismissing the VPN Login Status box will also terminate
the VPN session within a short time.
Installing a Certificate
A digital certificate is a secure means of authenticating the VPN-1 Edge appliance to other
Site-to-Site VPN Gateways. The certificate is issued by the Certificate Authority (CA) to
entities such as gateways, users, or computers. The entity then uses the certificate to
identify itself and provide verifiable information.
For instance, the certificate includes the Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying
information) of the entity, as well as the public key (information about itself). After two
entities exchange and validate each other's certificates, they can begin encrypting
information between themselves using the public keys in the certificates.
The certificate also includes a fingerprint, a unique text used to identify the certificate. You
can email your certificate's fingerprint to the remote user. Upon connecting to the VPN-1
Edge VPN Server for the first time, the entity should check that the VPN peer's fingerprint
displayed in the SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN Client is identical to the fingerprint
received.

The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports certificates encoded in the PKCS#12 (Personal
Information Exchange Syntax Standard) format, and enables you to install such certificates
in the following ways:
• By generating a self-signed certificate.
See Generating a Self-Signed Certificate on page 471.
• By importing a certificate.
The PKCS#12 file you import must have a ".p12" file extension. If you do not have
such a PKCS#12 file, obtain one from your network security administrator.
See Importing a Certificate on page 475.
Note: To use certificates authentication, each VPN-1 Edge appliance should have a
unique certificate. Do not use the same certificate for more than one gateway.
Note: When the firewall is managed by SmartCenter, it automatically downloads a

certificate from SmartCenter, and therefore there is no need to install one.
Generating a Self-Signed Certificate
To generate a self-signed certificate

1. Click VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.

The Certificate page appears.
2. Click Install Certificate.

The VPN-1 Edge Certificate Wizard opens, with the Certificate Wizard dialog box
displayed.
3. Click Generate a self-signed security certificate for this gateway.

The Create Self-Signed Certificate dialog box appears.

5. Click Next.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance generates the certificate. This may take a few seconds.
The Done dialog box appears, displaying the certificate's details.
6. Click Finish.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance installs the certificate. If a certificate is already installed, it
is overwritten.

The Certificate Wizard closes.

The Certificates page displays the following information:
• The gateway's certificate

• The gateway's name
• The gateway certificate's fingerprint
• The CA's certificate
• The name of the CA that issued the certificate (in this case, the VPN-1 Edge
gateway)
• The CA certificate's fingerprint
• The starting and ending dates between which the gateway's certificate and the
CA's certificate are valid

Table 95: Certificate Fields
Country Select your country from the drop-down list.
Organization Type the name of your organization.

Name
Organizational Unit Type the name of your division.
Gateway Name Type the gateway's name. This name will appear on the certificate, and will
be visible to remote users inspecting the certificate.
This field is filled in automatically with the gateway's MAC address. If

desired, you can change this to a more descriptive name.
Valid Until Use the drop-down lists to specify the month, day, and year when this
certificate should expire.
Note: You must renew the certificate when it expires.
Importing a Certificate
To install a certificate
The Certificate page appears.
2. Click Install Certificate.
The VPN-1 Edge Certificate Wizard opens, with the Certificate Wizard dialog box
displayed.
3. Click Import a security certificate in PKCS#12 format.

The Import Certificate dialog box appears.
4. Click Browse to open a file browser from which to locate and select the file.
The filename that you selected is displayed.
5. Click Next.
The Import-Certificate Passphrase dialog box appears. This may take a few moments.
6. Type the pass-phrase you received from the network security administrator.
7. Click Next.

Uninstalling a Certificate
The Done dialog box appears, displaying the certificate's details.

8. Click Finish.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance installs the certificate. If a certificate is already installed, it
is overwritten.
The Certificate Wizard closes.
The Certificates page displays the following information:
• The gateway's certificate

• The gateway's name
• The gateway certificate's fingerprint
• The CA's certificate
• The name of the CA that issued the certificate
• The CA certificate's fingerprint
• The starting and ending dates between which the gateway's certificate and the
CA's certificate are valid
Uninstalling a Certificate
If you uninstall the certificate, no certificate will exist on the VPN-1 Edge appliance, and
you will not be able to connect to the VPN if a certificate is required.
You cannot uninstall the certificate if there is a VPN site currently defined to use
certificate authentication.
Note: If you want to replace a currently-installed certificate, there is no need to

uninstall the certificate first. When you install the new certificate, the old certificate
will be overwritten.
To uninstall a certificate

Viewing VPN Tunnels
The Certificate page appears with the name of the currently installed certificate.
2. Click Uninstall.
3. Click OK.
The certificate is uninstalled.
4. Click OK.
Viewing VPN Tunnels
You can view a list of currently established VPN tunnels. VPN tunnels are created and
closed as follows:
• Remote Access VPN sites configured for Automatic Login and Site-to-Site VPN
Gateways
A tunnel is created whenever your computer attempts any kind of communication with
a computer at the VPN site. The tunnel is closed when not in use for a period of time.
Note: Although the VPN tunnel is automatically closed, the site remains open, and if
you attempt to communicate with the site, the tunnel will be reestablished.
• Remote Access VPN sites configured for Manual Login

A tunnel is created whenever your computer attempts any kind of communication with
a computer at the VPN site, after you have manually logged on to the site. All open
tunnels connecting to the site are closed when you manually log off.
To view VPN tunnels

1. Click Reports in the main menu, and click the VPN Tunnels tab.

Viewing VPN Tunnels
The VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open VPN tunnels.
The VPN Tunnels page includes the information described in the following table.
2. To refresh the table, click Refresh.
Table 96: VPN Tunnels Page Fields
Type The currently active security protocol (IPSEC).
Source The IP address or address range of the entity from which the tunnel
originates.
The entity's type is indicated by an icon. See VPN Tunnel Icons on page
481.

Viewing VPN Tunnels
Destination The IP address or address range of the entity to which the tunnel is
connected.
The entity's type is indicated by an icon. See VPN Tunnel Icons on page
481.
Security The type of encryption used to secure the connection, and the type of
Message Authentication Code (MAC) used to verify the integrity of the
message. This information is presented in the following format: Encryption
type/Authentication type.
In addition, if IPSec compression is enabled for the tunnel, this field displays
the icon.
Note: All VPN settings are automatically negotiated between the two sites.
The encryption and authentication schemes used for the connection are the
strongest of those used at the two sites.
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance supports AES, 3DES, and DES encryption
schemes, and MD5 and SHA authentication schemes.
Established The time at which the tunnel was established.
This information is presented in the format hh:mm:ss, where:
hh=hours
mm=minutes
ss=seconds

Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections
Table 97: VPN Tunnels Icons
This icon… Represents…
This gateway
A network for which an IKE Phase-2 tunnel was negotiated
A Remote Access VPN Server
A Site-to-Site VPN Gateway
A remote access VPN user
An L2TP user
If you are experiencing VPN connection problems, you can save a trace of IKE (Internet
Key Exchange) negotiations to a file, and then use the free IKE View tool to view the file.
The IKE View tool is available for the Windows platform.
Note: Before viewing IKE traces, it is recommended to do the following:
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance stores traces for all recent IKE negotiations.
If you want to view only new IKE trace data, clear all IKE trace data
currently stored on the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
• Close all existing VPN tunnels except for the problematic tunnel, so as
to make it easier to locate the problematic tunnel's IKE negotiation
trace in the exported file.
To clear all currently-stored IKE traces

The VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.
2. Click Clear IKE Trace.

All IKE trace data currently stored on the VPN-1 Edge appliance is cleared.
To view the IKE trace for a connection

1. Establish a VPN tunnel to the VPN site with which you are experiencing
connection problems.
For information on when and how VPN tunnels are established, see Viewing VPN
Tunnels on page 478.
The VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.
3. Click Save IKE Trace.
4. Click Save.
6. Type a name for the *.elg file and click Save.
The *.elg file is created and saved to the specified directory. This file contains the IKE
traces of all currently-established VPN tunnels.
7. Use the IKE View tool to open and view the *.elg file, or send the file to
technical support.

Changing Your Login Credentials
Chapter 15
Managing Users
This chapter describes how to manage VPN-1 Edge appliance users. You can define
multiple users, set their passwords, and assign them various permissions.
Changing Your Login Credentials............................................................483
Adding and Editing Users ........................................................................486
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users.........................................................489
Viewing and Deleting Users.....................................................................491
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users...............................................492
Using RADIUS Authentication ................................................................492
Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute ..............................497
You can change your username and password at any time.
To change your login credentials

1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
Chapter 15: Managing Users 483

The Internal Users page appears.
2. In the row of your username, click Edit.

The Account Wizard opens displaying the Set User Details dialog box.
3. Edit the Username field.

4. Edit the Password and Confirm password fields.

Note: Use 5 to 25 characters (letters or numbers) for the new password.
5. Click Next.
The Set User Permissions dialog box appears.
6. Click Finish.
Your changes are saved.

Adding and Editing Users
This procedure explains how to add and edit users.

For information on quickly adding guest HotSpot users via a shortcut that the VPN-1 Edge
appliance provides, see Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users on page 489.
To add or edit a user

• To create a new user, click New User.

• To edit an existing user, click Edit next to the desired user.
The Account Wizard opens displaying the Set User Details dialog box.
3. Complete the fields using the information in Set User Details Fields on page
487.
4. Click Next.

The Set User Permissions dialog box appears.
The options that appear on the page are dependant on the software and services you
are using.
5. Complete the fields using the information in Set User Permissions Fields on
page 488.
6. Click Finish.
The user is saved.
Table 98: Set User Details Fields
Username Enter a username for the user.
Password Enter a password for the user. Use five to 25 characters (letters or
numbers) for the new password.
Confirm Password Re-enter the user’s password.

Expires On To specify an expiration time for the user, select this option and specify
the expiration date and time in the fields provided.
When the user account expires, it is locked, and the user can no longer
log on to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
If you do not select this option, the user will not expire.
Table 99: Set User Permissions Fields
In this field... Do this...
Administrator Level Select the user’s level of access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal.
The levels are:
• No Access: The user cannot access the VPN-1 Edge Portal.

• Read Only: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal,
but cannot modify system settings or export the appliance
configuration via the Setup>Tools page. For example, you
could assign this administrator level to technical support
personnel who need to view the Event Log.
• Users Manager. The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge
Portal and add, edit, or delete "No Access"-level users.
However, the user cannot modify other system settings. For
example, you could assign this administrator level to clerks
who need to manage HotSpot users.
• Read/Write: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal
and modify system settings.
The default level is No Access.
The “admin” user’s Administrator Level (Read/Write) cannot be

changed.

Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users
VPN Remote Select this option to allow the user to connect to this VPN-1 Edge
Access appliance using their VPN client.
For further information on setting up VPN remote access, see see

Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 492
Web Filtering Select this option to allow the user to override Web Filtering.
Override
This option only appears if the Web Filtering service is defined.
This option cannot be changed for the “admin” user.
HotSpot Access Select this option to allow the user to log on to the My HotSpot page.
For information on Secure HotSpot, see Configuring Secure HotSpot

on page 364.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance provides a shortcut for quickly adding a guest HotSpot user.
This is useful in situations where you want to grant temporary network access to guests,
for example in an Internet café. The shortcut also enables printing the guest user's details in
one click.
By default, the quick guest user has the following characteristics:
• Username in the format guest<number>, where <number> is a unique
three-digit number.
For example: guest123
• Randomly generated password
• Expires in 24 hours
• Administration Level: No Access

• Permissions: HotSpot Access only

For information on configuring Secure HotSpot, see Using Secure HotSpot on page 364.
For information on changing the default expiration period, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.
To quickly create a guest user

2. Click Quick Guest.
The Account Wizard opens displaying the Save Quick Guest dialog box.
3. In the Expires field, click on the arrows to specify the expiration date and time.
4. To print the user details, click Print.
5. Click Finish.
The guest user is saved.
You can edit the guest user's details and permissions using the procedure Adding and
Editing Users on page 486.

Viewing and Deleting Users
Viewing and Deleting Users
Note: The “admin” user cannot be deleted.
To view or delete users

The Internal Users page appears with a list of all users and their permissions.
The expiration time of expired users appears in red.
2. To delete a user, do the following:
a) In the desired user’s row, click the Erase icon.

b) Click OK.
The user is deleted.
3. To delete all expired users, do the following:
a) Click Clear Expired.
b) Click OK.
The expired users are deleted.

Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users
If you are using your VPN-1 Edge appliance as a SecuRemote Remote Access VPN
Server, as an internal VPN Server, or as an L2TP VPN Server, you can allow users to
access it remotely through their Remote Access VPN Clients (a Check Point SecureClient,
Check Point SecuRemote, an L2TP VPN Client, or another Embedded NGX appliance).
To set up remote VPN access for a user

1. Enable your VPN Server, using the procedure Setting Up Your VPN-1 Edge
Appliance as a VPN Server on page 420.
2. Add or edit the user, using the procedure Adding and Editing Users on page
486.
You must select the VPN Remote Access option.
Using RADIUS Authentication
You can use Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) to authenticate both
VPN-1 Edge appliance users and Remote Access VPN Clients trying to connect to the
Note: When RADIUS authentication is in use, Remote Access VPN Clients must
have a certificate.
When a user tries to log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, the VPN-1 Edge appliance sends the
entered user name and password to the RADIUS server. The server then checks whether
the RADIUS database contains a matching user name and password pair. If so, then the
user is logged on.
By default, all RADIUS-authenticated users are assigned the set of permissions specified
in the VPN-1 Edge Portal's RADIUS page. However, you can configure the RADIUS server
to pass the VPN-1 Edge appliance a specific set of permissions to grant the authenticated

user, instead of these default permissions. This is done by configuring the RADIUS
Vendor-Specific Attribute (VSA) with a set of attributes containing permission
information for specific users. If the VSA is configured for a user, then the RADIUS server
passes the VSA to the Embedded NGX gateway as part of the response to the
authentication request, and the gateway assigns the user permissions as specified in the
VSA. If the VSA is not returned by the RADIUS server for a specific user, the gateway
will use the default permission set for this user.
To use RADIUS authentication

1. Click Users in the main menu, and click the RADIUS tab.
The RADIUS page appears.

3. Click Apply.
4. To restore the default RADIUS settings, do the following:
a) Click Default.
b) Click OK.
The RADIUS settings are reset to their defaults. For information on the default
values, refer to the following table.
5. To use the RADIUS VSA to assign permissions to users, configure the VSA.
See Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute on page 497.
Table 100: RADIUS Page Fields
Primary/Secondary Configure the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.

RADIUS Server
By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance sends a request to the primary
RADIUS server first. If the primary RADIUS server does not respond
after three attempts, the VPN-1 Edge appliance will send the request to
the secondary RADIUS server.
Address Type the IP address of the computer that will run the RADIUS service
(one of your network computers) or click the corresponding This
Computer button to allow your computer to host the service.
To clear the text box, click Clear.
Port Type the port number on the RADIUS server’s host computer.
The default port number is 1812.
Shared Secret Type the shared secret to use for secure communication with the
RADIUS server.

Realm If your organization uses RADIUS realms, type the realm to append to
RADIUS requests. The realm will be appended to the username as
follows: <username>@<realm>
For example, if you set the realm to “myrealm”, and the user "JohnS"
attempts to log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance will send the RADIUS server an authentication request with
the username “JohnS@myrealm”.
Timeout Type the interval of time in seconds between attempts to communicate

with the RADIUS server.
RADIUS User If the RADIUS VSA (Vendor-Specific Attribute) is configured for a user,
Permissions the fields in this area will have no effect, and the user will be granted
the permissions specified in the VSA.
If the VSA is not configured for the user, the permissions configured in
this area will be used.

Administrator Level Select the level of access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal to assign to all
users authenticated by the RADIUS server.
The levels are:
• No Access: The user cannot access the VPN-1 Edge Portal.

• Read Only: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal,
but cannot modify system settings or export the appliance
configuration via the Setup>Tools page. For example, you
could assign this administrator level to technical support
personnel who need to view the Event Log.
• Users Manager. The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge
Portal and add, edit, or delete "No Access"-level users.
However, the user cannot modify other system settings. For
example, you could assign this administrator level to clerks
who need to manage HotSpot users.
• Read/Write: The user can log on to the VPN-1 Edge Portal
and modify system settings.
The default level is No Access.
VPN Remote Access Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server
to connect to this VPN-1 Edge appliance using their VPN client.
For further information on setting up VPN remote access, see Setting

Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 492.
Web Filtering Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server
Override to override Web Filtering.
This option only appears if the Web Filtering service is defined.
HotSpot Access Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS
server to access the My HotSpot page.

Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-Specific Attribute
For detailed instructions and examples, refer to the "Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-
Specific Attribute" white paper.
To assign permissions to specific RADIUS-authenticated users

1. Create a remote access policy as follows:
a) Assign the policy’s VSA (attribute 26) the SofaWare vendor code (6983).
b) For each permission you want to grant, configure the relevant attribute of
the VSA with the desired value, as described in the following table.
For example, to assign the user VPN access permissions, set attribute number 2 to
“true”.
2. Assign the policy to the desired user or user group.

Table 101: VSA Syntax
Permission Description Attribute Attribute Attribute Values Notes

Number Format
Admin Indicates the 1 String none. The user

administrator’s cannot access the
level of access to VPN-1 Edge
the Embedded Portal.
NGX Portal
readonly. The user
can log on to the
VPN-1 Edge
Portal, but cannot
modify system
settings.
users-manager. The
user can log on to
the VPN-1 Edge
Portal and add,
edit, or delete "No
Access"-level
users. However,
the user cannot
modify other
system settings.
readwrite. The user

can log on to the
VPN-1 Edge Portal
and modify system
settings.

Permission Description Attribute Attribute Attribute Values Notes

Number Format
VPN Indicates whether 2 String true. The user can This permission
the user can remotely access is only relevant if
access the the network via the VPN-1 Edge
network from a VPN. Remote Access
Remote Access VPN Server is
false. The user
VPN Client. enabled. The
cannot remotely
gateway must
access the
have a
network via VPN.
certificate.
Hotspot Indicates whether 3 String true. The user can This permission
the user can log access the Internet is only relevant if
on via the My via My HotSpot. the Secure
HotSpot page. HotSpot feature
false. The user
is enabled.
cannot access the
Internet via My
HotSpot.
UFP Indicates whether 4 String true. The user can This permission is
the user can override Web only relevant if
override Web Filtering. the Web Filtering
Filtering. service is
false. The user
enabled.
cannot override
Web Filtering.

Overview
Chapter 16
Using Remote Desktop

This chapter describes how to remotely access the desktop of each of your computers,
using the VPN-1 Edge appliance's Remote Desktop feature.
Overview ..................................................................................................501
Workflow..................................................................................................502
Configuring Remote Desktop...................................................................502
Configuring the Host Computer ...............................................................506
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop ................................................509
Overview
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance includes an integrated client for Microsoft Terminal Services,
allowing you to remotely access the desktop of each of your computers from anywhere, via
the VPN-1 Edge Portal. You can even redirect your printers or ports to a remote computer,
so that you can print and transfer files with ease.
Remote Desktop sessions use the Microsoft Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) on TCP port
3389. This port is opened dynamically between the Remote Desktop client and the Remote
Desktop server as needed, meaning that the port is not exposed to the Internet, and your
constant security is ensured.
Note: By default, the Microsoft RDP protocol is secured with 128-bit RC4 encryption.
For the strongest possible security, it is recommended to use Remote Desktop over
an IPSec VPN connection. For information on VPNs, see Working With VPNs on
page 413.
Chapter 16: Using Remote Desktop 501

Workflow
Workflow
To use Remote Desktop

1. Configure Remote Desktop.
See Configuring Remote Desktop on page 502.
2. Enable the Remote Desktop server on computers that authorized users should
be allowed to remotely access.
See Configuring the Host Computer on page 506.
3. Access remote computers' desktops as desired.
See Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop on page 509.
Configuring Remote Desktop
To configure Remote Desktop

1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Remote Desktop tab.

The Remote Desktop page appears.
• To enable Remote Desktop, select the Allow remote desktop access check
box.

New fields appear.
• To disable Remote Desktop, clear the Allow remote desktop access check box.
Fields disappear.
4. Click Apply.

Table 102: Remote Desktop Options
Sharing
Share local drives Select this option to allow the host computer to access hard drives on
the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local hard
drives when logged on to the host computer.
Share local printers Select this option to allow the host computer to access printers on the
client computer. This enables remote users to access their local printer
when logged on to the host computer.
Share local Select this option to allow the host computer to access smartcards on
smartcards the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local
smartcards when logged on to the host computer.
Share local COM Select this option to allow the host computer to access COM ports on
ports the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local
COM ports when logged on to the host computer.
Advanced
Full screen mode Select this option to open Remote Desktop sessions on the whole
screen.
Optimize Select this option to optimize Remote Desktop sessions for slow links.
performance for slow
Bandwidth-consuming options, such as wallpaper and menu animations,
links
will be disabled.

Configuring the Host Computer

To enable remote users to connect to a computer, you must enable the Remote Desktop
server on that computer.
Note: The host computer must have one of the following operating systems installed:
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003

• Microsoft Windows XP Professional
• Microsoft Windows XP Media Center
• Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC 2005
To enable users to remotely connect to a computer

1. Log on to the desired computer as an administrator.
2. For each remote user who should be allowed to access this computer, create a
user account with a password.
For information, refer to Microsoft documentation.
3. On the desktop, right-click on My Computer, and select Properties in the pop-
up menu that appears.
The System Properties dialog box appears displaying the General tab.
4. Click the Remote tab.

The Remote tab appears.
5. Select the Allow users to connect remotely to this computer check box.
6. Click Select Remote Users.
The Remote Desktop Users dialog box appears.
7. Do the following for each remote user who should be allowed to access this
computer:
a. Click Add.

The Select Users dialog box appears.
b. Type the desired user's username in the text box.

The Check Names button is enabled.
c. Click Check Names.
d. Click OK.
The Remote Desktop Users dialog box reappears with the desired user's username.
8. Click OK.
9. Click OK.

Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop
Note: The client computer must meet the following requirements:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later

• A working Internet connection
To access a remote computer's desktop

2. Next to the desired computer, click Remote Desktop.


• If you are prompted to install the Remote Desktop Active X Control, then
install it.
• The Remote Desktop Connection Security Warning dialog box appears.
3. Select the desired connection options.

The available options depend on your Remote Desktop configuration. See
Configuring Remote Desktop on page 502.
4. Click OK.
The Log On to Windows dialog box appears.
5. Type your username and password for the remote computer.

These are the credentials configured for your user account in Enabling the Remote
Desktop Server on page 506.
6. Click OK.
The remote computer's desktop appears onscreen.
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts during the Remote Desktop session:

Table 103: Remote Desktop Keyboard Shortcuts
This shortcut… Does this…
ALT+INSERT Cycles through running programs in the order that they were started
ALT+HOME Displays the Start menu
CTRL+ALT+BREAK Toggles between displaying the session in a window and on the full
screen
CTRL+ALT+END Opens the Windows Security dialog box

Chapter 17
Maintenance
This chapter describes the tasks required for maintenance and diagnosis of your VPN-1
Edge appliance.
Viewing Firmware Status .........................................................................514
Updating the Firmware.............................................................................516
Upgrading Your Software Product ...........................................................518
Configuring Syslog Logging ....................................................................520
Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line ...................................522
Configuring HTTPS .................................................................................527
Configuring SSH ......................................................................................530
Configuring SNMP...................................................................................532
Setting the Time on the Appliance ...........................................................535
Using Diagnostic Tools ............................................................................538
Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration ...........................552
Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults....................................555
Running Diagnostics ................................................................................558
Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance.....................................................559
Chapter 17: Maintenance 513

Viewing Firmware Status
The firmware is the software program embedded in the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
You can view your current firmware version and additional details.
To view the firmware status

• Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The Firmware page displays the following information:

Table 104: Firmware Status Fields
This field… Displays… For example…
WAN MAC Address The MAC address used for 00:80:11:22:33:44

the Internet connection
Firmware Version The current version of the 7.0

firmware
Installed Product The licensed software and VPN-1 Edge X (unlimited nodes)
the number of allowed
nodes
Uptime The time that elapsed from 01:21:15

the moment the unit was
turned on
Hardware Type The type of the current SBox-200

VPN-1 Edge appliance
hardware
Hardware Version The current hardware 1.0

version of the VPN-1 Edge
appliance

Updating the Firmware
If you are subscribed to Software Updates, firmware updates are performed automatically.
These updates include new product features and protection against new security threats.
Check with your reseller for the availability of Software Updates and other services. For
information on subscribing to services, see Connecting to a Service Center on page 392.
When connected to SmartCenter, you can also update VPN-1 Edge firmware using
SmartCenter's SmartUpdate.component. For information refer to the Check Point
SmartUpdate documentation.
If you are not subscribed to the Software Updates service, you must update your firmware
manually.
To update your VPN-1 Edge firmware manually

2. Click Firmware Update.

The Firmware Update page appears.
3. Click Browse.
A browse window appears.
4. Select the image file and click Open.
The Firmware Update page reappears. The path to the firmware update image file
appears in the Browse text box.
5. Click Upload.
Your VPN-1 Edge appliance firmware is updated.
Updating may take a few minutes, during which time the PWR/SEC LED may start
flashing red or orange. Do not power off the appliance.
At the end of the process the VPN-1 Edge appliance restarts automatically.

Upgrading Your Software Product
You can upgrade the VPN-1 Edge product installed on your appliance, by purchasing a
new license. You will receive a new Product Key that enables you to use advanced features
on the same VPN-1 Edge appliance you have today. There is no need to replace your
hardware. You can also purchase node upgrades, as needed.
For example, if you have VPN-1 Edge X16 and you need secure Internet access for more
than 16 computers, you can upgrade to VPN-1 Edge X32 without changing your hardware.
Note: You can only upgrade within the same appliance hardware type.
Note: To purchase an upgrade, contact your VPN-1 Edge appliance provider.

Alternatively, you can click Upgrades & Services in the Welcome page to view and
purchase available upgrades.
To upgrade your product, you must install the new Product Key.
Note: When managed by SmartCenter, the Product Key can be installed from
SmartCenter.
If the Product Key is centrally managed, it cannot be changed locally.
To install a Product Key

2. Click Upgrade Product.

The VPN-1 Edge Licensing Wizard opens, with the Install Product Key dialog box
displayed.
3. Click Enter a different Product Key.

4. In the Product Key field, enter the new Product Key.
5. Click Next.
The Installed New Product Key dialog box appears.
6. Click Finish.

Configuring Syslog Logging
You can configure the VPN-1 Edge appliance to send event logs to a Syslog server
residing in your internal network or on the Internet. The logs detail the date and the time
each event occurred. If the event is a communication attempt that was rejected by the
firewall, the event details include the source and destination IP address, the destination
port, and the protocol used for the communication attempt (for example, TCP or UDP).
This same information is also available in the Event Log page (see Viewing the Event Log
on page 277). However, while the Event Log can display hundreds of logs, a Syslog server
can store an unlimited number of logs. Furthermore, Syslog servers can provide useful
tools for managing your logs.
Note: Kiwi Syslog Daemon is freeware and can be downloaded from

http://www.kiwisyslog.com. For technical support, contact Kiwi Enterprises.
Note: When managed by SmartCenter, the appliance automatically sends logs to

the SmartCenter Log Viewer using a secure protocol.
You can still configure Syslog logging if desired.
To configure Syslog logging

1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Logging tab.

The Logging page appears.

3. Click Apply.
Table 105: Logging Page Fields
Syslog Server Type the IP address of the computer that will run the Syslog service
(one of your network computers), or click This Computer to allow your
computer to host the service.
Clear Click to clear the Syslog Server field.
Syslog Port Type the port number of the Syslog server.
Default Click to reset the Syslog Port field to the default (port 514 UDP).

Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line
Depending on your VPN-1 Edge model, you can control your appliance via the command
line in the following ways:
• Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal's command line interface.
See Using the VPN-1 Edge Portal on page 522.
• Using a console connected to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
For information, see Using the Serial Console on page 524.
• Using an SSH client.
See Configuring SSH on page 530.
You can control your appliance via the VPN-1 Edge Portal's command line interface.
To control the appliance via the VPN-1 Edge Portal

1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.

The Tools page appears.
2. Click Command.
The Command Line page appears.
3. In the upper field, type a command.

You can view a list of supported commands using the command help.
For information on all commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
4. Click Go.
The command is implemented.
Using the Serial Console
You can connect a console to the VPN-1 Edge appliance, and use the console to control the
appliance via the command line.
Note: Your terminal emulation software must be set to 57600 bps, N-8-1.
To control the appliance via a console

1. Connect the serial console to your VPN-1 Edge appliance's serial port, using
an RS-232 Null modem cable.
For information on locating the serial port, see Rear Panel on page 17.

3. Next to the Serial port, click Edit.

4. In the Assign to drop-down list, select Console.

5. Click Apply.
You can now control the VPN-1 Edge appliance from the serial console.
For information on all supported commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.

Configuring HTTPS
Configuring HTTPS
You can enable VPN-1 Edge appliance users to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from the
Internet. To do so, you must first configure HTTPS.
To configure HTTPS
1. Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The Management page appears.
2. Specify from where HTTPS access to the VPN-1 Edge Portal should be
granted.
See Access Options on page 529 for information.
Warning: If remote HTTPS is enabled, your VPN-1 Edge appliance settings can be
changed remotely, so it is especially important to make sure all VPN-1 Edge
appliance users’ passwords are difficult to guess.

Configuring HTTPS
Note: You can use HTTPS to access the VPN-1 Edge Portal from your internal
network, by surfing to https://my.firewall.
If you selected Internal Networks + IP Range, additional fields appear.
3. If you selected Internal Networks + IP Range, enter the desired IP address range
in the fields provided.
4. Click Apply.
The HTTPS configuration is saved. If you configured remote HTTPS, you can now
access the VPN-1 Edge Portal through the Internet, using the procedure Accessing the
VPN-1 Edge Portal Remotely on page 74.

Configuring HTTPS
Table 106: Access Options
Select this To allow access from…

option…
Internal Networks The internal network only.
This disables remote access capability. This is the default.
Internal Networks + The internal network and your VPN.

VPN
Internal Networks + A particular range of IP addresses.

IP Range
Additional fields appear, in which you can enter the desired IP address
range.
ANY Any IP address.
Disabled Nowhere.
This disables both local and remote access capability.
This option is relevant to the SNMP protocol only.

Configuring SSH
Configuring SSH
VPN-1 Edge appliance users can control the appliance via the command line, using the
SSH (Secure Shell) management protocol. You can enable users to do so via the Internet,
by configuring remote SSH access. You can also integrate the VPN-1 Edge appliance with
SSH-based management systems.
Note: The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports SSHv2 clients only. The SSHv1 protocol
contains security vulnerabilities and is not supported.
To configure SSH
2. Specify from where SSH access should be granted.
Warning: If remote SSH is enabled, your VPN-1 Edge appliance settings can be
changed remotely, so it is especially important to make sure all VPN-1 Edge
appliance users’ passwords are difficult to guess.

Configuring SSH
4. Click Apply.
The SSH configuration is saved. If you configured remote SSH access, you can now
control the VPN-1 Edge appliance from the Internet, using an SSHv2 client.
For information on all supported commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.

Configuring SNMP
Configuring SNMP
The VPN-1 Edge appliance users can monitor the VPN-1 Edge appliance, using tools that
support SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). You can enable users to do so via
the Internet, by configuring remote SNMP access.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance supports the following SNMP MIBs:
• SNMPv2-MIB
• RFC1213-MIB
• IF-MIB
• IP-MIB
All SNMP access is read-only.
To configure SNMP
2. Specify from where SNMP access should be granted.

Configuring SNMP
The Community field and the Advanced link are enabled.
4. In the Community field, type the name of the SNMP community string.
SNMP clients uses the SNMP community string as a password, when connecting to
the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
The default value is "public". It is recommended to change this string.
5. To configure advanced SNMP settings, do the following:
a. Click Advanced.

Configuring SNMP
The SNMP Configuration page appears.
b. Complete the fields using the following table.

6. Click Apply.
The SNMP configuration is saved.
7. Configure the SNMP clients with the SNMP community string.
Table 107: Advanced SNMP Settings
In this field... Do this…
System Location Type a description of the appliance's location.
This information will be visible to SNMP clients, and is useful for

administrative purposes.
System Contact Type the name of the contact person.
This information will be visible to SNMP clients, and is useful for

administrative purposes.

Setting the Time on the Appliance
In this field... Do this…
SNMP Port Type the port to use for SNMP.
The default port is 161.
You set the time displayed in the VPN-1 Edge Portal during initial appliance setup. If
desired, you can change the date and time using the procedure below.
To set the time

2. Click Set Time.
The VPN-1 Edge Set Time Wizard opens displaying the Set the VPN-1 Edge Time dialog
box.

3. Complete the fields using the information in Set Time Wizard Fields on page
537.
4. Click Next.
• If you selected Specify date and time, the Specify Date and Time dialog box
appears.
Set the date, time, and time zone in the fields provided, then click Next.
• If you selected Use a Time Server, the Time Servers dialog box appears.

Complete the fields using the information in Time Servers Fields on page 538,
then click Next.
• The Date and Time Updated screen appears.
5. Click Finish.
Table 108: Set Time Wizard Fields
Select this option… To do the following…
Your computer's clock Set the appliance time to your computer’s system time.
Your computer’s system time is displayed to the right of this

option.
Keep the current setting Do not change the appliance’s time.
The current appliance time is displayed to the right of this option.
Use a Time Server Synchronize the appliance time with a Network Time Protocol
(NTP) server.
Specify date and time Set the appliance to a specific date and time.

Using Diagnostic Tools
Table 109: Time Servers Fields
Primary Server Type the IP address of the Primary NTP server.
Secondary Server Type the IP address of the Secondary NTP server.
Clear Clear the field.
Select your time zone Select the time zone in which you are located.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance is equipped with a set of diagnostic tools that are useful for
troubleshooting Internet connectivity.
Table 110: Diagnostic Tools
Use this To do this… For information, see...

tool…
Ping Check that a specific IP address or DNS Using IP Tools on page 539
name can be reached via the Internet.
Traceroute Display a list of all routers used to Using IP Tools on page 539
connect from the VPN-1 Edge appliance
to a specific IP address or DNS name.

Use this To do this… For information, see...

tool…
WHOIS Display the name and contact information Using IP Tools on page 539
of the entity to which a specific IP address
or DNS name is registered. This
information is useful in tracking down
hackers.
Packet Sniffer Capture network traffic. This information is Using Packet Sniffer on page
useful troubleshooting network problems. 541
Using IP Tools
To use an IP tool
2. In the Tool drop-down list, select the desired tool.
3. In the Address field, type the IP address or DNS name for which to run the
tool.
4. Click Go.

• If you selected Ping, the following things happen:

The VPN-1 Edge appliance sends packets to the specified the IP address or DNS
name.
The IP Tools window opens and displays the percentage of packet loss and the
amount of time it took each packet to reach the specified host and return (round-
trip) in milliseconds.
• If you selected Traceroute, the following things happen:

The VPN-1 Edge appliance connects to the specified IP address or DNS name.
The IP Tools window opens and displays a list of routers used to make the
connection.

• If you selected WHOIS, the following things happen:

The VPN-1 Edge appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server.
A window displays the name of the entity to which the IP address or DNS name is
registered and their contact information.
Using Packet Sniffer
The VPN-1 Edge appliance includes the Packet Sniffer tool, which enables you to capture
packets from any internal network or VPN-1 Edge port. This is useful for troubleshooting
network problems and for collecting data about network behavior.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance saves the captured packets to a file on your computer. You can
use a free protocol analyzer, such as Ethereal, to analyze the file, or you can send it to
technical support. Ethereal runs on all popular computing platforms and can be
downloaded from http://www.ethereal.com.
To use Packet Sniffer

2. Click Sniffer.

The Packet Sniffer window opens.

4. Click Start.
The Packet Sniffer window displays the name of the interface, the number of packets
collected, and the percentage of storage space remaining on the appliance for storing
the packets.
5. Click Stop to stop collecting packets.

6. Click Save.
The *.cap file is created and saved to the specified directory.
9. Click Cancel to close the Packet Sniffer window.

Table 111: Packet Sniffer Fields
Interface Select the interface from which to collect packets.
The list includes the primary Internet connection, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance ports, and all defined networks.
Filter String Type the filter string to use for filtering the captured packets. Only
packets that match the filter condition will be saved.
For a list of basic filter strings elements, see Filter String Syntax on
page 544.
For detailed information on filter syntax, go to

http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html.
Note: Do not enclose the filter string in quotation marks.
If you do not specify a filter string, Packet Sniffer will save all packets on
the selected interface.
Capture only traffic Select this option to capture incoming and outgoing packets for this
to/from this gateway gateway only.
If this option is not selected, Packet Sniffer will collect packets for all
traffic on the interface.

Filter String Syntax

The following represents a list of basic filter string elements:
• and on page 544
• dst on page 545
• dst port on page 545
• ether proto on page 546
• host on page 547
• not on page 547
• or on page 548
• port on page 548
• src on page 549
• src port on page 549
• tcp on page 550
• udp on page 551
For detailed information on filter syntax, refer to http://www.tcpdump.org.
and
PURPOSE
The and element is used to concatenate filter string elements. The filtered packets must
match all concatenated filter string elements.
SYNTAX
element and element [and element...]
element && element [&& element...]
PARAMETERS
element String. A filter string element.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that both originate from IP address is
192.168.10.1 and are destined for port 80:
src 192.168.10.1 and dst port 80
dst
PURPOSE
The dst element captures all packets with a specific destination.
SYNTAX
dst destination
PARAMETERS
destination IP Address or String. The computer to which the packet is

sent. This can be the following:
• An IP address
• A host name
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are destined for the IP address 192.168.10.1:
dst 192.168.10.1
dst port
PURPOSE
The dst port element captures all packets destined for a specific port.
SYNTAX
dst port port
Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on
page 550 and udp on page 551.

PARAMETERS
port Integer. The port to which the packet is sent.
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are destined for port 80:
dst port 80
ether proto
PURPOSE
The ether proto element is used to capture packets of a specific ether protocol type.
SYNTAX
ether proto \protocol
PARAMETERS
protocol String. The protocol type of the packet.
This can be the following: ip,

ip6, arp, rarp,
atalk, aarp, dec net, sca, lat,
mopdl, moprc, iso, stp, ipx, or
netbeui.
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves ARP packets:
ether proto arp

host
PURPOSE
The host element captures all incoming and outgoing packets for a specific computer.
SYNTAX
host host
PARAMETERS
host IP Address or String. The computer to/from which the packet

is sent. This can be the following:
• An IP address
• A host name
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves all packets that either originated from IP address
192.168.10.1, or are destined for that same IP address:
host 192.168.10.1
not
PURPOSE
The not element is used to negate filter string elements.
SYNTAX
not element
! element
PARAMETERS
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are not destined for port 80:
not dst port 80

or
PURPOSE
The or element is used to alternate between string elements. The filtered packets must
match at least one of the filter string elements.
SYNTAX
element or element [or element...]
element || element [|| element...]
PARAMETERS
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that either originate from IP address 192.168.10.1
or IP address 192.168.10.10:
src 192.168.10.1 or src 192.168.10.10
port
PURPOSE
The port element captures all packets originating from or destined for a specific port.
SYNTAX
port port
PARAMETERS
port Integer. The port from/to which the packet is sent.

EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves all packets that either originated from port 80, or are
destined for port 80:
port 80
src
PURPOSE
The src element captures all packets with a specific source.
SYNTAX
src source
PARAMETERS
source IP Address or String. The computer from which the packet is

sent. This can be the following:
• An IP address
• A host name
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that originated from IP address 192.168.10.1:
src 192.168.10.1
src port
PURPOSE
The src port element captures all packets originating from a specific port.
SYNTAX
src port port

PARAMETERS
port Integer. The port from which the packet is sent.
EXAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that originated from port 80:
src port 80
tcp
PURPOSE
The tcp element captures all TCP packets. This element can be prepended to port-related
elements.
Note: When not prepended to other elements, the tcp element is the equivalent of
ip proto tcp.
SYNTAX
tcp
tcp element
PARAMETERS
element String. A port-related filter string element that should be

restricted to saving only TCP packets. This can be the
following:
• dst port - Capture all TCP packets destined

for a specific port.
• port - Capture all TCP packets originating from
or destined for a specific port.
• src port - Capture all TCP packets originating
from a specific port.

EXAMPLE 1
The following filter string captures all TCP packets:
tcp
EXAMPLE 2
The following filter string captures all TCP packets destined for port 80:
tcp dst port 80
udp
PURPOSE
The udp element captures all UDP packets. This element can be prepended to port-related
elements.
Note: When not prepended to other elements, the udp element is the equivalent of
ip proto udp.
SYNTAX
udp
udp element
PARAMETERS
element String. A port-related filter string element that should be

restricted to saving only UDP packets. This can be the
following:
• dst port - Capture all UDP packets destined

for a specific port.
• port - Captures all UDP packets originating
from or destined for a specific port.
• src port - Capture all UDP packets
originating from a specific port.

Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration
EXAMPLE 1
The following filter string captures all UDP packets:
udp
EXAMPLE 2
The following filter string captures all UDP packets destined for port 80:
udp dst port 80
Backing Up the VPN-1 Edge Appliance

Configuration
You can export the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration to a *.cfg file, and use this file to
backup and restore VPN-1 Edge appliance settings, as needed. The file includes all your
settings.
The configuration file is saved as a textual CLI script. If desired, you can edit the file. For
a full explanation of the CLI script format and the supported CLI commands, see the
Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
Exporting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration
Exporting the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration creates a configuration file.
To export the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration

2. Click Export.
3. Click Save.


The *.cfg configuration file is created and saved to the specified directory.
Importing the VPN-1 Edge Appliance Configuration
In order to restore your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s configuration from a configuration file,
you must import the file.
To import the VPN-1 Edge appliance configuration

2. Click Import.
The Import Settings page appears.

• In the Import Settings field, type the full path to the configuration file.
Or
• Click Browse, and browse to the configuration file.

4. Click Upload.
5. Click OK.
The VPN-1 Edge appliance settings are imported.
The Import Settings page displays the configuration file's content and the result of
implementing each configuration command.
Note: If the appliance's IP address changed as a result of the configuration import,

your computer may be disconnected from the network; therefore you may not be
able to see the results.

Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults
You can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to its default settings. When you reset your VPN-
1 Edge appliance, it reverts to the state it was originally in when you purchased it.
Warning: This operation erases all your settings and password information. You will
have to set a new password and reconfigure your VPN-1 Edge appliance for Internet
connection. For information on performing these tasks, see Setting Up the VPN-1
Edge Appliance on page 65.
You can reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to defaults via the Web management interface
(software) or by manually pressing the Reset button (hardware) located at the back of the
When resetting the appliance via the VPN-1 Edge Portal, you can choose to keep the
current firmware or to revert to the firmware version that shipped with the VPN-1 Edge
appliance. In contrast, using the Reset button automatically reverts the firmware version.
To reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to factory defaults via the Web interface
2. Click Factory Settings.

3. To revert to the firmware version that shipped with the appliance, select the
check box.
4. Click OK.
• The Please Wait screen appears.
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance returns to its factory defaults.

• The VPN-1 Edge appliance is restarted (the PWR/SEC LED flashes quickly).
This may take a few minutes.
• The Login page appears.

To reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance to factory defaults using the Reset button
1. Make sure the VPN-1 Edge appliance is powered on.
2. Using a pointed object, press the RESET button on the back of the VPN-1
Edge appliance steadily for seven seconds and then release it.
3. Allow the VPN-1 Edge appliance to boot-up until the system is ready
(PWR/SEC LED flashes slowly or illuminates steadily in green light).
For information on the appliance's front and rear panels, see the Getting to Know Your
Appliance section in Introduction on page 1.
Warning: If you choose to reset the VPN-1 Edge appliance by disconnecting the
power cable and then reconnecting it, be sure to leave the VPN-1 Edge appliance
disconnected for at least three seconds. Disconnecting and reconnecting the power
without waiting might cause permanent damage.

Running Diagnostics
Running Diagnostics
You can view technical information about your VPN-1 Edge appliance’s hardware,
firmware, license, network status, and Service Center.
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export it to an *.html file and send
it to technical support.
To view diagnostic information

2. Click Diagnostics.
Technical information about your VPN-1 Edge appliance appears in a new window.
3. To save the displayed information to an *.html file:
a. Click Save.
b. Click Save.
c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
d. Type a name for the configuration file and click Save.
The *.html file is created and saved to the specified directory.
4. To refresh the contents of the window, click Refresh.
The contents are refreshed.
5. To close the window, click Close.

Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance
Rebooting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance
If your VPN-1 Edge appliance is not functioning properly, rebooting it may solve the
problem.
To reboot the VPN-1 Edge appliance

2. Click Restart.
3. Click OK.
• The Please Wait screen appears.
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance is restarted (the PWR/SEC LED flashes quickly).
This may take a few minutes.
• The Login page appears.

Overview
Chapter 18
Using Network Printers

This chapter describes how to set up and use network printers.
Overview ..................................................................................................561
Setting Up Network Printers.....................................................................562
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers.....................................565
Viewing Network Printers ........................................................................575
Changing Network Printer Ports...............................................................576
Resetting Network Printers.......................................................................577
Overview
Some VPN-1 Edge models include a built-in print server, enabling you to connect USB-
based printers to the appliance and share them across the network.
Note: When using computers with a Windows 2000/XP operating system, the VPN-1
Edge appliance supports connecting up to four USB-based printers to the
appliance. When using computers with a MAC OS-X operating system, the VPN-1
Edge appliance supports connecting one printer.
The appliance automatically detects printers as they are plugged in, and they immediately
become available for printing. Usually, no special configuration is required on the VPN-1
Edge appliance.
Note: The VPN-1 Edge print server supports printing via "all-in-one" printers.
Copying and scanning functions are not supported.
Chapter 18: Using Network Printers 561

Setting Up Network Printers
To set up a network printer

1. Connect the network printer to the VPN-1 Edge appliance.
See Network Installation on page 57.
2. Turn the printer on.
3. In the VPN-1 Edge Portal, click Network in the main menu, and click the Ports
tab.

The USB Devices page appears. If the VPN-1 Edge appliance detected the printer, the
printer is listed on the page.
If the printer is not listed, check that you connected the printer correctly, then click
Refresh to refresh the page.
5. Next to the printer, click Edit.

The Printer Setup page appears.
6. Write down the port number allocated to the printer.

The port number appears in the Printer Server TCP Port field. You will need this
number later, when configuring computers to use the network printer.
7. To change the port number, do the following:
a. Type the desired port number in the Printer Server TCP Port field.
Note: Printer port numbers may not overlap, and must be high ports.
b. Click Apply.
You may want to change the port number if, for example, the printer you are setting
up is intended to replace another printer. In this case, you should change the
replacement printer's port number to the old printer's port number, and you can skip
the next step.
8. Configure each computer from which you want to enable printing to the
network printer.
See Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers on page 565.

Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
Perform the relevant procedure on each computer from which you want to enable printing
via the VPN-1 Edge print server to a network printer.
Windows 2000/XP
This procedure is relevant for computers with a Windows 2000/XP operating system.
To configure a computer to use a network printer

1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN,
create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to This Gateway.
The Control Panel window opens.
3. Click Printers and Faxes.
The Printers and Faxes window opens.
4. Right-click in the window, and click Add Printer in the popup menu.
The Add Printer Wizard opens with the Welcome dialog box displayed.
5. Click Next.

The Local or Network Printer dialog box appears.
6. Click Local printer attached to this computer.
Note: Do not select the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer check
box.
7. Click Next.
The Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
8. Click Create a new port.

9. In the Type of port drop-down list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
10. Click Next.

The Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard opens with the Welcome dialog box displayed.
11. Click Next.

The Add Port dialog box appears.
12. In the Printer Name or IP Address field, type the VPN-1 Edge appliance's LAN
IP address, or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the VPN-1 Edge Portal, under Network > My
Network.
The Port Name field is filled in automatically.
13. Click Next.

The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard opens, with the Additional Port
Information Required dialog box displayed.
14. Click Custom.

15. Click Settings.
The Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box opens.
16. In the Port Number field, type the printer's port number, as shown in the
Printers page.
17. In the Protocol area, make sure that Raw is selected.
18. Click OK.
The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard reappears.

19. Click Next.

The Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.
20. Click Finish.

The Add Printer Wizard reappears, with the Install Printer Software dialog box
displayed.
• Use the lists to select the printer's manufacturer and model.

• If your printer does not appear in the lists, insert the CD that came with your
printer in the computer's CD-ROM drive, and click Have Disk.
22. Click Next.

23. Complete the remaining dialog boxes in the wizard as desired, and click
Finish.
The printer appears in the Printers and Faxes window.
24. Right-click the printer and click Properties in the popup menu.
The printer's Properties dialog box opens.
25. In the Ports tab, in the list box, select the port you added.
The port's name is IP_<LAN IP address>.
26. Click OK.

MAC OS-X
This procedure is relevant for computers with the latest version of the MAC OS-X
operating system.
Note: This procedure may not apply to earlier MAC OS-X versions.
To configure a computer to use a network printer

1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN,
create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to This Gateway.
2. Choose Apple -> System Preferences.
The System Preferences window appears.
3. Click Show All to display all categories.

4. In the Hardware area, click Print & Fax.

The Print & Fax window appears.
5. In the Printing tab, click Set Up Printers.

The Printer List window appears.
6. Click Add.

New fields appear.
7. In the first drop-down list, select IP Printing.

8. In the Printer Type drop-down list, select Socket/HP Jet Direct.
9. In the Printer Address field, type the VPN-1 Edge appliance's LAN IP address,
or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the VPN-1 Edge Portal, under Network > My
Network.
10. In the Queue Name field, type the name of the required printer queue.
For example, the printer queue name for HP printers is RAW.
11. In the Printer Model list, select the desired printer type.

A list of models appears.
12. In the Model Name list, select the desired model.

13. Click Add.
The new printer appears in the Printer List window.
14. In the Printer List window, select the newly added printer, and click Make
Default.

Viewing Network Printers
Viewing Network Printers
To view network printers

The USB Devices page appears, displaying a list of connected printers.
For each printer, the model, serial number, port, and status is displayed.
A printer can have the following statuses:
• Initialize. The printer is initializing.

• Ready. The printer is ready.
• Not Ready. The printer is not ready. For example, it may be out of paper.
• Printing. The printer is processing a print job.
• Restarting. The printer server is restarting.
• Fail. An error occurred. See the Event Log for details (Viewing the Event Log
on page 277).

Changing Network Printer Ports
Changing Network Printer Ports
When you set up a new network printer, the VPN-1 Edge appliance automatically assigns a
port number to the printer. If you want to use a different port number, you can easily
change it, as described in Setting Up Network Printers on page 562.
However, you may sometimes need to change the port number after completing printer
setup. For example, you may want to replace a malfunctioning network printer, with
another existing network printer, without reconfiguring the client computers. To do this,
you must change the replacement printer's port number to the malfunctioning printer's port
number, as described below.
Note: Each printer port number must be different, and must be a high port.
To change a printer's port

3. Next to the desired printer, click Edit.
The Printer Setup page appears.
4. In the printer's Printer Server TCP Port field, type the desired port number.
5. Click Apply.

Resetting Network Printers
Resetting Network Printers
You can cause a network printer to restart the current print job, by resetting the network
printer. You may want to do this if the print job has stalled.
To reset a network printer

3. Next to the desired printer, click Reset Server.
The network printer's current print job is restarted.

Connectivity
Chapter 19
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to common problems you may encounter while using the
Note: For information on troubleshooting wireless connectivity, see

Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity on page 273.

Connectivity ............................................................................................ 579
Service Center and Upgrades................................................................... 583
Other Problems ........................................................................................ 584
Connectivity
I cannot access the Internet. What should I do?
• Check if the PWR/SEC LED is green. If not, check the power connection to the
• Check if the WAN LINK/ACT LED is green. If not, check the network cable to
the modem and make sure the modem is turned on.
• Check if the LAN LINK/ACT LED for the port used by your computer is green.
If not, check if the network cable linking your computer to the VPN-1 Edge
appliance is connected properly. Try replacing the cable or connecting it to a
different LAN port.
• Using your Web browser, go to http://my.firewall and see whether "Connected"
appears on the Status Bar. Make sure that your VPN-1 Edge appliance network
settings are configured as per your ISP directions.
• Check your TCP/IP configuration according to Installing and Setting up the
• If Web Filtering or Email Filtering are on, try turning them off.
Chapter 19: Troubleshooting 579

Connectivity
• Check if you have defined firewall rules which block your Internet connectivity.
• Check with your ISP for possible service outage.
• Check whether you are exceeding the maximum number of computers allowed
by your license, by viewing the Active Computers page.
I cannot access my DSL broadband connection. What should I do?

DSL equipment comes in two flavors: bridges (commonly known as DSL modems) and
routers. Some DSL equipment can be configured to work both ways.
• If you connect to your ISP using a PPPoE or PPTP dialer defined in your
operating system, your equipment is most likely configured as a DSL bridge.
Configure a PPPoE or PPTP type DSL connection.
• If you were not instructed to configure a dialer in your operating system, your
equipment is most likely configured as a DSL router. Configure a LAN
connection, even if you are using a DSL connection.
For instructions, see Configuring the Internet Connection on page 83.
I cannot access my Cable broadband connection. What should I do?

• Some cable ISPs require you to register the MAC address of the device behind
the cable modem. You may need to clone your Ethernet adapter MAC address
onto the VPN-1 Edge appliance. For instructions, see Configuring the Internet
Connection on page 83.
• Some cable ISPs require using a hostname for the connection. Try reconfiguring
your Internet connection and specifying a hostname. For further information, see
Configuring the Internet Connection on page 83.
I cannot access my ADSL connection from an ADSL appliance. What should I do?
• Check that a micro-filter is used on all the phone sockets on the line (required in
most locations).
• Check that the DSL Standard setting configured for your appliance is compatible
with your service provider. You can view this setting in the Network > Internet
Setup page.
• Advanced ADSL configuration fine tuning options are available via the CLI. For
information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.

Connectivity
I cannot access http://my.firewall or http://my.vpn. What should I do?

• Verify that the VPN-1 Edge appliance is operating (PWR/SEC LED is active)
• Check if the LAN LINK/ACT LED for the port used by your computer is on. If
not, check if the network cable linking your computer to the VPN-1 Edge
appliance is connected properly.
• Try surfing to 192.168.10.1 instead of to my.firewall.
Note: 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the My
Network page.
• Check your TCP/IP configuration according to Installing and Setting up the

• Restart your VPN-1 Edge appliance and your broadband modem by
disconnecting the power and reconnecting after 5 seconds.
• If your Web browser is configured to use an HTTP proxy to access the
Internet, add "my.firewall" or "my.vpn" to your proxy exceptions list.
My network seems extremely slow. What should I do?

• The Ethernet cables may be faulty. For proper operation, the VPN-1 Edge
appliance requires STP CAT5 (Shielded Twisted Pair Category 5) Ethernet
cables. Make sure that this specification is printed on your cables.
• Your Ethernet card may be faulty or incorrectly configured. Try replacing your
Ethernet card.
• There may be an IP address conflict in your network. Check that the TCP/IP
settings of all your computers are configured to obtain an IP address
automatically.
I changed the network settings to incorrect values and am unable to correct my error. What
should I do?
Reset the network to its default settings using the button on the back of the VPN-1 Edge
appliance unit. See Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults on page 555.

Connectivity
I am using the VPN-1 Edge appliance behind another NAT device, and I am having problems
with some applications. What should I do?
By default, the VPN-1 Edge appliance performs Network Address Translation (NAT). It is
possible to use the VPN-1 Edge appliance behind another device that performs NAT, such
as a DSL router or Wireless router, but the device will block all incoming connections
from reaching your VPN-1 Edge appliance.
To fix this problem, do ONE of the following. (The solutions are listed in order of
preference.)
• Consider whether you really need the router. The VPN-1 Edge appliance can be
used as a replacement for your router, unless you need it for some additional
functionality that it provides, such as Wireless access.
• If possible, disable NAT in the router. Refer to the router’s documentation for
instructions on how to do this.
• If the router has a “DMZ Computer” or “Exposed Host” option, set it to the
VPN-1 Edge appliance’s external IP address.
• Open the following ports in the NAT device:
• UDP 9281/9282
• UDP 500
• UDP 2746
• TCP 256
• TCP 264
• ESP IP protocol 50
• TCP 981
I cannot receive audio or video calls through the VPN-1 Edge appliance. What should I do?
To enable audio/video, you must configure an IP Telephony (H.323) virtual server. For
instructions, see Configuring Servers on page 301.
I run a public Web server at home but it cannot be accessed from the Internet. What should I
do?
Configure a virtual Web Server. For instructions, see Configuring Servers on page 301.

Service Center and Upgrades
I cannot connect to the LAN network from the DMZ or primary WLAN network. What should I
do?
By default, connections from the DMZ or primary WLAN network to the LAN network
are blocked. To allow traffic from the DMZ or primary WLAN to the LAN, configure
appropriate firewall rules. For instructions, see Using Rules on page 303.
Service Center and Upgrades

I have exceeded my node limit. What does this mean? What should I do?
Your Product Key specifies a maximum number of nodes that you may connect to the
The VPN-1 Edge appliance tracks the cumulative number of nodes on the internal network
that have communicated through the firewall. When the VPN-1 Edge appliance encounters
an IP address that exceeds the licensed node limit, the Active Computers page displays a
warning message and marks nodes over the node limit in red. These nodes will not be able
to access the Internet through the VPN-1 Edge appliance, but will be protected. The Event
Log page also warns you that you have exceeded the node limit.
To upgrade your VPN-1 Edge appliance to support more nodes, purchase a new Product
Key. Contact your reseller for upgrade information.
While trying to connect to a Service Center, I received the message “The Service Center did
not respond”. What should I do?
• If you are using a Service Center other than the Check Point Service Center,
check that the Service Center IP address is typed correctly.
• The VPN-1 Edge appliance connects to the Service Center using UDP ports
9281/9282. If the VPN-1 Edge appliance is installed behind another firewall,
make sure that these ports are open.
I purchased an advanced VPN-1 Edge model, but I only have the functionality of a simpler
VPN-1 Edge model. What should I do?
Your have not installed your product key. For further information, see Upgrading Your
Software Product on page 518.

Other Problems
Other Problems
I have forgotten my password. What should I do?
Reset your VPN-1 Edge appliance to factory defaults using the Reset button as detailed in
Resetting the VPN-1 Edge Appliance to Defaults on page 555.
Why are the date and time displayed incorrectly?

You can adjust the time on the Setup page's Tools tab. For information, see Setting the
Time on the Appliance on page 535.
I cannot use a certain network application. What should I do?

Look at the Event Log page. If it lists blocked attacks, do the following:
• Set the VPN-1 Edge appliance's firewall level to Low and try again.
• If the application still does not work, set the computer on which you want to use
the application to be the exposed host.
For instructions, see Defining an Exposed Host on page 370.
When you have finished using the application, make sure to clear the exposed host setting,
otherwise your security might be compromised.
In the VPN-1 Edge Portal, I do not see the pop-up windows that the guide describes. What
should I do?
Disable any pop-up blockers for http://my.firewall.

Technical Specifications
Chapter 20
Specifications
Technical Specifications.......................................................................... 585
CE Declaration of Conformity................................................................. 592
Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference
Statement ................................................................................................. 595
Check Point is committed to protecting the environment. The latest VPN-1 Edge unified
threat management appliance models are compliant with the RoHS Directive, meeting the
European Union's strict restrictions on hazardous substances.
RoHS & WEEE Declaration and Certification
The VPN-1 Edge appliance has been verified to comply with the following directives,
throughout the design, development, and supply chain stages:
• Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council, of 27 January 2003, on
the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (RoHS – 2002/95/EC)
• Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council, of 27 January 2003, on
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE – 2002/96/CE)
For a copy of the original signed declaration (in full conformance with EN45014), contact
SofaWare technical support at www.sofaware.com/support.
Chapter 20: Specifications 585

Table 112: VPN-1 Edge ADSL Models Attributes
Attribute VPN-1 Edge X ADSL VPN-1 Edge W ADSL

SBXD-166LHGE-5 SBXWD-166LHGE-5
Physical Attributes
Dimensions 200 x 33 x 122 mm 200 x 33 x 130 mm

(width x height x depth) (7.87 x 1.3 x 4.8 inches) (7.87 x 1.3 x 5.12 inches)
(incl. antenna connectors)
Weight 660 g (1.46 lbs) 694 g (1.53 lbs)
Retail Box Dimensions 290 x 250 x 80 mm 290 x 250 x 80 mm

5V Power Supply Unit
Power Supply Nominal In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A

Input
Power Supply Nominal 5V DC @ 3.3A 5V DC @ 3.3A

Output
Max. Power 8.5W 10.5W

Consumption
13.5W (including USB devices) 15.5W (including USB devices)
Environmental Conditions
Temperature: -5ºC ~ 80º C -5ºC ~ 80ºC

Storage/Transport
Temperature: Operation 0ºC ~ 40ºC 0ºC ~ 40ºC

Humidity: 10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90% 10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90%

Storage/Operation
(non-condensed) (non-condensed)
Applicable Standards
Safety cULus, CB, LVD cULus, CB, LVD
Quality ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000 ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000
EMC CE . FCC 15B.VCCI CE . FCC 15B.VCCI
Reliability EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3 EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
Environment RoHS & WEEE RoHS & WEEE
ADSL Part 68.CS03 Part 68.CS03
RF N/A R&TTE .FCC15C, TELCO
Table 113: VPN-1 Edge Non-ADSL Models Attributes
Attribute VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge W

SBX-166LHGE-5 SBXW-166LHGE-5
Physical Attributes

(incl. antenna connectors)
Weight 580 g (1.28 lbs) 635 g (1.40 lbs)
Retail Box Dimensions 290 x 250 x 80 mm 290 x 250 x 80 mm


Power Supply Nominal In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A

Input
Power Supply Nominal 9VAC @ 1.5 A 12VDC @ 1.5 A

Output
OR:
12VDC @ 1.5 A
Max. Power 4.5W 6.5W

Consumption
11.5W (including USB devices)
Temperature: -5ºC ~ 80ºC -5ºC ~ 80ºC

Storage/Transport
Temperature: Operation 0ºC ~ 40ºC 0ºC ~ 40ºC
Humidity: 10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90% 10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90%

Storage/Operation
(non-condensed) (non-condensed)
Safety cULus, CB, LVD cULus, CB, LVD
Quality ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000 ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000
EMC CE . FCC 15B.VCCI CE . FCC 15B.VCCI
Reliability EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3 EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
MTBF (hours) 68,000 68,000
RF N/A R&TTE .FCC15C,TELCO

Table 114: VPN-1 Edge Non-ADSL Models Attributes
Attribute VPN-1 Edge X Industrial VPN-1 Edge W

SBXI-166LHGE-6 SBXW-166LHGE-6
Physical Attributes

(width x height x depth) (7.87 x 1.26 x 5.04 inches)
(7.87 x 1.26 x 5.04 inches)
Weight Without DIN rail adapter: 685 g (1.51 lbs)

650 g (1.43 lbs)
With DIN rail adapter:

750 g (1.65 lbs)
Retail box dimensions 290 x 250 x 76 mm 290 x 250 x 80 mm

Retail box weight 1.35 kg (2.98 lbs) 1.38 kg (3.04 lbs)
Main Unit Nominal +24V DC @ 0.6A N/A

Input
Max. Power 12W N/A

Consumption
17W (including USB devices)
Power Supply Nominal 100 ~ 240 VAC; 47 ~ 63Hz 100 ~ 240 VAC
Input 50 ~ 60 Hz

Power Supply Nominal +5V DC @ 3A +5V DC @ 3A

Output
Max. Power 12W 15W

Consumption
17W (including USB devices) 20W (including USB devices)
Temperature: -20ºC ~ 80ºC -20ºC ~ 65ºC

Storage/Transport
Temperature: 0ºC ~ 55ºC 0ºC ~ 40ºC

Operation
Humidity: 10% ~ 95% 10% ~ 85%

Storage/Operation (none-condensed) (non-condensed)
Safety IEC 60950 & EN 60950 EN 60950
Quality ISO 9001, 9002, 14001 ISO 9001, 9002, 14001
EMC EN 55022 & EN 55024 FCC Part 15 B & C
AS/NZS 4268: 2003 A1
DGT
Reliability ETSI EN 300 019-2 - 1, 2, 3 EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3

MTBF (hours) When used with Hirschmann 68,000

RPS30 Industrial 24V DC
power supply: 370,000
When used with supplied 5V
power supply: 68,000
RF N/A R&TTE .FCC15C, TELCO
Wireless Attributes
Table 115: VPN-1 Edge Wireless Attributes
Attribute All Wireless Models
Operation Frequency 2.412-2.484 MHz
Transmission Power 79.4 mW
Modulation OFDM, DSSS, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK, CCK, DQPSK,

DBPSK
WPA Authentication EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP (EAP-GTC), PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2)

Modes

CE Declaration of Conformity
VPN-1 Edge X, X ADSL, W, and W ADSL
SofaWare Technologies Ltd., 3 Hilazon St., Ramat-Gan Israel, Hereby declares that this
equipment is in conformity with the essential requirements specified in Article 3.1 (a) and
3.1 (b) of:
• Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
• Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive – LVD)
• Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive)
In accordance with the following standards:
Table 116: VPN-1 Edge Appliance Standards
Attribute VPN-1 Edge X, VPN-1 Edge W,

VPN-1 Edge X ADSL VPN-1 Edge W ADSL
EMC EN 55022 EN 50081-1
EN 61000-3-2 EN 50082-1
EN 61000-3-3 EN 61000-6-1
EN 61000-4-2 EN 61000-6-3
EN 61000-4-3 EN 55022
EN 61000-4-4 EN 55024
EN 61000-4-5 EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-4-6 EN 61000-3-3

Attribute VPN-1 Edge X, VPN-1 Edge W,

VPN-1 Edge X ADSL VPN-1 Edge W ADSL
EN 61000-4-8 EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-11 EN 61000-4-3
ENV50204 EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-7
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-9
EN 61000-4-10
EN 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-12
Safety EN 60950 EN 60950
IEC 60950 IEC 60950
The "CE" mark is affixed to this product to demonstrate conformance to the R&TTE
Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive) and FCC Part 15 Class B.
The product has been tested in a typical configuration. For a copy of the Original Signed
Declaration (in full conformance with EN45014), please contact SofaWare at the above
address.

VPN-1 Edge X Industrial

SofaWare Technologies Ltd., 3 Hilazon St., Ramat-Gan Israel, Hereby declares that this
equipment is in conformity with the essential requirements specified in Article 3.1 (a) and
3.1 (b) of:
• Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
• Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive – LVD)
• Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive)
In accordance with the following standards:
Table 117: VPN-1 Edge Appliance Standards
Attribute VPN-1 Edge X Industrial
EMC EN 55022: 1998 +A1: 2000 +A2: 2003 Class B
EN 55024: 1998 +A1: 2001 +A2: 2003
EN 61000-3-2: 2000 Class A
EN 61000-3-3: 1995 +A1: 2001
CISPR 22: 1997 +A1: 2000
Safety IEC 60950-1: 2001 (1st Edition)
EN 60950-1: 2001 + A11: 2004
The "CE" mark is affixed to this product to demonstrate conformance to the R&TTE
Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive).
The product has been tested in a typical configuration. For a copy of the Original Signed
Declaration (in full conformance with EN45014), please contact SofaWare at the above
address.

Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Federal Communications Commission Radio

Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment complies with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC
regulations.
Any changes or modifications to this product not explicitly approved by the manufacturer
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and any assurances of Safety or
Performance, and could result in violation of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement for Wireless Models
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. The antenna(s) used for this equipment must be installed to provide a
separation distance of at least eight inches (20 cm) from all persons. This equipment must
not be operated in conjunction with any other antenna.

Appendix A
ADSL Settings
This appendix lists the typical ADSL settings for each country and service provider.
Table 118: ADSL Settings
Country Service Provider Connection VPI VCI Encapsulation

Type
Argentina Arnet PPPoE 0 33 LLC
Argentina Speedy PPPoE 8 35 LLC
Australia Most ISPs PPPoE 8 35 LLC
Australia Arachnet PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Australia Telestra PPPoE 8 35 LLC
Austria Most ISPs PPPoA 8 48 VCMUX
Austria AON PPPoA 1 32 VCMUX
Belgium ADSL Office PPPoE 8 35 VCMUX
Belgium Belgacom ADSL PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX / LLC
Belgium Turboline PPPoA 8 35 LLC
Brazil Brasil Telecom PPPoE 0 35 LLC

(brturbo)
Brazil do rio grande do PPPoE 1 32 LLC

sul são
Appendix A: Specifications 597


Type
Brazil Speedy da PPPoE 8 35 LLC

Telefonica
Brazil Velox da Telemar PPPoE 0 33 LLC
Bulgaria BTK (ISDN) PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Bulgaria BTK (POTS) PPPoE 0 35 LLC
Canada Bell Sympatico PPPoE 0 35 LLC
Czech Republic Cesky Telecom PPPoA 8 48 VCMUX

(PPPoA)
Czech Republic Cesky Telecom PPPoE 8 48 LLC

(PPPoE)
Denmark Cybercity PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Denmark Tiscali PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Denmark Tiscali (World PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX

Online)
Egypt Raya Telecom PPPoA 8 80 VCMUX
France 9Online PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France AOL PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Cegetel ADSL PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX

Max 8 Mb


Type
France Cegetel non PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX

dégroupé 512
IP/ADSL et
dégroupé
France Claranet PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Club-Internet PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France EasyConnect PPPoA 8 35 LLC
France Free non PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX

dégroupé 512/128
& 1024/128
France Free non PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX

dégroupé ADSL
Max
France Freesurf PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France FT PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Generic Netissimo PPPoA 8 35 LLC
France HRNet PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Nerim PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Nordnet PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Tiscali.fr (128k) PPPoA 8 35 LLC
France Tiscali.fr (512k) PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX


Type
France Tiscaly Liberty PPPoA 8 35 LLC

Surf
France Wanadoo PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
France Worldnet PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Germany 1&1 (Dun) PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany Alice DSL PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany Anderer Provider PPPoE 1 32 LLC

für T-DSL (Dun)
Germany Arcor PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany DT PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany QSC PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany Tiscali PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany T-Online (Dun) PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Germany NetCologne PPPoE 8 35 LLC
Germany Mnet PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Hungary Matav PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Iceland Islandssimi PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Iceland Landssimi PPPoA 8 48 VCMUX
India Most ISPs PPPoA 0 32 VCMUX


Type
Ireland Most ISPs PPPoE 8 35 LLC
Israel Bezeq PPPoA 8 48 VCMUX
Italy Albacom PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Aruba PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Liberto.it PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy MC-link PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Nextra PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Telecom Italia PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Telvia PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Tiscali PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Italy Wind PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX / LLC
Mexico Telmex Infinitum PPPoE 8 35 LLC
Morocco Maroc Telecom PPPoA 8 35 VCMUX
Netherlands Bbeyond (PPPoE) PPPoE 0 33 LLC
Netherlands Bbeyond (PPPoA) PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Netherlands KPN PPPoA 8 48 VCMUX
New Zealand New Zealand PPPoA 0 100 VCMUX

Telecom
Poland NETIA PPPoE 8 35 LLC


Type
Poland TPSA PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Portugal Portugal Telecom PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Russia MTU Intel PPPoE 1 50 LLC
Singapore SingNet PPPoA 0 100 VCMUX

Broadband
Slovenia SiOL PPPoE 1 32 LLC
Spain Albura PPPoA 1 32 VCMUX
Spain Arrakis PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Spain Arsys PPPoE 1 33 LLC
Spain Auna PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Spain Colt Teecom PPPoA 0 35 VCMUX
Spain Communitel PPPoA 0 33 VCMUX
Spain ERES MAS PPPoA 8 35 LLC
Spain Euskatel PPPoE 8 32 LLC
Spain Jazztel PPPoA 8 35 LLC
Spain Telefonica PPPoE 8 32 VCMUX / LLC
Spain Telepac PPPoE 0 35 LLC
Spain Terra PPPoE 8 32 LLC
Spain Tiscali PPPoA 1 32 VCMUX


Type
Spain Uni2 PPPoA 1 33 VCMUX
Spain Wanadoo Spain PPPoE 8 32 LLC
Spain Ya.com PPPoE 8 32 LLC
Sweden Skanova PPPoE 8 35 LLC
UAE Etisalat Classical PPPoA 0 50 VCMUX

IP for Business
UAE Etisalat Classical PPPoE 0 100 LLC

IP Single User
UAE Etislat PPPoA 0 50 LLC
UAE UAE-Other PPPoE 0 50 LLC
UK Most ISPs PPPoA 0 38 VCMUX
US AOL PPPoE 0 35 LLC
US BellSouth PPPoE 8 35 LLC
US Covad PPPoE 0 35 LLC
US EarthLink PPPoE 0 35 LLC
US Qwest PPPoE 0 32 LLC
US SBC PPPoE 0 35 LLC
US Sprint PPPoE 0 35 LLC
US Verizon PPPoE 0 35 LLC


Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms
A Certificate Authority
The Certificate Authority (CA) issues
ADSL Modem
certificates to entities such as gateways,
A device connecting a computer to the
users, or computers. The entity later
Internet via an existing phone line.
uses the certificate to identify itself and
ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber
provide verifiable information. For
Line) modems offer a high-speed
instance, the certificate includes the
'always-on' connection.
Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying
C information) of the entity, as well as the
public key (information about itself),
CA and possibly the IP address.
The Certificate Authority (CA) issues
certificates to entities such as gateways, After two entities exchange and validate
users, or computers. The entity later each other's certificates, they can begin
uses the certificate to identify itself and encrypting information between
provide verifiable information. For themselves using the public keys in the
instance, the certificate includes the certificates.
Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying
information) of the entity, as well as the Cracking
public key (information about itself), An activity in which someone breaks
and possibly the IP address. into someone else's computer system,
bypasses passwords or licenses in
After two entities exchange and validate computer programs; or in other ways
each other's certificates, they can begin intentionally breaches computer
encrypting information between security. The end result is that whatever
themselves using the public keys in the resides on the computer can be viewed
certificates. and sensitive data can be stolen without
anyone knowing about it. Sometimes,
Cable Modem tiny programs are 'planted' on the
A device connecting a computer to the computer that are designed to watch out
Internet via the cable television for, seize and then transmit to another
network. Cable modems offer a high- computer, specific types of data.
speed 'always-on' connection.
Glossary of Terms 605

Glossary of Terms
D E
DHCP Exposed Host
Any machine requires a unique IP An exposed host allows one computer
address to connect to the Internet using to be exposed to the Internet. An
Internet Protocol. Dynamic Host example of using an exposed host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a would be exposing a public server,
communications protocol that assigns while preventing outside users from
Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to getting direct access form this server
computers on the network. back to the private network.
DHCP uses the concept of a "lease" or
amount of time that a given IP address
F
will be valid for a computer. Firmware
Software embedded in a device.
DMZ
A DMZ (demilitarized zone) is an G
internal network defined in addition to Gateway
the LAN network and protected by the A network point that acts as an entrance
VPN-1 Edge appliance. to another network.
DNS
The Domain Name System (DNS)
H
refers to the Internet domain names, or Hacking
easy-to-remember "handles", that are An activity in which someone breaks
translated into IP addresses. into someone else's computer system,
bypasses passwords or licenses in
An example of a Domain Name is computer programs; or in other ways
'www.sofaware.com'. intentionally breaches computer
security. The end result is that whatever
Domain Name System resides on the computer can be viewed
Domain Name System. The Domain and sensitive data can be stolen without
Name System (DNS) refers to the anyone knowing about it. Sometimes,
Internet domain names, or easy-to- tiny programs are 'planted' on the
remember "handles", that are translated computer that are designed to watch out
into IP addresses. for, seize and then transmit to another
An example of a Domain Name is computer, specific types of data.
'www.sofaware.com'.

Glossary of Terms
HTTPS IP Spoofing
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure A technique where an attacker attempts
Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL. to gain unauthorized access through a
false source address to make it appear as
A protocol for accessing a secure Web
though communications have originated
server. It uses SSL as a sublayer under
in a part of the network with higher
the regular HTTP application. This
access privileges. For example, a packet
directs messages to a secure port
originating on the Internet may be
number rather than the default Web port
masquerading as a local packet with the
number, and uses a public key to
source IP address of an internal host.
encrypt data
The firewall can protect against IP
HTTPS is used to transfer confidential spoofing attacks by limiting network
user information. access based on the gateway interface
from which data is being received.
Hub
A device with multiple ports, IPSEC
connecting several PCs or network IPSEC is the leading Virtual Private
devices on a network. Networking (VPN) standard. IPSEC
enables individuals or offices to
I establish secure communication
IP Address channels ('tunnels') over the Internet.
An IP address is a 32-bit number that
identifies each computer sending or ISP
receiving data packets across the An ISP (Internet service provider) is a
Internet. When you request an HTML company that provides access to the
page or send e-mail, the Internet Internet and other related services.
Protocol part of TCP/IP includes your
IP address in the message and sends it
L
to the IP address that is obtained by LAN
looking up the domain name in the A local area network (LAN) is a group
Uniform Resource Locator you of computers and associated devices
requested or in the e-mail address you're that share a common communications
sending a note to. At the other end, the line and typically share the resources of
recipient can see the IP address of the a single server within a small
Web page requestor or the e-mail sender geographic area.
and can respond by sending another
message using the IP address it
received.

Glossary of Terms
M Check Point FireWall-1's Stateful

Inspection Network Address Translation
MAC Address (NAT) implementation supports
The MAC (Media Access Control) hundreds of pre-defined applications,
address is a computer's unique hardware services, and protocols, more than any
number. When connected to the Internet other firewall vendor.
from your computer, a mapping relates
your IP address to your computer's NetBIOS
physical (MAC) address on the LAN. NetBIOS is the networking protocol
used by DOS and Windows machines.
Mbps
Megabits per second. Measurement unit P
for the rate of data transmission.
Packet
MTU A packet is the basic unit of data that
The Maximum Transmission Unit flows from one source on the Internet to
(MTU) is a parameter that determines another destination on the Internet.
the largest datagram than can be When any file (e-mail message, HTML
transmitted by an IP interface (without file, GIF file etc.) is sent from one place
it needing to be broken down into to another on the Internet, the file is
smaller units). The MTU should be divided into "chunks" of an efficient
larger than the largest datagram you size for routing. Each of these packets is
wish to transmit un-fragmented. Note: separately numbered and includes the
This only prevents fragmentation Internet address of the destination. The
locally. Some other link in the path may individual packets for a given file may
have a smaller MTU - the datagram will travel different routes through the
be fragmented at that point. Typical Internet. When they have all arrived,
values are 1500 bytes for an Ethernet they are reassembled into the original
interface or 1452 for a PPP interface. file at the receiving end.
N PPPoE
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over
NAT Ethernet) enables connecting multiple
Network Address Translation (NAT) is computer users on an Ethernet local area
the translation or mapping of an IP network to a remote site or ISP, through
address to a different IP address. NAT common customer premises equipment
can be used to map several internal IP (e.g. modem).
addresses to a single IP address, thereby
sharing a single IP address assigned by
the ISP among several PCs.

Glossary of Terms
PPTP decisions from all application layers and

The Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol retains this information in dynamic state
(PPTP) allows extending a local tables for evaluating subsequent
network by establishing private connection attempts. In other words, it
“tunnels” over the Internet. This learns!
protocol it is also used by some DSL
providers as an alternative for PPPoE. Subnet Mask
A 32-bit identifier indicating how the
R network is split into subnets. The subnet
mask indicates which part of the IP
RJ-45
address is the host ID and which
The RJ-45 is a connector for digital
indicates the subnet.
transmission over ordinary phone wire.
Router T
A router is a device that determines the TCP
next network point to which a packet TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is
should be forwarded toward its a set of rules (protocol) used along with
destination. The router is connected to the Internet Protocol (IP) to send data in
at least two networks. the form of message units between
computers over the Internet. While IP
S takes care of handling the actual
Server delivery of the data, TCP takes care of
A server is a program (or host) that keeping track of the individual units of
awaits and requests from client data (called packets) that a message is
programs across the network. For divided into for efficient routing
example, a Web server is the computer through the Internet.
program, running on a specific host, that For example, when an HTML file is
serves requested HTML pages or files. sent to you from a Web server, the
Your browser is the client program, in Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
this case. program layer in that server divides the
file into one or more packets, numbers
Stateful Inspection the packets, and then forwards them
Stateful Inspection was invented by individually to the IP program layer.
Check Point to provide the highest level Although each packet has the same
of security by examining every layer destination IP address, it may get routed
within a packet, unlike other systems of differently through the network.
inspection. Stateful Inspection extracts
information required for security

Glossary of Terms
At the other end (the client program in resource depends on the Internet
your computer), TCP reassembles the application protocol. On the Web
individual packets and waits until they (which uses the Hypertext Transfer
have arrived to forward them to you as a Protocol), an example of a URL is
single file. 'http://www.sofaware.com'.
TCP/IP V
TCP/IP (Transmission Control
VPN
Protocol/Internet Protocol) is the
A virtual private network (VPN) is a
underlying communication protocol of
private data network that makes use of
the Internet.
the public telecommunication
U infrastructure, maintaining privacy
through the use of a tunneling protocol
UDP and security procedures.
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a
communications protocol that offers a VPN tunnel
limited amount of service when A secure connection between a Remote
messages are exchanged between Access VPN Client and a Remote
computers in a network that uses the Access VPN Server.
Internet Protocol (IP). UDP is an
alternative to the Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) and, together with IP, is
sometimes referred to as UDP/IP. Like
the Transmission Control Protocol,
UDP uses the Internet Protocol to
actually get a data unit (called a
datagram) from one computer to
another. Unlike TCP, however, UDP
does not provide the service of dividing
a message into packets (datagrams) and
reassembling it at the other end.
UDP is often used for applications such
as streaming data.
URL
A URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is
the address of a file (resource)
accessible on the Internet. The type of

Index
Index
bridges
8
adding and editing • 204
802.1x
adding connections to • 213
configuring for a wireless network • 244
adding networks to • 208
configuring for ports • 359
explained • 197
A multiple • 202
account, configuring • 399 using • 197
active computers, viewing • 285
C
active connections, viewing • 287
CA, explained • 470, 605
ADSL
cable modem
direct connection • 95, 102
connection • 90, 112
modem • 1, 605
explained • 605
settings • 597
cable type • 57
statistics • 293
certificate
Allow and Forward rules, explained • 307
explained • 470
Allow rules, explained • 307
generating self-signed • 471
Automatic login • 466
importing • 475
B installing • 470
backup connection uninstalling • 477
configuring • 140 Cisco IOS DOS • 335
Block Known Ports • 346 command line interface
Block Port Overflow • 347 controlling the appliance via • 522
Block rules, explained • 307
D
Blocked FTP Commands • 348
DDoS Attack • 326
Index 611
Index
DHCP E
configuring • 144 Email Antispam, see Email Filtering • 405
connection • 92 Email Antivirus, see Email Filtering • 405
explained • 605 Email Filtering
options • 149 Email Antispam • 405
DHCP Server Email Antivirus • 405
enabling/disabling • 144 enabling/disabling • 406
explained • 144 selecting protocols for • 407
diagnostic tools snoozing • 408
Packet Sniffer • 541 temporarily disabling • 408
Ping • 538 EoA connection • 105
Traceroute • 538 Ethernet-based connection • 85, 93, 109
using • 538 Event Log • 277
WHOIS • 538 exposed host
diagnostics • 558 defining a computer as • 370
dialup explained • 370, 606
connection • 120
F
RS232 modem • 130
File and Print Sharing • 351
USB modem • 133
firewall
direct ADSL connection • 95, 102
levels • 298
DMZ
rule types • 305
configuring • 156
setting security level • 298
configuring High Availability for • 217
firewall rules
explained • 156, 606
DNS • 140, 538, 606
changing priority • 313
Dynamic DNS • 15, 391, 397
deleting • 313
enabling/disabling • 312

Index
types • 307 explained • 606

using • 303 using • 74
firmware hub • 17, 57, 140, 217, 579, 607
I
updating manually • 516
IGMP • 353
viewing status • 514
IKE traces, viewing • 481
FTP Bounce • 345
initial login • 69
G installation
gateways cable type • 57
backup • 217 network • 57
default • 156, 179, 217 network requirements • 16, 21, 30, 34
explained • 606 software requirements • 15
ID • 397 Instant Messengers • 356
master • 217 internal VPN Server
Site-to-Site VPN • 414 configuring • 424
explained • 419
H
Internet connection
Header Rejection • 349
configuring • 83
Hide NAT
configuring backup • 140
establishing quick • 139
high availability
terminating • 139
configuring • 217
troubleshooting • 579
explained • 217
viewing information • 137
Host Port Scan • 342
Internet Setup • 99
HTTPS
Internet Wizard • 84
configuring • 527
IP address
Index 613
Index
changing • 154 Manual Login • 466

explained • 607 Max Ping Size • 330
hiding • 155 MTU, explained • 122, 608
IP Fragments • 331
N
ISP, explained • 607
NetBIOS, explained • 608
L network
L2TP VPN Clients changing internal range of • 154
configuring • 427 configuring • 141
L2TP VPN Server configuring a DMZ • 156
about • 414, 420 configuring a virtual access point (VAP)
• 265
configuring • 425
configuring a VLAN • 161
LAN
configuring DHCP options • 149
cable • 57
configuring high availability • 217
configuring High Availability for • 217
configuring the OfficeMode network •
connection • 84, 110
159
explained • 607
configuring the WLAN • 239
ports • 17, 57
enabling DHCP Server on • 144
LAND • 324
enabling Hide NAT • 155
licenses • 285, 514, 558, 579
installation on • 57
upgrading • 518
managing • 141
link configurations, modifying • 193
objects • 170
logs
network objects
exporting • 277
viewing • 277
using • 170
M viewing and deleting • 179
MAC address • 607 Network Quota • 333
node limit, viewing • 285

Index
Non-TCP Flooding • 325 modifying assignments • 190

Null Payload • 337 modifying link configurations • 193
resetting to defaults • 194
O
viewing statuses • 186
OfficeMode
PPPoA connection • 98, 103
about • 159
PPPoE
configuring • 159
connection • 87, 98, 107, 114
P explained • 608
packet • 137, 179, 538, 607, 608 PPTP
Packet Sanity • 328 connection • 89, 116
Packet Sniffer explained • 608
filter string syntax • 544 primary WLAN
using • 541 configuring • 239
Pass rules, explained • 378 print server • 561
password printers
changing • 483 changing ports • 576
setting up • 69 configuring computers to use • 565
Peer to Peer • 354 resetting • 577
Ping • 538 setting up • 562
Ping of Death • 323 using • 561
Port-based VLAN viewing • 575
about • 161 Product Key • 518
Q
deleting • 169
QoS classes
ports
configuring 802.1x security scheme for •
359 assigning services to • 303
managing • 185 built-in • 231, 237
Index 615
Index
deleting • 236 rules

restoring defaults • 237 firewall • 303
VStream Antivirus • 377
R
RADIUS S
configuring VSA • 497 Scan rules, explained • 378
explained • 492 Secure HotSpot
using • 492 customizing • 367
rebooting • 559 enabling/disabling • 366
Remote Access VPN Clients • 414 quick guest users • 489
Remote Access VPN Servers • 414, 420 setting up • 365
Remote Access VPN sites • 435 using • 364
Remote Desktop SecuRemote
accessing a remote desktop • 509 explained • 419
configuring • 502 installing • 426
configuring the host computer • 506 SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server
using • 501 configuring • 422
reports explained • 414
active computers • 285 security
active connections • 287 configuring port-based security • 359
ADSL statistics • 293 configuring servers • 301
event log • 277 creating firewall rules • 303
node limit • 285 defining a computer as an exposed host •
370
traffic • 280
firewall • 298
viewing • 277
Secure HotSpot • 364
wireless statistics • 289
SmartDefense • 314
routers • 140, 217, 538, 579, 609
security policy
RS232 dialup modem, setting up • 130

Index
default • 298 using • 314

setting up • 297 SNMP
serial console • 17, 30 configuring • 532
controlling appliance via • 524 explained • 532
using • 524 software updates • 516
servers checking for manually • 410
configuring • 301 explained • 410
explained • 609 source routing, about • 179
Remote Access VPN • 414, 420 Spanning Tree Protocol
Web • 170, 301, 579 explained • 202
Service Center with WDS • 241
connecting to • 392 SSH
disconnecting from • 399 configuring • 530
refreshing a connection to • 398 explained • 530
services Stateful Inspection • 1, 608, 609
Email Filtering • 405 static IP connection • 91
software updates • 410, 516 Static NAT
Web Filtering • 400 explained • 170
Setup Wizard • 69, 84 using • 171
Site-to-Site VPN gateways • 433 static routes
explained • 414 adding and editing • 180
PPPoE tunnels • 433 explained • 179
Small PMTU • 339 using • 179
SMART Management • 391 viewing and deleting • 184
SmartDefense Strict TCP • 338
categories • 321 subnet masks, explained • 609
configuring • 314 subscription services
Index 617
Index
starting • 392 viewing • 281

viewing information • 397 Traffic Shaper
Sweep Scan • 342 advanced • 229
SynDefender • 341 restoring defaults • 237
Syslog logging setting up • 230
configuring • 520 simplified • 229
explained • 520 using • 229
troubleshooting • 579
T
typographical conventions • vii
Tag-based VLAN
about • 161 U
adding and editing • 167 UDP, explained • 610
deleting • 169 URL, explained • 610
TCP, explained • 609 users
TCP/IP adding and editing • 486
setting up for MAC OS • 46 adding quick guest HotSpot • 489
setting up for Windows XP/2000 • 42 managing • 483
Teardrop • 322 setting up remote VPN access for • 492
technical support • 39 viewing and deleting • 491
Telstra • 118
V
Traceroute • 538
Vendor-Specific Attribute
Traffic Monitor
about • 492
configuring • 284
configuring • 377
exporting reports • 283
virtual access points (VAPs)
using • 280
about • 161, 239
viewing reports • 281
traffic reports
deleting • 169
exporting • 283

Index
VLAN viewing • 478

adding and editing • 164 VPN-1 Edge appliance
deleting • 169 about • 1
port-based • 161, 165 backing up • 552
tag-based • 161, 167 cascading • 64
virtual access points • 265 changing internal IP address of • 154
VPN configuring Internet connection • 83
explained • 414, 610 connecting to network printers • 65
Remote Access • 418, 433 exporting configuration • 552
sites • 414, 464, 465, 466 features • 4
Site-to-Site • 416, 433 importing configuration • 553
tunnnels • 414, 466, 478 installing • 41, 57
viewing IKE traces • 481 maintenance • 513
VPN functionality • 414 models • 2
VPN Server mounting • 49
configuring • 420 preparing for a wireless connection • 64
SecuRemote internal • 419 rebooting • 559
types • 414, 420 resetting to factory defaults • 555
VPN sites securing against theft • 55
adding and editing using VPN-1 Edge X setting the time • 535
• 433
setting up • 65
deleting • 464
technical specifications • 585
VPN-1 Edge Portal
logging on • 466
elements • 76
VPN tunnels
initial login • 69
creation and closing of • 478
logging on • 72
establishing • 466
remotely accessing • 74
Index 619
Index
using • 76 features • 4
VPN-1 Edge W models • 2
front panel • 32 VStream Antivirus
network requirements • 30 about • 373
package contents • 29 configuring • 377
rear panel • 30 configuring advanced settings • 385
VPN-1 Edge W ADSL configuring policy • 377
front panel • 37 enabling/disabling • 375
network requirements • 34 rules • 378
package contents • 34 updating • 390
rear panel • 35 viewing database information • 376
VPN-1 Edge W product family VStream Antivirus rules
about • 1 adding and editing • 379
features • 9 changing priority • 384
models • 2 deleting • 385
VPN-1 Edge X enabling/disabling • 384
front panel • 18 types • 378
network requirements • 16
W
package contents • 16
WAN
rear panel • 17
cable • 57
VPN-1 Edge X ADSL
ports • 17, 57, 140
front panel • 23
WDS
network requirements • 21
explained • 241
package contents • 20
links • 241
rear panel • 21
WDS links
VPN-1 Edge X product family
configuring • 269
about • 1
explained • 241

Index
Web Filtering
selecting categories for • 402
snoozing • 403
temporarily disabling • 403
Welchia • 334
WEP • 239, 244
WHOIS • 538
wireless networks
troubleshooting connectivity • 273
viewing statistics for • 289
wireless protocols • 244
wireless stations
viewing • 289
Worm Catcher • 350
WPA2 • 244
WPA-Enterprise • 244
WPA-Personal • 239, 244
Index 621

CheckPointVPN 1EdgeUserGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CheckPointVPN 1EdgeUserGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CheckPointVPN 1EdgeUserGuide PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Check Point VPN-1 Edge

Internet Security Appliance

Part No: 700800, December 2006

Configuring the Internet Connection ................................................................................................83

ii Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

Predefined QoS Classes ..................................................................................................................231

Viewing VStream Signature Database Information ........................................................................376

iv Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users ...............................................................................................489

Using Network Printers ....................................................................................................................561

vi Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

About This Guide

VPN-1 Edge X , with or without ADSL, and VPN-1 Edge X Industrial

VPN-1 Edge W, with or without ADSL

All products with USB ports – specifically, VPN-1 Edge W, VPN-1

VPN-1 Edge X or VPN-1 Edge W, with ADSL only

VPN-1 Edge X or VPN-1 Edge W, without ADSL only

Chapter 1: About This Guide vii

About Your Check Point VPN-1 Edge Appliance

VPN-1 Edge Products

Table 1: VPN-1 Edge X Products

Hardware Series Models

VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge X8

VPN-1 Edge X16

VPN-1 Edge X32

VPN-1 Edge X Industrial VPN-1 Edge X8 Industrial

VPN-1 Edge X16 Industrial

VPN-1 Edge X32 Industrial

VPN-1 Edge XU Industrial

2 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

VPN-1 Edge X ADSL VPN-1 Edge X8 ADSL

VPN-1 Edge X16 ADSL

VPN-1 Edge X32 ADSL

VPN-1 Edge XU ADSL

Table 2: VPN-1 Edge W Products

Hardware Series Models

VPN-1 Edge W VPN-1 Edge W8

VPN-1 Edge W16

VPN-1 Edge W32

VPN-1 Edge W ADSL VPN-1 Edge W8 ADSL

VPN-1 Edge W16 ADSL

VPN-1 Edge W32 ADSL

VPN-1 Edge WU ADSL

Feature VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge X VPN-1 Edge X

SKU Prefix CPUTM-EDGE- CPUTM-XG-n-IND CPUTM-EDGE-XG-

Concurrent Users 8 / 16 / 32 / Unrestricted

Firewall Throughput 150 (XU) / 80 (Other Models)

VPN Throughput (Mbps) 30 (XU) / 20 (Other Models)

Concurrent Firewall 8,000

4-Port LAN Switch 10/100 Mbps

WAN Port Ethernet, 10/100 Ethernet, 10/100 ADSL2+

4 Check Point VPN-1 Edge User Guide

ADSL Standards — — ADSL2, ADSL2+,

DMZ/WAN2 Port 10/100 Mbps

Dialup Backup With external serial / USB modem

Console Port (Serial)

USB 2.0 Ports — 2 2

Firewall & Security Features

Check Point Stateful